WltH-tHE* 
 
 Er.D. CUM
 
 For 
 For 
 For 
 For 
 
 The 
 boo 
 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES
 
 ass 
 
 - .-.- 
 
 i | - 
 
 mm 
 
 : I 

 
 if II 
 
 A
 
 
 With the Jungle Folk
 
 With the Jungle Folk 
 
 A Sketch of 
 
 Brumese Village Life 
 
 By 
 
 E. D. Cuming 
 
 Author of " In the Shadow of the Pagoda " 
 
 Illustrated by a Burmese Artist 
 
 London 
 Osgood, Mcllvaine ? Co, 
 
 45 Albemarle Street, W. 
 * 1897
 
 A/
 
 PREFACE 
 
 A FORMER book on Burma was so kindly received 
 that my indulgent critics must be held responsible 
 for the appearance of this commonplace story of 
 Burmese village life. 
 
 Imagination has little part in it, save in the 
 dacoit chapters. If I have made mistakes in 
 these passages, correction by any one having 
 dacoit experience will be gratefully received. I 
 have no desire to " inform," but wish still less to 
 misinform. 
 
 For many useful hints and suggestions I have 
 to thank Moung Gyee, son of Moung Kheen, and 
 Pho Thin. 
 
 I beg indulgence for my artist, who, as a 
 " son of the town," is at a disadvantage in por- 
 traying jungle scenes. 
 
 By the advice of my publishers, the majority 
 of the pictures have been reproduced exactly as 
 drawn, in order to preserve their character.
 
 vi PREFACE 
 
 Lest they should mislead the reader, it seems 
 advisable to point out that this method of re- 
 production also serves to illustrate a conspicuous 
 trait in the character of the race to which my 
 artist belongs. His houses in many cases are 
 disproportionately small : this is not because jungle 
 village houses are very minute, but because it is 
 less trouble to draw a little house than a big one. 
 I had requested the artist, moreover, to represent 
 one or two night scenes to correspond with the 
 text, but he objected that as you could not see 
 things in the dark you could not paint them. 
 The light of day is therefore shed upon a few 
 incidents which occurred at night. 
 
 E. D. C.
 
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 
 
 Mak Pan at the Loom . Frontispiece. 
 
 Out on the Krvins , . To face page 6 
 
 " On Urgent Private Affairs " . go 
 
 Bewitching the Water . QC> 
 
 The Sixteen Animal Game 70 
 
 >, / (/ 
 
 Propitiating the River Spirits . . 200 
 
 Ko Moung Galay's Gallant Defence of Myothit 156 
 
 Boh Talis Visit to Nyounglay . . )} 
 
 The Old Kyoung . 
 
 Mah Tsay . . . 
 
 The Funeral Obsequies of Go Yan . . S08 
 
 The Bridegroom . . . QQI
 
 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 MOUNG PHO LONE squatted on the platform of the 
 little watch -hut puffing his cheroot, while he gazed 
 blankly over his knees at the night. Before, and 
 on either hand, the whispering grain waved in 
 moonlit billows through deepening dusk to the 
 jungle outlined black and ragged against the 
 purple sky, a grey sea murmuring in the night 
 wind. Now an owl chased its shadow over the 
 paddy as it ranged for rats ; now a beetle boomed 
 past ; and now the pariah curled up on the ground 
 below the hut growled in his sleep as if the 
 sambhur belling on the wooded hills behind dis- 
 turbed him. A bunch of thin coir ropes tied 
 round a bamboo at Pho Lone's feet starred away 
 like limp telegraph lines on the poles which carried 
 them over the paddy ; and the moon picked out 
 the dangling bamboo clappers which by day scared 
 birds from the ripe ears. 
 
 Pho Lone, swathed in his pasoh, his arms on his
 
 2 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 knees and his chin on his arms, stared out at the 
 skyline. 
 
 " You do not sleep," said a drowsy voice inside 
 the hut. " Why do you not sleep ? " 
 
 Pho Lone took his cheroot from his mouth, and 
 without turning his head, answered that he did 
 not wish to sleep yet. 
 
 "It is courting time," said another voice, also 
 drowsy, " therefore Pho Lone must remain awake." 
 
 Pho Lone shifted his feet uneasily, and said, 
 laughing, that Mouiig Yeik was one of the wise 
 men who could tell what another's thoughts were. 
 But the creaking of the bamboos showed that he 
 was roused from those thoughts whatever they 
 might be. 
 
 You could not move in the hut without making 
 it creak and tremble all over. It was only required 
 for two or three weeks while the grain was ripen- 
 ing, and a bundle of bamboos and some brushwood 
 serve to build a hut that will give shelter from 
 sun and dew ; it was not much larger than a big 
 dog-kennel and was perched on a platform as high 
 as your hand could reach. 
 
 "I think Moung Maw is now in Mah Hehn's 
 house sitting at Mah Pan's side," said Moung Yeik 
 presently. 
 
 " I think so too," said Pho Lone ; but the 
 bamboos creaked again and louder. 
 
 " Nevermind, my friend," yawned Moung Yeik, 
 " when the field work is finished, I will go with
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 3 
 
 you every evening to Mah Hehn's and sit with 
 deaf ears." 
 
 Pho Lone replied that it was very good, and 
 that he should remind Moung Yeik of his promise ; 
 then to escape more teasing he got up and crept 
 in to his mat. 
 
 The night was chilly, and he was glad to draw 
 his old red blanket over his head ; but for long 
 after the others were snoring he lay awake think- 
 ing jealously of Mah Hmway Pan and Moung 
 Maw. He could imagine them sitting side by 
 side in her mother's house, while young Tha Tway, 
 Moung Maw's brother, squatted on the verandah 
 looking another way. Last year Pho Lone had 
 enjoyed the weeks spent guarding the paddy 
 before harvest as much as any one. It is pleasant 
 to lie all day in the shade smoking and chewing 
 betel, with nothing to do except give the clapper 
 ropes a pull now and again ; and as birds come to 
 feed only in the early morning and evening, the 
 watcher may sleep all through the heat of the day. 
 But last year Pho Lone was not in love with Mah 
 Pan, and that made all the difference. The hut 
 was a great way from Myothit village, and the 
 baying of the pariahs sounded quite faint in the 
 distance. By daylight one might walk nearly in 
 a straight line to the village along the low bunds 
 which divide the fields, or go round through the 
 shady jungle, which was the pleasanter way though 
 three times as far. Neither path was good after
 
 4 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 dark ; the bunds were full of holes in which you 
 might break your legs, and it is not well to walk 
 in the jungle at night because of demons and evil 
 spirits. In any case it was too far to go merely 
 to see a girl, and Pho Lone only felt that it was bad 
 luck Moung Maw's being able to visit Mah Pan 
 at young man's time, while he himself could only 
 see her by day when women are not sweet. How- 
 ever, in a week or so the paddy farthest from the 
 village would be cut and he should be able to live 
 at home again, when he would make up for lost 
 time. But the paddy must be protected : how late 
 it was now, the moon shining in through the chinks 
 like that. Moung Maw must certainly have left 
 Mah Hehn's now ; it was a pity Moung Maw was 
 a carpenter ; if he had been a cultivator he would 
 have to come and guard his crops. Pho Lone was 
 asleep. 
 
 The deer stole like ghosts from the blackness of 
 the jungle and stood in the shadows snuffing and 
 pricking their ears ; only the complaining screech 
 of the owls above the scream of the crickets dis- 
 turbed the night, and they stalked slowly down 
 the grass slope and across yesterday's stubble to 
 eat their fill of the standing grain. Then the wild 
 swine, like the shadow of a cloud, came out for 
 their share. There was plenty for all, but two 
 young hogs fell to quarrelling and woke the pariah, 
 who ran out and barked both deer and pigs back 
 to the forest before Mounsj Yeik shouted to silence
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 5 
 
 him. Then the owls and crickets had the moon- 
 light to themselves again. 
 
 The other two were still asleep under their 
 blankets when Pho Lone awoke in the morning 
 and sat up on his mat to look out. It was very 
 cold. A white shroud of mist lay on the flats, 
 hiding all but the crowns of the distant trees ; 
 the paddy drooped under the weight of dew, and 
 water dripped heavily from the roof. The red 
 sun, just peeping over the jungle, gave no warmth, 
 and Pho Lone, shivering, was half inclined to roll 
 himself up again and wait till one of his friends 
 should wake and light the fire. But they seemed 
 so sound asleep and he was so cold that he folded 
 his blanket over his head and shoulders and crept 
 out over the wet bamboos, down the ladder, to the 
 blot of ashes whereon lay the charred ends of three 
 logs which were being burned whole to save the 
 work of cutting up. The logs were still smoulder- 
 ing under the feathery ash, so Pho Lone tucked 
 his pasoh about his hips and went to work. They 
 were thick as his thigh, and in length twice the 
 stretch of his arms ; but standing astride he knit 
 his fingers underneath and swung the glowing 
 ends together ; then, having laid a few sticks 
 against the embers, crouched to blow up a blaze. 
 He had to stop for breath many times before he 
 got anything but a lazy curl of smoke, for the 
 sticks were green, and damp with dew besides : 
 but in about the time needed to boil a pot of rice
 
 6 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 flame burst up, pale in the brightening sunshine, 
 and Pho Lone sat back on his heels to warm 
 himself. 
 
 The fire had begun to burn briskly when the 
 creaking of bamboos made him turn to see Shway 
 Toon coming down the ladder. 
 
 " You always wake when there is fire," said Pho 
 Lone a little crossly. 
 
 " Yes," answered Shway Toon with a chuckle. 
 " Ho, neighbour ! there is fire." 
 
 Moung Yeik came out at once, wrapping his 
 blanket about him. He squatted beside Pho Lone- 
 and, looking in his face said gravely it was much 
 trouble to light the fire 011 such a morning. Pho 
 Lone did not answer. Moung Yeik was chewing 
 betel, so it was plain he had been awake for some 
 time. 
 
 The sun rose higher and rolled away the mist 
 to see a shining golden sea where the moon saw a 
 cold grey one : the dew-fall from the roof grew 
 slow and stopped, and the diamonds vanished 
 from the grass. A family of crows came and 
 perched on the hut to see if there was anything 
 to steal, and finding the rice-pot not even on the 
 fire, flew away scolding, towards the village. 
 Then a chattering flight of parrokeets swept like 
 a bow down from the jungle and dropped into the 
 grain. 
 
 " Birds," said Shway Toon. Moung Yeik, who 
 was nearest, shook off his blanket, and reaching
 
 OUT ON THE KWINS
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 7 
 
 for the ropes overhead, pulled till the clappers 
 rattled and rag streamers danced. A flutter, a 
 swelling roar of wings and the parrokeets poised 
 to fly off shrieking. There was no breakfast for 
 them on the kwins nowadays ; cobwebs of scares 
 stretched from a dozen little huts peeping above 
 the paddy like rocks in the sea. 
 
 It is only for a little while after sunrise in the 
 cold season that the fire is pleasant, and the 
 young men, who had already begun to edge 
 away from it, now threw off their blankets and 
 twisted up their hair. It was time to think 
 about morning rice, so Pho Lone filled the chatty 
 and set it on the fire ; they were not going to 
 work until the people came out from Myothit. 
 
 Kice had been eaten and cheroots smoked 
 before the screeching of cart-wheels told that the 
 villagers had set out. Pho Lone, looking round 
 from time to time, followed the carts by the 
 dust-cloud. 
 
 " There are many people coming I think ; hear 
 the wheels." 
 
 " Yes," replied Moling Yeik, smiling at him, 
 " every one in Myothit conies to-day, except the 
 carpenter." 
 
 Pho Lone laughed. Moung Maw was very 
 busy just now repairing his neighbours' paddy 
 boats which had been drawn up on the creek 
 bank ever since the end of last hot weather. 
 There was always something to be done to each
 
 8 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 before it was ready to launch again ; new oar- 
 posts to put in, split planks to replace, or perhaps 
 a crack to caulk and clamp in the great hollowed 
 log which forms the lower hull. Several of the 
 village boats were already in the water waiting 
 for the cargoes of grain they would carry to 
 Bassein for sale at the English mills, but Pho 
 Lone knew that Moung Maw had still many 
 days work to do on Moung Byoo's big boat, which 
 carried fourteen hundred baskets of paddy. Pho 
 Lone took particular interest in that boat for 
 Moung Byoo was Mah Pan's father. 
 
 The screaming and groaning of the wheels on 
 their ungreased wooden axles began to grow 
 louder again after being nearly lost by distance, 
 and the carts could be seen coming round in the 
 jungle shade. The heavy water-buffaloes moved 
 slowly, but presently you could hear the tong 
 tong of the bells at their necks and then the 
 voices of the young men and women. At last 
 they clattered down the bank into the stubble 
 while the girls, packed tightly in the carts, clung 
 to each other, screaming and laughing by turns. 
 The drivers unyoked the cattle and sent them 
 away in charge of the little boys to graze, while 
 the girls shook out their tameins and waded 
 through the long straw to the hut where Pho 
 Lone and his friends squatted awaiting them. 
 
 " I think everybody in the village has come to- 
 day," Pho Lone called to Mah Pan who, with one
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 9 
 
 or two other girls, was sitting down in the scanty 
 shade to light her cheroot. He had not moved 
 when she approached and she did not seem to 
 see him, though she knew quite well he was 
 there. She glanced up now and smiled, so he 
 took courage and went to sit near her. She 
 looked very pretty this morning : her working 
 dress, an old cotton tamein of faded pink check, 
 left her plump arms and shoulders bare to the 
 breast, while its single fold hinted the soft curves 
 of her figure. Three white blossoms set off the 
 blackness of her smoothly coiled hair, and in her 
 ears she wore yellow glass nadoungs thick as Pho 
 Lone's finger. Very few girls of her age could 
 wear such thick ones, for stretching the holes the 
 borer makes with his needle is painful. Mali Mee, 
 who sat beside her, wore nadoungs no thicker 
 than a paddy straw ; but then Mah Mee did not 
 think so much about her appearance ; her skin 
 was much darker than Mah Pan's, and her 
 mother used to say she had a nose as big and 
 -as thin as an Englishwoman's ; so it would have 
 been odd if she had thought herself pretty. 
 Nevertheless, everybody in Myothit liked Mah 
 Mee. 
 
 " Why do you stay out here on the kwins?" 
 Mah Pan asked Pho Lone who sat staring at 
 her. 
 
 Pho Lone replied that she knew he came on 
 -account of his old father ; if he did not do the
 
 10 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 scaring his father must and he always got pains 
 in his bones if he slept out in the fields. 
 
 " I do not like to stay," he added looking at 
 her. 
 
 Mah Pan did not believe that ; she thought he 
 liked the easy life. Anyhow it showed that he 
 did not care to come and see her. 
 
 Pho Lone protested, but she would not listen, 
 turning her back on him to talk to Mah Mee. 
 Of course he was not going to court a snub before 
 everbody, so he went to sit with some of the 
 neighbours who sat smoking and talking till the 
 kullah coolies should come before they began 
 work. 
 
 The Myothit cultivators could not get in their 
 great crop of paddy without help ; so at each 
 harvest they sent to Bassein to hire the big, black 
 Strangers from the West, who were always eager 
 to earn money. There is no work for coolies in 
 the rice mills until the grain is brought to market, 
 and they were glad to come to the jungle and 
 help reaping. They could not speak Burmese, 
 but that did not matter as they knew what they 
 had to do and nobody wanted to talk to them. 
 They were not at all like Burmese people. You 
 could see that now as they filed along the bunds 
 on their way out. They walked one behind 
 another, a long line of men, solemn as buffaloes 
 and as silent. All were dressed alike : a dirty, 
 blue rag about the loins, and another round the
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 11 
 
 head, and a string with a key tied round the waist, 
 was the dress of each. 
 
 " What does a kullah keep in his hox ? " asked 
 Moung Yeik, as the coolies streamed off the bund 
 and squatted in a group a little apart. 
 
 " Clothes and pice," suggested a neighbour. 
 
 " I think he wears all his clothes," said Moung 
 Yeik, coming nearer the truth than he supposed. 
 
 " I know what he keeps there," struck in another 
 man. " I can tell." 
 
 " Tell ! " said everybody turning to him. 
 
 " He keeps things belonging to Men." 
 
 "Moung Pay thinks of the big bundle of 
 cheroots a kullah stole from his boat at the mill 
 last season," laughed Moung Yeik. " He could 
 not tell which one took them." 
 
 " How can one tell ? " asked Moung Pay. " The 
 animals are all alike." 
 
 " They are," agreed several men. " Their black 
 faces are all quite the same." 
 
 " Now then," said Moung Byoo, going to the 
 coolies and pointing to the paddy, " work t 
 work ! " 
 
 The strangers blinked at him stupidly for a 
 minute ; then one grunted and took up his sickle, 
 like a great bird's claw stuck through the end of 
 a handle. The villagers watched them working 
 for some time before any one thought of moving ; 
 when you can hire kullahs who seem really to 
 like work it is stupid to exert yourself more than
 
 12 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 you must. But presently Ko Moung Galay, the 
 headman of Myothit, jerked himself upon his 
 feet, saying, " Go ! " And the rest got up slowly, 
 tucked up their pasohs, and drifted out to reap. 
 Pho Lone was the last to go ; he lingered on, 
 hoping Mah Pan would speak to him. But she 
 would not look his way, and at last he rose in a 
 huff and went to take his place in line with the 
 rest, who were cutting paddy in intervals of talk 
 and laughter. 
 
 Reaping is very hard work, because after the 
 paddy has been laid by dragging a bamboo over 
 it you must stoop to cut off the ears, and stooping 
 with the sun on one's bare back is tiring ; so 
 naturally you stop pretty often to stretch your- 
 self and see how your neighbours are getting on, 
 or to take a few pulls at a cheroot. The coolies 
 did much more than the village men. When Moung 
 Byoo threw down his sickle and strolled back to 
 the hut to rest, their line was far in front. But 
 then they had been promised an extra rupee each 
 if the work were finished quickly, and, as Moung 
 Yeik said, a kullah will do anything to have a 
 few more pice to count before he goes to sleep at 
 night. 
 
 Pho Lone sat down near Mah Pan, but he did 
 not speak to her and tried not to look that way. 
 Two or three times she spoke of Moung Maw so 
 that he might hear, but he took no notice even 
 when she told Mah Mee that Moung Maw was
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE IS 
 
 going to row in her father's boat when they took 
 the paddy to Bassein. 
 
 "Moung Maw!" exclaimed Mah Mee, "why 
 does he row in your father's boat ? " 
 
 Mah Pan laughed. " I think he likes to do so 
 this year," she said. 
 
 "I think you will go in the boat," said Mah 
 Mee. 
 
 Mah Pan was not sure, but thought perhaps 
 she should go one trip. Moung Byoo would 
 certainly go three or four times, and her mother 
 intended to accompany him to see that he did not 
 gamble away all the money. 
 
 Pho Lone could hardly keep still while he 
 listened to this. Mah Pan meant him to hear 
 what she was saying ; he could tell that by her 
 voice. 
 
 " Your mother grows very careful," said Mah 
 Mee after a pause. " Why is she so careful ? " 
 
 " She wishes to earn Merit," answered Mah 
 Pan. " She says she must gain Jcoothoo, and 
 wishes to build a little kyoung." 
 
 Mah Mee took her cheroot from her lips and 
 stared. Mah Hehn had often said that she should 
 like to perform this Work of Merit ; but so had 
 many other women and men in Myothit. It was 
 news that she really meant to do it, though one does 
 not save money without a purpose. The village 
 hpoongyee was always telling his supporters that 
 the person who built him a new monastery would
 
 14 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 thereby gain very great Merit and much honour. 
 But the work would cost three or four hundred 
 rupees, and nobody had thought seriously of it. 
 Certainly the kyoung in which the holy man now 
 lived was very old and ruinous. It leaned over 
 to one side, there were great gaps in the plank 
 walls, and the boards in several places were so 
 hollowed by white ants that you could push your 
 finger right through. Ko Moung Galay, Moung 
 Byoo and other men had gained a good deal of 
 merit by making repairs when they had wood and 
 leisure to devote to the task ; but they were 
 content to stop at that, though each one agreed 
 with the hpoongyee that a new monastery would 
 gain far more for the builder than for the priest 
 who consented to dwell in it. It would have been 
 strange had they denied it, when everybody knew 
 that to build the kyoung would be an action so 
 meritorious that the builder might make his 
 mind tolerably easy about future existences ; 
 while the hpoongyee could gain nothing by 
 moving from his old ruined dwelling into a new 
 one. The only wonder was that some one had not 
 seized such an opportunity long ago. 
 
 At any other time Pho Lone would have been 
 quite as much interested as Mah Mee in Mah 
 Hehn's project ; but just now he could think of 
 nothing save what he had heard about Moung 
 Maw ; and when the shadows, creeping under the 
 hut, told that it was time to resume work, he went
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 15 
 
 out into the field without having spoken a word 
 to Mah Pan. He was not going to talk to a girl 
 who slighted him as she did, and he would not go 
 and see her any more after this. He grasped his 
 sickle and sawed off great handfuls of ears as 
 though cutting himself free, but he heard her gay 
 voice above the hum of talk about him and felt 
 like a fish in a net. 
 
 By-and-by the women came to gather up the 
 cut paddy and pile it with the grain inwards to 
 await the sleds and carts which would carry it to 
 the threshing-floor. Pho Lone's heart gave a leap, 
 for he heard Mah Pan's voice behind him. There 
 were fifty swathes to choose from and she had 
 chosen his or one very near it. He did not look 
 round ; every sheaf she collected brought her 
 nearer, but he went on cutting without turning 
 his head ; she should not think he knew she was 
 there. 
 
 " You work very hard." 
 
 Pho Lone nearly dropped his sickle half way 
 through a bunch of straw, for Mah Pan was sitting 
 close behind him. She smiled as he stood up 
 straight and turned. 
 
 " Everybody had breakfast in your father's 
 house this morning," she remarked. 
 
 As Moung Let was chief partner in the twenty 
 acres of land he farmed with Shway Toon and 
 Moung Yeik, and it was their paddy which had 
 been reaped to-day, it was hardly necessary for
 
 16 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Mah Pan to come for the express purpose of tell- 
 ing him that. If Moung Let had not invited his 
 neighbours to eat the morning rice at his house 
 when he asked their help, it would have been very 
 strange quite unheard of in Myothit or any- 
 where else. Moung Let would never neglect the 
 civility expected by ancient custom. Pho Lone 
 said yes, he supposed so, and stood turning his 
 sickle in his hands. 
 
 " In whose boat do you row this season ?" Mah 
 Pan asked suddenly, after a silence. 
 
 Pho Lone did not know ; he had not thought 
 about it yet ; there was plenty of time. 
 
 " My father is already engaging rowers," said 
 Mah Pan drawing a straw through her fingers. 
 
 Pho Lone thought it was wise of her father ; 
 he wanted many rowers for that big boat. 
 
 Mah Pan thought so too. He had engaged 
 nearly all his crew now she believed : Moung 
 Gyaw, Poh Sein, Loo Oung, Zah Nee, and and 
 several others. Her father always liked to 
 engage his rowers early and so get the best 
 oarsmen of the strong young fellows in Myothit. 
 
 Pho Lone observed that he had a very good 
 crew last season ; and, as Mah Pan did not seem 
 to have any more to say, balanced his sickle as if 
 to begin work again. 
 
 " If my father asks you to row, will you come?" 
 she asked smiling. 
 
 Pho Lone tried to hesitate but could not. He
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 17 
 
 smiled back and said he would take an oar if 
 Moung Byoo wanted him. 
 
 " It is very good," said Mah Pan, " he will ask 
 you ; I will tell him. I am going in the boat." 
 
 She smiled again and got up to rejoin the other 
 women ; for the sun was low now and the little 
 boys were already dragging the buffaloes by their 
 nose lines to the carts.
 
 CHAPTER II 
 
 " STOP then ! " cried Pho Lone pulling at the 
 driving lines. " Stop ! " 
 
 The screeching of the wheels died in a groan as 
 the buffaloes answered the tugs at their noses and 
 stood still, sawing their necks against the yoke. 
 Pho Lone uncurled himself to push one beast's 
 quarters out with his foot that he might get down, 
 for Shway Toon, who sprawled on top of the load, 
 was calling that paddy had fallen off. He went 
 back, raked up the scattered ears with his fingers 
 and packed them into the cart, grumbling. 
 
 " Can't you hold it on better ? " he asked his 
 friend who peered down at him. " Four times 
 now paddy has fallen and we have come a very 
 little way." 
 
 Shway Toon squirted a mouthful of red betel 
 juice and replied that he could keep the load firm 
 if the cart were properly driven ; he thought his 
 young friend could not drive buffaloes very well. 
 
 Pho Lone grunted contemptuously and told him 
 he had better come down and drive himself. But 
 Shway Toon only rolled his chew and smiled ; it
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 19 
 
 was pleasanter to lie up there on the paddy than 
 squat on the cart-pole jamming one's back against 
 the load to avoid being shaken off. 
 
 Pho Lone climbed back to his perch on the pole 
 between the buffaloes' buttocks and poked up the 
 cattle, bawling his opinion of Shway Toon above 
 the squeal of the axles. It was impossible for 
 any one to drive smoothly over the kwins. The 
 long stubble hid places where the ground was so 
 soft that the wheel sank half-way to the hub, 
 shooting off great swathes of paddy in spite of 
 Shway Toon's outspread arms and legs. A rope 
 would have saved much trouble but they had 
 forgotten to bring one. Besides the soft spots, 
 there was a bund to get over at every stone's- 
 throw ; straw and earth had been heaped against 
 each to make a path, but nevertheless the clumsy 
 cart bumped and jolted till it seemed that the 
 axle must surely snap. 
 
 " I wish we had a sled," sighed Pho Lone as he 
 pulled up again to collect more fallen paddy, " a 
 sled is much better." 
 
 " Yes," agreed Shway Toon, with the air of one 
 regretting good advice thrown away, "it is a pity 
 you did not make one." 
 
 Pho Lone took no notice of this speech. While 
 he had been helping Moung Byoo to build his 
 sled, Shway Toon had lain in his house just 
 opposite, looking on. When urged to get to work, 
 he always answered that it was foolish to bother
 
 20 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 about the harvest while the paddy was green ; so, 
 as Pho Lone was never able to begin a job by 
 himself, the time came to go and live out in the 
 watch-hut before a single bamboo had been cut. 
 A sled is far more suitable than a cart for carry- 
 ing in the grain ; it is easier to load, carries more, 
 and above all, it slides safely over the mud-holes 
 and bunds. A dozen of them, like rude ship gang- 
 ways, might be seen on the kwins to-day, for all 
 the crop was cut and everybody was bringing his 
 grain to stack by the threshing-floor behind the 
 village. 
 
 The buffaloes waded slowly through the stubble, 
 heeding their driver's stick as little as the glisten- 
 ing flies which swarmed about their eyes and 
 nostrils. The air was hot and still but the fields 
 were full of life. Fat bronze lizards basked on 
 the bunds, too lazy to move even when the shadow 
 of the passing cart fell on them ; now and again a 
 snake peeped above the grass and sank again with 
 a whispered hiss ; in the wet corners of the fields, 
 little red land-crabs trundled out of the way to 
 draw into their holes. Overhead a kite floated, 
 whistling sadly, as if calling his mate to join him 
 and go to the coast where kites spend the dry 
 season. 
 
 It was hard work dragging the heavily laden 
 cart over the fields, and the buffaloes stopped of 
 their own accord when they came to the threshing- 
 floor on the edge of the waste land.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 21 
 
 Preparations for threshing were going on all 
 round. The boys and women were unloading the 
 sleds, and piling the paddy from each holding in 
 a low stack by itself. A party of young men were 
 sweeping the floor clean with branches and bunches 
 of straw, for it would be wanted to-morrow if not 
 this afternoon. That floor had existed as long as 
 any one in Myothit could remember. Oo Yan, the 
 oldest man in the village, used to tell how his 
 father said it was a fine floor when he was a young 
 man ; and that was in the time when there were 
 no white men and no mills in Bassein, and the 
 Myothit paddy land was only enough to grow 
 house-rice. It was a good floor, whatever its age, 
 made of earth and dung mixed and trodden down ; 
 each rainy season left it a round patch of evil- 
 smelling mud, honeycombed by the hoofs of 
 wandering cattle ; but when the monsoon was 
 over in October, the holes were filled up and 
 the surface smoothed so that the floor sloped from 
 centre to rim like a paper umbrella, and a few 
 weeks' sunshine baked it hard as a road. A stout 
 post, grooved deep by the buffalo ropes, stood in 
 the middle ; that had been renewed in Pho Lone's 
 time, for the rains and white ants work havoc with 
 wood. A little way off, men were clearing the 
 stubble and weeds from a round space which was 
 to serve as a second floor ; for the harvest was 
 heavy, a full sixteen anna crop, Ko Moung Galay 
 said, and two floors would be required if the grain
 
 22 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 was to be ready when the market opened at the 
 end of January. A bare spot, from which the 
 paddy can be swept up when the buffaloes have 
 trodden it out, is really all that is wanted for 
 threshing. Some distance from the floors Moung- 
 Maw and other men were putting the last touches 
 to the winnowing stage. It was finished save for 
 the ladders, and looked like two steps of a giant's 
 staircase, the first a man's height, the second as 
 high again. The older men were sitting in the 
 shade of a stack, chewing betel and smoking ; a 
 live ash would have put an end to the calcu- 
 lations they were making on the out-turn of the 
 threshing, but the chance of fire did not occur 
 to anybody. Life would not be worth living if 
 one were always thinking of misfortunes that 
 may happen. 
 
 Pho Lone looked about for Mah Pan, but he 
 could not see her. He did not feel at all happy. 
 Her father had asked him to take an oar in his 
 boat and two days after, Mah Pan had said she 
 was going with Mah Mee in Ko Moung Galay's 
 boat. Ever since he heard this Pho Lone had 
 been trying to exchange with one of Ko Moung 
 Galay's rowers, though his friends advised him to 
 keep his oar in Moung Byoo's. 
 
 " She says this to tease," Shway Toon sagely 
 observed when Pho Lone spoke to him about it. 
 " If you exchange with Bah Thet she will say, ' I 
 go with my father.' '
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 23 
 
 But Pho Lone was not satisfied. It was quite 
 possible that she did intend to go in Ko Moung 
 Galay's boat, for his daughter Mah Mee was her 
 particular friend ; and he had determined to ask 
 Mah Pan the next time he saw her what she really 
 meant to do. He was sitting in the shade of the 
 cart-tail smoking gloomily, when Mah Mee came 
 by and called saucily that he "must go to her 
 house." He laughed in reply, but when Mah Mee 
 was out of sight he got up and, shaking out his 
 pasoh, sauntered towards the village. 
 
 Myothit was not a pretty place : two rows of 
 low brown houses, shaded here and there by 
 clumps of giant bamboo, facing each other across 
 an uneven strip of naked brown road, which 
 shrank into a jungle track at either end of the 
 village. On the left ran the creek, almost at the 
 street-level now the tide was high ; the long prow 
 of a boat, riding light at its moorings, peeped 
 between the houses. In the rainy season Myothit 
 was under water for days together, and the people 
 went to see their neighbours in canoes. Behind 
 the village, waste land inclined gently up to the 
 kwins, so that the paddy was not flooded though 
 the street were waist deep in water. Much work 
 was going on in the village to-day. Men and 
 women sat about the roadway, with mallet and 
 block beating out bamboos to plait into matting- 
 for paddy bins. Sheets of new mat glared white 
 in the sun, and finished bins, like immense drums,
 
 24 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 stood about ready to be set on the stands among 
 the houses. 
 
 Pho Lone went down the street to Mah Hehn's. 
 As he came near he heard the loose clatter of the 
 loom and knew where to look for Mah Pan. Her 
 father's was one of the largest houses in Myothit, 
 but was built on the same plan as all the rest, 
 open in front, with two half storeys, the lower 
 before and the higher behind, with a short flight 
 of stairs to connect them. There was nobody on 
 the lower floor, but through the lattice-work 
 between it and the upper story Pho Lone saw 
 Mah Pan at the loom which stood on the ground 
 under her sleeping room. He went round and 
 squatted on the ground near ; somebody was 
 moving about in the room over Mah Pan's head 
 so he could not go under the house close beside 
 her ; it is not good to have anybody's feet over 
 your head, particularly a woman's ; and as Moung 
 Byoo was out on the kwins, the person within 
 could only be Mah Helm. Apart from this, it 
 was well, in the interests of propriety, that Mah 
 Hehn should be within hearing, for no well con- 
 ducted young woman would allow a man to sit 
 near her were nobody else by. 
 
 Mah Pan paused in her work to turn and smile 
 to Pho Lone and then bent over the frame again. 
 Mah Hehn was very proud of her daughter's 
 weaving. Old Mah Too's was the only work in 
 the village which could ever have been compared
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 25 
 
 to it, and now Mah Too's hands were shaky, her 
 weaving was not what it used to be. When Mah 
 Pan finished a tamein or pasoh the gossips would 
 come and sit round, drawing the cloth through 
 their fingers and admiring its even texture. 
 Mothers told their daughters to learn to weave 
 like Mah Pan, and fathers and husbands and 
 brothers told their women folk to roll cheroots like 
 Mah Pan's ; and by consequence the girls did riot 
 love her very much. It is not altogether well to 
 have the cleverest fingers besides the fairest skin 
 in the village. Pho Lone was quite content to sit 
 in the shade of the bamboos, smoking, and feasting 
 his eyes upon her, as she leaned against the bar- 
 seat and passed the shuttle, singing softly to 
 herself. But presently she stopped and turned 
 to him. 
 
 " I think they will begin threshing to-day," he 
 said, feeling obliged to say something. 
 
 " Does the elder brother think so ? " asked Mah 
 Pan. 
 
 Pho Lone understood by this rather formal 
 mode of address that she meant to keep him at 
 his distance, just as if he had come at young- 
 man's time. The smash, smash of mallets all along 
 the street seemed to beat all ideas out of his 
 head. He wanted to know what she meant to do 
 about going to Bassein, but did not wish her to 
 think he had come merely to ask. He picked up 
 a stick and pushed it slowly down a rat-hole, then
 
 26 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 drew it out, scratched his neck with it, threw it 
 aside, clasped his arms about his knees, and 
 blinked at her wistfully. 
 
 " The elder sister does not work in the fields 
 this morning," he said at last. 
 
 Mah Pan's head was beating a little to-day, so 
 she stayed at home. 
 
 Pho Lone said he was sorry to hear that ; and 
 having said so, relapsed into silence, wishing she 
 would begin weaving again. While she remained 
 leaning against the loom-seat looking at him he 
 felt he must talk ; but he could not do all the 
 talking himself, and she seemed to have less to 
 say than he had. From sheer embarrassment 
 he plunged into the question he had come to 
 ask. 
 
 " Will the elder sister go in Ko Moung Galay's 
 boat?" 
 
 Mah Pan thought not ; she had made up her 
 mind not to go to Bassein at all this season. 
 
 Pho Lone's patience gave way at this. " I 
 shall be off ! " he said, and lurching on his feet, 
 walked away, He went slowly, half hoping she 
 would call him back ; but before he got round 
 to the front of the house the clack of the loom 
 began, and with it Mah Pan's song. Hearing 
 that, he quickened his steps, and passing between 
 the opposite houses went straight out to the 
 threshing-floor. 
 
 Mah Mee saw him coming', and waited. 
 
 O 7
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 27 
 
 " Is she kind to-day ? " she asked roguishly, as 
 he came up. 
 
 " She is not," replied Pho Lone, who was in no 
 mood to be teased. He would have passed on, 
 but Mah Mee, telling him to stay and tell her all 
 about it, sat down on the bund. 
 
 Her tone was kind, so Pho Lone stopped, and 
 sat near her. 
 
 " She is very proud," said Mah Mee soothingly. 
 Though she did laugh at Pho Lone a great deal, 
 she really liked him, and she saw he had been 
 vexed. 
 
 " She is much too proud," he agreed warmly ; 
 and went on, raising his voice as he thought of 
 his wrongs : " She is very proud, and also very 
 changeable ; she has a new mind each day." 
 
 " She plays at changing her mind," said Mah 
 Mee. 
 
 She spoke so kindly that Pho Lone opened his 
 heart, and told her how Mah Pan altered her 
 plans so often that he did not know what to do. 
 
 It was consoling to learn that Mah Mee had 
 heard nothing of Mah Pan's wish to go in Ko 
 Moung Galay's boat, and still more satisfactory 
 to be assured that there would be no room for 
 her if she did wish to go, But when Mah Mee, 
 having set his mind at rest on this point, pro- 
 ceeded to rate him for believing everything he 
 was told, Pho Lone could only chew a straw and 
 look unhappy.
 
 28 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 "She is sweet to Moung Maw," he said dis- 
 mally. 
 
 "Moung Maw is wiser than you," retorted 
 Mah Mee. " Yesterday we sat together, Mah 
 Pan and I. Moung Maw came. 'Go away,' 
 says Mah Pan, and Moung Maw went. ' Come 
 back,' says Mah Pan ; but Moung Maw looks 
 over his shoulder and laughs. Next time Mah 
 Pan will not say ' Go away ' to him." 
 
 "I think Moung Maw has worked magic," said 
 Pho Lone, looking round to see nobody was near 
 enough to overhear. 
 
 Mah Mee did not know whether he had worked 
 magic or not ; if he had, he would not have told. 
 She did know, however, that he had given Mah 
 Pan a silver ring a beautiful ring worth quite 
 four rupees. 
 
 " I gave her a string of beads for the neck," 
 said Pho Lone, sadly remembering that he never 
 saw those beads on her neck, while she always 
 wore that ring. " The price was two and a half 
 rupees." 
 
 " She loves beautiful ornaments," remarked 
 Mah Mee. 
 
 " I expect she does not like what I give her," 
 sighed Pho Lone. " I also gave her a pink silk 
 kerchief which she never wears." 
 
 " I expect she thinks you are a loo mike," re- 
 torted his companion, sharply. " You have no 
 spirit : you behave like a little puppy, which
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 29 
 
 rolls on its back to a big dog. Who will love a 
 young man like that ? " 
 
 Pho Lone was too much depressed to answer ; 
 he let Mah Mee get up and go away without say- 
 ing a word, and presently went to work by him- 
 self, unloading the paddy which they had 
 brought in an hour ago. He did not feel inclined 
 to join the people who were shouting uproari- 
 ously over the first threshing, though he often 
 stopped to look on and wish he were as light- 
 hearted as his neighbours. 
 
 In virtue of his position as head-man of the 
 village, Ko Moung Galay had his stack threshed 
 first ; consequently he looked on and directed 
 matters while his daughter took her share of the 
 work with the rest. It was very hot, but 
 nobody minded that ; the young men and women 
 ran to and fro carrying great bundles of paddy 
 to the floor, round which ranks of buffaloes, eight 
 abreast, plodded heavily, up to their dewlaps in 
 rustling ears. There is always great fun over 
 the first threshing. Mah Gway, trying to throw 
 a sheaf, fell into the deep loose bed, and was 
 buried by her neighbours before she could 
 scramble out with her hair down and full of 
 straws. Little Poh Chin, dancing wildly round 
 the floor, got in the way, and Moung Yeik, crying 
 "Here is fine paddy !" tossed him into the litter, 
 where he lay kicking till the buffaloes came 
 round, and he had to struggle out as fast as he
 
 30 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 could. Tha Tway and the other small boys were 
 enjoying themselves hugely. They rode the 
 buffaloes, and bullied them as monkeys might 
 elephants. If a beast dared lower his head to 
 sniff the grain through his basket muzzle, little 
 naked heels drummed on his ribs, the stick 
 rained blows on his shoulders, and he was scolded 
 till his great flat horns lay back to his withers 
 again. The people bustled backwards and for- 
 wards between stack and floor like ants, till the 
 cattle pushed a wave of paddy before them, and 
 Ko Moung Galay cried, " There is enough ! " 
 Then everybody went and sat in the shade to 
 recover breath and coil up hair, leaving two or 
 three old women to hobble round the floor with 
 forked sticks, pushing the paddy within tread. 
 
 Round and round toiled the buffaloes, switch- 
 ing their tails, and blowing through their 
 muzzles, while the straw whispered against their 
 legs, and the yoke-ropes creaked on the centre 
 post. Having ceased work, nobody was anxious 
 to begin again ; so when the first puffs of the 
 evening breeze stirred the hot air, the mass on 
 the threshing floor was trodden to litter, and you 
 heard the loose grain crunch beneath the buffa- 
 loes' hoofs. 
 
 The women went home to prepare evening 
 rice, and the buffaloes were loosed and unmuzzled 
 that the boys might take them to wallow in the 
 creek before being picketed for the night. Then
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 31 
 
 the men girt up their pasohs again to clear away 
 the chaff, and sweep up the paddy which lay a 
 finger's depth upon the floor. There was a large 
 heap when it was collected, and Moung Maw 
 remarked to Pho Lone, who had come now to do 
 his share, that they should begin winnowing to- 
 morrow. 
 
 "If Ko Moung Galay wishes it," said Pho 
 Lone. 
 
 "If he wishes, of course," assented Moung 
 Maw. " Come to my house to play to-night," 
 he continued. " Shway Toon and other fellows 
 will come." 
 
 " I go to Mah Hehn's," replied Pho Lone. He 
 had had no thought of going to see Mah Pan 
 again that day, but now he resolved to in sheer 
 defiance. 
 
 " Come afterwards, then." 
 
 From the way Moung Maw spoke one would 
 have thought that Mah Pan was no more to him 
 than any other girl in the village. Pho Lone was 
 very jealous of him, and the thought that Moung 
 Maw was not jealous of himself made him angry ; 
 but he was afraid to quarrel, for the carpenter, 
 besides being masterful, was bigger and stronger 
 than he was. He mumbled that he would come 
 and play later, and turned homeward feeling very 
 bitter against Moung Maw. Certainly he must 
 have procured a good love-charm to be so sure of 
 Mah Pan's favour. He was pitted with small
 
 32 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 pox and had been known to get drunk ; that was 
 not the sort of man to attract a pretty girl or 
 make a good husband. Plainly he must have 
 worked magic. Well, if one suitor could do that 
 another might, and while the Wise Man still lived 
 near Ngatheing, half a day's paddle down the 
 creek, there was no need to be anxious. 
 
 Myothit looked very peaceful now after the 
 busy day. The street was littered with shreds 
 of bamboo, telling of the work laid aside ; thin 
 trails of smoke curled up from before every 
 house, and every pot was on the fire. The women 
 moved about getting dinner ready, while the men 
 squatted in groups smoking and talking. Passing 
 Mah Hehn's, Pho Lone glanced in. Mah Pan was 
 not to be seen, but her mother was there and called 
 to him to hasten, for Mah Tsay was waiting. 
 
 Mah Tsay, Pho Lone's mother, had had an 
 accident twenty years ago, when he was a baby, 
 and her back was crooked. In consequence, she 
 could not do much of the house- work ; she could 
 sweep the floor and sew, but could not clean rice 
 in the mortar nor lift the pot on to the fire. 
 When Moung Let and Pho Lone were absent the 
 neighbours took care of her, but this evening 
 nobody had thought of helping because both were 
 at the threshing close by. She was sitting on 
 the verandah, a wide shelf waist-high above the 
 street, and began to scold as soon as Pho Lone 
 came within hearing.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 33 
 
 " Lazy one ! " she cried. " The sky is shutting, 
 and there is neither fire burning nor rice in the 
 pot. You stay gossiping and forget your old 
 mother." 
 
 " No," said Pho Lone very gently, " I thought 
 my father had returned." 
 
 " My man forgets me too," whimpered Mali 
 Tsay ; " he is not come. Now hasten, lazy fellow ! 
 I am hungry." 
 
 Pho Lone set to work to cut up sticks and 
 build the fire on the ground a few paces from the 
 corner of the verandah where his mother sat. It 
 is not good to cook quite near the house because 
 the smell of fish and vegetables cooking is un- 
 wholesome. One must cook on the verandah in 
 the rains, but then the fire-place, a shallow box 
 of earth, is put where the wind can blow the 
 smoke clear of the house. 
 
 "It is a very good harvest," he remarked, 
 setting up the three stones for the pot. " Now 
 all is brought in you can see how large our 
 stack is." 
 
 But Mah Tsay did not care to hear about the 
 harvest this evening ; she only asked, as she 
 often did when cross, why she had no daughter 
 but only a lazy son. Pho Lone took no notice, 
 but fanned the fire till the flames licked all round 
 the pot. 
 
 "There, good mother," he said cheerfully, "soon 
 you shall eat." 
 
 c
 
 34 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 "The neighbours are eating," grumbled Mah 
 Tsay. " Only I, the broken woman, am hungry." 
 
 It was dark now. All along the street the 
 firelight dancing on the smoke showed men sitting 
 at rice. The village was very quiet ; the lapping 
 of wavelets on the mud slopes mingled sleepily 
 with the slow murmur of voices. Now a crooning 
 song rose to hush the wail of a child, or a dog- 
 whined for the remains of the rice to be thrown 
 to him. Mah Tsay sat grumbling to herself till 
 Moung Let appeared, when she roused herself to 
 scold him. The rice was ready at last and father 
 and son hastened to eat, for Mah Tsay was re- 
 peating every minute that she was sick by reason 
 of her empty belly. 
 
 Leaving his father to smoke on the verandah 
 Pho Lone lighted the lamp, a shred of wick in a 
 saucer of treacly oil, and went to change his dress ; 
 for he could not pay his visit in a faded old cotton 
 pasoh and nothing else. The upper floor was 
 partitioned by rough mat walls into two rooms, 
 one of which Pho Lone had to himself. It was 
 dark even at mid-day, for the one small window 
 on the floor level looked into a leafy clump of 
 bamboo ; but that did not matter because he could 
 find everything with his eyes shut. There was 
 not much to find certainly. The furniture con- 
 sisted of a small teak box without a lock, the lid 
 of a biscuit tin which served as a mirror, and a 
 low board bedstead with mat, blanket and wooden
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 35 
 
 pillow, under a tent of thin cotton mosquito net 
 which hung by knotted scraps of coir from the 
 rafters. The head of the bedstead prevented the 
 door opening properly, but Pho Lone never thought 
 of moving it. How could he change its position 
 without disrespect to his parents who slept in the 
 adjoining room ? A dutiful son must lie with his 
 feet turned away from his father and mother, and 
 Pho Lone's bed was placed so that his head was 
 nearest them when they slept. 
 
 Pho Lone spent some time in his room this 
 evening, and the biscuit-box lid was in much 
 request. When he came down his mother had 
 eaten her rice and sat smoking in the dark, with 
 her bent back against the wall, and her arms 
 hanging over her knees. As he stepped carefully 
 down the rough stairs holding the light before 
 him, Mah Tsay took the big green cheroot from 
 her mouth and looked him over with admiring 
 eyes. 
 
 " I go to see Mah Pan," he said ; and setting 
 the smoky light on the stairs he drew himself up 
 to show off his clothes. 
 
 " She is a lucky young woman," said Mah Tsay, 
 whose ill- temper had yielded to dinner. " She is 
 lucky that my handsome son should go to see 
 her." 
 
 Pho Lone did look smart. He wore a rustling 
 silk pasoh of red and yellow tartan, which reached 
 his ankles, and a snowy linen jacket fitting very
 
 36 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 close, with tight sleeves made long to wrinkle 
 from wrist to elbow. His hair was neatly coiled 
 on top of his head, and a yellow silk kerchief was 
 loosely twisted about it with two corners sticking 
 up. As he stood for his mother to admire him, 
 he threw the long loose fold of his pasoh over his 
 left shoulder, making the bunch of keys tied to it 
 jingle again. Every self-respecting man carries 
 keys thus when he wears his best clothes. People 
 look after him and say, " What quantities of 
 valuable property that young fellow must have 
 locked up in his boxes at home ! " 
 
 Now if Pho Lone had been wise he would have 
 asked Shway Toon or somebody else to come with 
 him to Mah Hehn's. It is the custom, to take a 
 friend with you when paying a visit of this kind ; 
 not so much for propriety's sake, as the young 
 lady's mother is sure to be at home though out of 
 sight, but because the presence of another man 
 makes it appear as if you had just dropped in 
 casually. The friend always sits outside the 
 house with his back turned, so he is not the least 
 in the way ; and as Shway Toon was a most 
 obliging fellow, and, moreover, had sometimes got 
 Pho Lone to accompany him where he went to 
 see Mah Mee of an evening, there was really no 
 excuse for Pho Lone's going by himself. Surely 
 it is better to be chaffed a little by your friend 
 than to give the girl you love reason to think 
 lightly of you ?
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 37 
 
 Moung Byoo's house was a much finer one than 
 Moung Let's ; it was larger and better built : the 
 partition which hid the sleeping rooms on the 
 upper floor stood back from the edge, leaving a 
 wide space on which you could sit and look down 
 on the lower floor out of sight of people passing 
 along the street, unless they came close up to 
 look in. As Pho Lone stepped on to the verandah 
 he saw by the light behind the partition that Mah 
 Hehn was at home, and the murmur of voices told 
 him that Mah Pan and her younger sister Mah 
 Noo were sitting on the upper floor just outside 
 their mother's room. 
 
 " Come in," said Mah Pan in a tone of pleased 
 surprise when he asked leave to enter ; and Pho 
 Lone crossed the bare floor and waited while 
 Mah Noo got up and vanished into the room 
 behind. 
 
 " I will light the lamp," said Mah Pan, rising. 
 Pho Lone would have been quite satisfied to sit in 
 the dark ; but she had more respect for social 
 usage, and in a few minutes an old lamp with a 
 rusty reflector and cracked chimney was hanging 
 on the wall. If she had not been so surprised at 
 his visit, Pho Lone would have thought she 
 expected him ; for mats were spread, trays of 
 cheroots and betel-nut stood at hand, while Mah 
 Pan wore her best tamein and neckkerchief, and 
 had fresh flowers in her hair. 
 
 " It is a very good harvest," he said, squatting
 
 38 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 as near her as politeness permits about an arm's 
 length " quite the best for several years." 
 
 " My father tells me so," replied Mah Pan very 
 graciously. " The men who passed down the 
 river from Ladaw village this morning said the 
 people there had also a fine harvest, but there was 
 trouble owing to cattle-disease." 
 
 " Yes, we heard that they had lost very many 
 buffaloes in the rainy season." 
 
 There was a long pause after this. It is all 
 very well to begin a conversation thus, but a man 
 can't talk to a girl for a whole evening about the 
 crops and foot-and-mouth disease : at the same 
 time when she has snubbed you wantonly a few 
 hours before it is rather difficult to get any further 
 than neighbour-talk. Pho Lone was not clever 
 enough to lead the conversation as he wished, 
 and the two might have sat in silence till it was 
 time for him to leave if Mah Pan had not begun 
 to speak of the pretty things she meant to make 
 her father buy for her when they went to Bassein 
 a month or six weeks later. She let it be under- 
 stood that, whatever she might have said before, 
 she really intended to go, and thus the ice was 
 broken. From the jewellery Moung Byoo was to 
 buy, to the attractions of Mah Pan who was to 
 wear it, was a very short step. Pho Lone found 
 it so at all events, and the two got on so pleasantly 
 that if their lowered voices had prompted Mah 
 Hehn to peep through a crack in the partition
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 09 
 
 she would have seen that the young man had 
 moved a grood deal nearer her daughter. 
 
 o o 
 
 Which of the two was to blame for the act 
 which so suddenly ended the visit nobody can tell. 
 Pho Lone told his mother he thought Mah Pan 
 would not have minded after what had passed 
 between them ; and Mah Pan assured her mother 
 that she had neither said nor done anything 
 which could explain Pho Lone's insulting conduct. 
 Both gave the same account of the matter : 
 briefly, Mah Pan was reaching for another cheroot 
 from the tray which lay between them, and Pho 
 Lone took hold of her hand ; not only held it, but 
 pressed it in both his own. If he had touched 
 her by accident, she said even if he did so very 
 carelessly, she would have forgiven him. But 
 when he took her hand like that, of set purpose, 
 she could think of only one way to treat him : 
 she drew herself into the furthest corner and 
 bade him leave the house at once.
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 PHO LONE, ordered out of the house, stood on 
 the road pleading in a cautious whisper for 
 forgiveness, while Mah Pan let down the great 
 framed mats to convince him that apologies were 
 useless. He felt forlorn indeed when the last 
 fell squeaking on its cane hinges, and he could 
 no longer see into the house. Light streaming 
 across the road, and eager voices from a house 
 a little way down the street, reminded him sud- 
 denly of Moung Maw's invitation, but he had 
 less wish than ever now to join the party. His 
 one thought was to get home unseen as quickly 
 as he could, that he might think how to repair 
 his blunder. The affair was not likely to end 
 with the loss of Mah Pan's favour : to-morrow, 
 without doubt, Moung Byoo would come and tell 
 him that he must not visit his daughter any 
 more ; that was the least he could expect. And 
 if Moung Byoo were very angry he would make 
 formal complaint to Ko Moung Galay, who would 
 certainly inflict a fine ; for the headman was 
 strict, and put down doings he considered dis-
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 41 
 
 creditable to the village with a firm hand. 
 Worst of all was the gossip which would make 
 him a byword among the neighbours, for of 
 course every one would hear how he had insulted 
 Mah Pan while visiting her at young man's time. 
 He knew he had been very foolish, but as he 
 hurried home on the dark side of the road, so 
 that he need not pass Moung Maw's house, he 
 somewhow felt that he was not altogether to 
 blame. 
 
 Their own house, like nearly all the rest, was 
 shut, but the lamp shone through the loosely- 
 made mats, and he crept in to find his mother 
 still sitting against the wall where he had left 
 her. 
 
 " Well, then, my son ? " she began pleasantly, 
 " was she sweet to-night ? " 
 
 Pho Lone swallowed something in his throat, 
 -and dropping on his heels at her side, told her all 
 about it. Any other young man who lived with 
 his mother would have done the same in his 
 place. Of whom should you ask advice, if not 
 your mother ? 
 
 Mah Tsay said she quite understood how it 
 had happened, and abused Mah Pan for a bold- 
 faced coquette. She tried to comfort her son by 
 recalling similar cases which had occurred within 
 her experience. There was Moung Tha Nyo's 
 for instance : sitting by Mah Way one evening 
 at a poay in the street, he playfully caught her
 
 42 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 by the wrist, and being summoned before the 
 Myooke at Ladaw, he had to pay twenty-five 
 rupees. 
 
 " I think Moung Byoo would not take me to 
 court," said Pho Lone, not much comforted by 
 the story. 
 
 " He would not," assented his mother, " unless 
 Mah Hehn makes him." 
 
 Pho Lone sighed that he did not know what 
 to do ; and his mother, admitting that she did 
 not either, reminded him that the fault had been 
 committed, and there was no use moaning over it. 
 Whatever was going to happen would happen, 
 and that was all that could be said. She was 
 tired, and it was quite time to go and sleep. 
 Pho Lone snuffed out the lamp with a bit of 
 stick, and went up to his room. The shame that 
 would be his troubled him more than the breach 
 with Mah Pan, and naturally enough. It would 
 be foolish indeed to make oneself miserable about 
 a girl when one had the rupees to buy a love 
 potion. Before he went to sleep he had resolved 
 to go the next day to Ngatheing village, and 
 consult the famous wizard, Oo Boo Nah. 
 
 If Pho Lone could have heard what passed 
 between Mah Pan and her mother after he had 
 gone, he would have been relieved. Mah Hehn 
 was a shrewd woman, and told her daughter that 
 as she had not screamed at the moment it would 
 not be wise to scream now. In other words, they
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 43 
 
 had better hush up the affair. Pho Lone was not 
 likely to tell any one but his parents how grossly 
 he had insulted her. He had lost his head, and 
 behaved very badly indeed ; but as he had asked 
 forgiveness, she thought Mah Pan had best over- 
 look the affront, and, while remaining friends 
 with him, make him keep his distance for the 
 future. 
 
 " Every girl in Myothit is jealous of you," she 
 concluded, " and you may be sure they would not 
 put all the blame on Moung Pho Lone." 
 
 Mah Pan saw the wisdom of this counsel, and 
 agreed to follow it ; not altogether blind to the 
 fact that the secret would give her a certain 
 advantage over the young man. 
 
 Pho Lone was awakened before daybreak by 
 the sweet lingering note of a gong which rang 
 out mournfully at intervals and nearer at each 
 stroke. It was Go Yan on his way to the 
 pagoda ; he had no idea of disturbing his neigh- 
 bours, but the good spirits of the air may over- 
 look a meritorious action performed in dim moon- 
 light, so upon that account it is well to beat a 
 gong. Oo Yan's house was at one end of the 
 village, and the pagoda stood on the margin of 
 the jungle at the other, so all but the heaviest 
 sleepers knew what he did, whether the nats 
 remarked it or not. " Tang ! " The echoes of 
 the kyee-zee quivered along the street, and the 
 pariahs howled acknowledgement. Pho Lone got
 
 44 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 up, went downstairs, and pushed his way out 
 upon the verandah, just as the old man came by. 
 On his shoulder Oo Yan balanced a bamboo, from 
 whose fore-end hung the little brass gong, like a 
 halbert head, still spinning and humming from 
 the last stroke ; from the other end hung a 
 lacquer tray with plantains and rice for offerings. 
 Oo Yan's gait was that of one who carries a 
 burden and sees the end of a long journey. 
 
 " Cold," said Pho Lone. 
 
 "Cold," agreed the old man poising his mallet 
 for another blow ; but he pressed on towards the 
 pagoda looming ghostly in the sinking moon 
 without pausing or turning his head. His face 
 was very grave ; probably he was reckoning up 
 the amount of Merit he had still to acquire to set 
 off against the sins of his seventy years. The 
 hpoongyee was wont to speak with special 
 emphasis of the state of his kyoung when Oo 
 Yan was among his visitors ; bat Oo Yan suffered 
 from deafness at times : his wife Mah Khin took 
 care of his money. He disappeared in the white 
 mist and Pho Lone drew his blanket about him 
 and yawned. He meant to take Shway Toon's 
 light canoe and start early for Ngatheing, because 
 when one goes to consult a sayah it is wise to do 
 it secretly ; otherwise somebody may employ 
 greater magic to defeat your ends. When the 
 harvest work is going on everybody must do his 
 share, and Pho Lone knew that if he were seen
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 45 
 
 paddling off he would be questioned. It was too 
 soon to go yet, however ; even had there been 
 light in the sky, the tide was still running up and 
 would do so for some time. So he went back to 
 his mat resolved to stay awake until dawn came 
 and the tide turned. 
 
 When he woke again the sun was high, the 
 mist had cleared away, and the people were 
 gathered at Moung Byoo's house eating the 
 morning rice. Pho Lone started when he saw the 
 crowd there, for he did not at once remember that 
 Moung Byoo's paddy was to be threshed to-day, 
 and that Moung Byoo would of course invite the 
 neighbours who helped in the work to breakfast. 
 There was no chance now of slipping away quietly, 
 and the journey to Ngatheing must be put off. 
 It was very unfortunate, because the house-rice, 
 as it happened, was nearly finished and he must 
 spend the evening cleaning a fresh supply ; that 
 meant getting up late next morning, for two long 
 hours of work at the paddy mortar makes the legs 
 stiff and the whole body so tired that early rising 
 is out of the question. 
 
 He could not muster up courage to go to Moung 
 Byoo's, so boiled and ate his own rice at home, 
 uneasily eyeing the throng of neighbours whom 
 he felt sure must by now know what he had done 
 last night. Presently Shway Toon came saunter- 
 ing down the street to ask what he was doing. 
 Pho Lone explained that he had slept late and
 
 46 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 therefore did not go out to breakfast : had Shway 
 Toon been to Moung Byoo's ? Shway Toon had, 
 and had heard their host ask Moung Let where 
 his good son was. Pho Lone could hardly believe 
 his ears. Clearly Mah Pan had said nothing of 
 his rudeness, feeling no doubt that she had been 
 very much in fault. So relieved was he that for 
 the space of a breath he thought of asking his 
 friend to clean a little rice for him ; he refrained, 
 however ; Shway Toon would be sure to consent, 
 but equally sure to ask why he wanted it done. 
 
 It was their turn to work at the winnowing 
 stage to-day, and when they arrived they found 
 Moung Yeik and others waiting for them. Shway 
 Toon and Moung Yeik stood on the lower plat- 
 form, receiving the baskets of grain from the 
 heads of the women who brought it from the 
 threshing-floor, and swinging them up to Pho 
 Lone who squatted on the upper stage. All he 
 had to do was to pour the grain down and toss 
 the empty baskets after it. The day was a good 
 one for blowing paddy as there was a little wind ; 
 and soon a long grey cloud of dust was floating 
 far across the kwins, while the grain, freed from 
 straw and light rubbish, crept up the stage posts 
 in a golden heap. From his high place Pho Lone 
 could see everything that was going on. He saw 
 Moung Maw squatting idly near the old floor 
 where Mah Pan was working, and presently he 
 saw that she left off carrying paddy and sat with
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 47 
 
 him. He watched them enviously ; they seemed 
 quite taken up with each other, never speaking 
 to the people who passed and re-passed close by. 
 He felt sure Mah Pan was telling Moung Maw of 
 the insult offered her last night, and the thought 
 made his knees shake, for the carpenter's temper 
 was hot when roused. His attention was so much 
 occupied that he did not look what he was doing 
 and threw the empty baskets down anyhow. At 
 last one fell on Mah Sein's head. 
 
 "He, you!" she cried, throwing it off, "take 
 care what you do." 
 
 Pho Lone said he was sorry, but his companions 
 laughed so much that Mah Sein got angry and 
 began to call him names. He did not mind being 
 told he was a fool and a stupid, nor did he answer 
 back when she called him a dog's son ; but when 
 she screamed again and again that he was a blind 
 leper he grew angry in his turn, and told Mah 
 Sein he should report this to Ko Moung Galay as 
 soon as the sun was overhead. 
 
 Mah Sein looked very much afraid when, the 
 people having ceased work for the mid-day rest, 
 the village elders sent to her to come before them. 
 She had been in trouble ere now for using bad 
 language, and it was disagreeable to be brought 
 before the elders with all the neighbours sitting 
 round ; for everybody came to look on. It was 
 quite a formal affair. Ko Moung Galay and three 
 other old men squatted in a row on the verandah
 
 48 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 of the headman's house and the people assembled 
 in a half-circle in the roadway, Mah Sein being in 
 the space between. When Ko Moung Galay 
 asked why she had used these shameful words to 
 a clean and healthy young man, she made excuses, 
 saying that Pho Lone threw the basket upon her 
 purposely. No, she had no quarrel with him. 
 She was much hurt : the skin on her shoulder 
 was cut as all might see. Mah Tsay, from the 
 crowd, said it was a very little cut for there was 
 no blood. Mah Tsay had been abused by Mah 
 Sein a short time ago, and besides she did not like 
 her son to be called a leper. Pho Lone denied 
 having thrown the basket at Mah Sein ; it was 
 quite an accident ; he said he was sorry when she 
 complained. Shway Toon and Moung Yeik, from 
 the crowd, confirmed : Mah Sein had a bad tongue 
 and deserved punishment. Mah Sein, kneeling 
 in supplication, would not offend again : she was 
 angry, being hurt. Moung Pho Lone was not 
 blind, nor was he a leper, his fine skin showed not 
 one white spot as large as a grain of sand. She 
 was a poor woman. 
 
 Elder Oo Yan, having expectorated betel juice, 
 wiped his mouth with the back of his hand and 
 delivered his judgment. It was very bad ; words 
 of abuse were forbidden by the law ; he thought 
 Mah Sein should pay ten baskets of paddy to 
 Pho Lone. Elder Oo Shway, having emptied his 
 mouth, concurred. Elder Oo Ket Kay thought
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 49 
 
 Mah Sein had had provocation. Mercy was 
 enjoined by the law, and he was of opinion that 
 admonition would meet the case. The neighbours 
 did not approve of this ; they reminded each other, 
 and Oo Ket Kay, that he was Mah Sein's husband's 
 partner ; but Oo Ket Kay chewed his betel nut, 
 seeming not to hear. Ko Moung Galay, as head 
 man, gave judgment last ; he said he would not 
 allow unlawful words of abuse in his village ; 
 Mah Sein was a scold ; she had been cautioned 
 before, and must pay ten baskets of paddy to 
 Pho Lone. 
 
 Everybody but Moung Hlaing and Oo Ket Kay 
 thought it was very good, and said so. Moung 
 Hlaing was Mah Sein's husband, and as the loss 
 fell upon his partner and himself he could not be 
 expected to approve. The court, foreseeing dis- 
 cussion, had adjourned after giving its decision, 
 and the members were already on their way home 
 for the midday nap, so Moung Hlaing appealed to 
 Pho Lone. Pho Lone, now very sorry for the 
 shame he had brought upon Mah Sein, did not 
 want his friend's paddy ; but he must tell his wife 
 not to call a fellow bad names in future. Moung 
 Hlaing considered this arrangement very good ; it 
 should be as Pho Lone said, and if ever he or his 
 father or mother wanted the work of his, Moung 
 Hlaing's, hands they need only ask for it. Pho 
 Lone saw his chance and took it. He might then, 
 he said, mention that his mother was even now
 
 50 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 out of house-rice and required one basket cleaned 
 that night. Moung Hlaing repeated that the 
 work of his hands was his friend's. 
 
 So Pho Lone slept early after all. Moung 
 Hlaing slept early too, for that matter ; the dull 
 thumping under his house, where Mah Sein toiled 
 at the paddy mortar till long after all the world 
 was quiet, did not keep him awake. 
 
 The mist was slowly peeling from the creek 
 next morning when Pho Lone pushed off and 
 drove the canoe out into mid-stream to get the 
 full strength of the ebb. The boat was a very 
 light one ; and as he sat, with one leg doubled 
 under on the flat stern-piece, his weight threw 
 half its length out of the water, so that the pointed 
 prow was nearly at the level of his head. Shway 
 Toon and Moung Maw had taken great pains over 
 that canoe : it took them half a month in the 
 first place to select the tree in the jungle opposite 
 the village (certainly it sometimes happened on a 
 hot day that they fell asleep in the shade of a 
 tree they were considering) ; and they spent the 
 whole of one rainy season making it when the log 
 had dried. The marks of tools and fire still scored 
 the inside, but the outside had been smoothed and 
 polished with oil till the canoe slipped through 
 the water like a racing boat. Pho Lone paddled 
 hard until he was round the bend and out of sight 
 of Myothit ; then, safe from the curiosity of chance 
 early risers, he stretched out his legs and worked
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 51 
 
 more easily. The last wisp of fog was floating 
 away, and the oily water, a narrowing streak 
 which seemed to end in jungle, glinted in the sun. 
 There was little of life between the dense walls of 
 forest : a kingfisher flashed, purple and red, along 
 the margin and vanished into a hanging bush 
 to watch for prey ; a slow flight of paddy birds 
 rose and flapped with trailing legs across to a 
 fresh bared patch of mud, and the doves hidden 
 in the trees cooed sleepily. By-and-by Pho Lone 
 laid down the paddle and opened the leaf of cold 
 rice he had brought. He ate that and, after 
 scooping up a few mouthfuls of water, set to paddle 
 again, singing, for the winding creek was lonely 
 and, now the sun was high, very quiet. Reach 
 after reach was deserted, for at harvest time few 
 people leave their villages even for a day. It was 
 quite an event when he came upon a boat piled 
 high with red earthenware chatties moored to the 
 bank in waiting for next tide ; he stopped paddling 
 and drifted by to exchange greeting with the 
 strangers. 
 
 " Ho, neighbours ! Where are you going ? " 
 
 " Ladaw village and beyond. You ? " 
 
 "Ngatheing village." 
 
 The chatty pedlars lay down to sleep again and 
 Pho Lone went on, with only the plunge of his 
 paddle and the tinkling ripple before the belly of 
 the canoe to break the stillness. 
 
 At length the forest drew back from the brink,
 
 52 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 wavered for a bowshot, and then swept inland, 
 leaving naked mud slopes with overhanging rags 
 of turf. Pho Lone steered in to look for a landing 
 place ; he could see Ngatheing ahead now, but he 
 did not wish to go to the village itself as Oo Boo 
 Nah's house stood alone a little way on this side. 
 Sayahs never dwell among ordinary folk. Charms 
 and spells cannot be wrought with any success 
 except in strict privacy. Moreover the nature of 
 the business brings all kinds of nats and sohns 
 about, especially at night ; and it would not be 
 agreeable to have living in the village a person on 
 intimate terms with spirits bad as well as good. 
 For all reasons it is best that sayahs should live 
 apart. 
 
 Paddling along under the bank, Pho Lone came 
 upon a log half buried in the mud, and turning her 
 prow inwards, drove the canoe high up beside it. 
 A wide rolling plain of grass dotted with bushes 
 faced him when he had scaled the bank. Not even 
 a buffalo was to be seen ; a lonely plover in charge 
 of the landscape piped mournfully overhead, as if 
 asking what he wanted there, for a belt of jungle 
 hid the village and there was not a house in sight. 
 Squatting, and looking round under his hand, Pho 
 Lone saw the grove of bamboos and jack-trees 
 which hid the wizard's dwelling, and going in that 
 direction soon came upon a thin thread of a path 
 winding through the herbage. Following this he 
 came to the grove into which it ran. Here the
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 53 
 
 way was closed by a bar ; a child might push it 
 aside, but he were a bold man who visited a wizard 
 unannounced. The track wound so that the house 
 was hidden, but the creaking of boards told that 
 Oo Boo Nah was at home ; so Pho Lone sat down, 
 and, making sure his rupees were safe, screwed up 
 his courage to call out : 
 
 " Ho, Great Wizard ! " 
 
 " Who speaks ? " asked a hollow voice. 
 
 Pho Lone gave his name, his father's, and their 
 village, and asked if he had leave to enter. 
 
 A clever sayah has generally so much business 
 that he has to keep visitors waiting. Oo Boo Nah, 
 as everybody knows, has a very large practice ; so 
 Pho Lone was agreeably surprised when, after a 
 short pause, the Wise Man replied that he might 
 come. Stepping carefully over the bar he crept 
 in an attitude of respect up to the verandah. But 
 for the smell, which reminded Pho Lone of the 
 burying-ground between the villages, where the 
 dogs fought after a funeral, Oo Boo Nah's was like 
 any other small jungle house : low pitched roof, 
 thatched with dhunny leaves, and mat walls. The 
 sayah was a little old man with thin grey hair and 
 weak eyes ; he wore only a pasoh, and his shrivelled 
 arms, breast, and shoulders were covered with 
 curious tattooings and lumps hiding bits of metal 
 and bone which had been inscribed with charms 
 and pushed into slits made in the skin. He sat in 
 the shade on the low verandah, listening with the
 
 54 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 air of a doctor while Pho Lone, with palms pressed 
 together, crouched in the sun outside and explained 
 the object of his call. 
 
 Oo Boo Nah considered the case with great care. 
 He could not have been more exact in the infor- 
 mation he required if young men suffering from 
 love-sickness were the rarest and not almost the 
 commonest of his clients. Pho Lone was quite 
 ready with the answers to those questions he knew 
 would be put. Moment of birth ? About one 
 betel-chew after the third crowing of the cock on 
 the fourth night of the waning of the moon of 
 Tawthalin, in the year 1232 ; it was a Thursday. 
 Then could he tell about the time she was born ? 
 Of course Pho Lone was unable to speak with 
 precision as to the moment of Mah Pan's birth. 
 There is no knowing what mischief an evilly dis- 
 posed person might do if he knew exactly the 
 moment of another's birth. He said at once he 
 did not know ; she was born on a Wednesday, and 
 he believed on the 9th or loth of the waxing of 
 Tabodwai, year 1234. OoBoo Nah pursed up his 
 lips and referred to his calendar. It was the loth 
 day, he said ; the loth was Bhoodahoonay, Wed- 
 nesday ; he preferred exactness, but knew these 
 particulars were difficult to get, and would do his 
 best with the information supplied. He asked a 
 few more questions : when Pho Lone had gone to 
 the monastery as a little boy ; how long he re- 
 mained there ; the exact day and hour when his
 
 55 
 
 hair was cut off on taking the robe, and one or 
 two other things. Then he went into his house, 
 and letting down one of the mats so that he could 
 not be seen, began a sing-song chant while he 
 seemed to be pounding something in a joint of 
 bamboo. Pho Lone sat outside listening eagerly, 
 though he scarcely dared raise his eyes to look up 
 into the darkness of the little house ; the chant 
 and the smell and the loneliness frightened him. 
 The pounding noise stopped after a time, and the 
 sayah ceased his incantation to ask more questions. 
 He wanted to know how much land his visitor's 
 father farmed ; how much money he made last 
 season ; and how much he gave Pho Lone. It was 
 difficult to see what these things had to do with 
 the preparation of a love charm ; but of course 
 the wizard knew best. 
 
 " We sold our paddy last year for three hundred 
 and eighty rupees," replied Pho Lone. " My 
 father gave me eight rupees and a new silk pasoh 
 for a present, I having given much work in the 
 fields." 
 
 " Ah, eight rupees he gave you ? " said Oo Boo 
 Nah, looking round the mat. 
 
 " Eight rupees. But by ill fortune I have lost 
 money playing, and have but four and a half rupees 
 left. I beg leave to honour you with this very 
 insignificant sum." 
 
 Pho Lone crept nearer the verandah and counted 
 out his money, two whole rupees and a small heap
 
 36 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 of silver and coppers, while the sayah, without 
 even glancing at it, handed him a little packet 
 wrapped in green plantain leaves and tied with 
 bark string. Pho Lone received the packet and 
 held it respectfully with both hands above his 
 knees as he squatted to hear the wizard's whis- 
 pered advice. 
 
 " As much as your finger and thumb will hold 
 in the food she eats or in the water she drinks." He 
 dropped his voice still lower : " Keep near her by 
 day : think of her by night." 
 
 Pho Lone repeated the prescription twice, at the 
 sayah's order, that he might not forget it, and 
 still holding the packet carefully, asked if there 
 was leave to go. For answer the wizard looked 
 all round mysteriously, and beckoned him nearer 
 that he might whisper in his ear. Pho Lone felt 
 more than ever that the place was full of spirits, 
 and went away satisfied that he had got his 
 money's worth. 
 
 " Put a pinch into her water or her food, with- 
 out letting her or any one else see. Keep near 
 her by day and think of her at night." 
 
 Pho Lone repeated the wizard's instructions 
 over again and again as he paddled lazily homeward 
 on the flood. They were easy enough to carry 
 out, because the big water chatty in Moung Byoo's, 
 as in every house, stood in the corner of the 
 verandah where any one passing could reach it, 
 The only thing was, all the household drank from
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 57 
 
 that chatty. Suppose Mah Noo was influenced ; 
 or worse, Mah Hehn ? Pho Lone was so stag- 
 gered by this reflection that he stopped paddling. 
 Suddenly he bent forward, took a longer grasp, 
 and put his strength into the stroke as if to banish 
 thought by work. Had not Oo Boo Nah warned 
 him that the very best charm would fail if he had 
 not faith in it ?
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 IT was still early when Pho Lone got back to 
 Myothit. None of the people had come home 
 from the kwins, and the few who remained in 
 the village were busy ; so he was able to run the 
 canoe ashore near his father's house and land 
 without being seen. It was not a convenient 
 place to land, because the jungle was heavy 
 there, but he was anxious to get home unnoticed 
 for fear of being questioned ; and, further, Oo 
 Boo Nah had advised him to put the charm in a 
 place of safety as quickly as possible. A love 
 potion is not like doctor's medicine which may be 
 carried about everywhere without being any the 
 worse ; on the contrary, there are several ways 
 in which it may be utterly spoiled, and that too 
 without your being a bit the wiser. Thus, it is 
 always advisable to be very careful of it. If you 
 are not going to use the charm at once the best 
 plan is to place it on the top of the post where the 
 aing sohn dwells, that is, close under the rafters 
 in the comb of the roof: the guardian spirit of 
 the house will see that no harm comes to any-
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 59 
 
 thing given into his care. Of course it is under- 
 stood that you are on good terms with him ; nats 
 are easily ofiended, but so long as you treat them 
 with ordinary consideration their good offices 
 may be relied on in cases of this kind. Pho Lone 
 had no reason to suppose that their aing solin was 
 otherwise than well disposed towards himself; 
 but as he intended to seize the very first oppor- 
 tunity of bewitching the drinking water at 
 Moung Byoo's, he thought it was not worth while 
 taking the trouble to climb up the post, and 
 adopted another plan which has the approval of 
 all sayahs, and also has the merit of greater con- 
 venience. He ran up to his room and taking the 
 packet in both hands balanced it on the left hand 
 post at the head of his bed. Opinions differ as 
 to which is the better post of the two, and in 
 choosing the left Pho Lone followed Oo Boo 
 Nah's advice. The pillow is a safe resting-place if 
 you do not possess a bedstead ; the great point 
 being to treat the charm with respect. This is 
 the reason why you must not put it on the floor 
 nor at the bottom of your bed where it would be 
 close to your feet. 
 
 Pho Lone was very impatient to use the potion ; 
 but he could not do so yet, for as he came round the 
 house from the creekside he had seen Mah Hehn 
 sitting on her verandah talking with one of the 
 neighbours. Nobody must see him bewitch the 
 water, for if it should come to Mah Pan's ears, the
 
 60 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 charm would naturally fail of its object. When 
 he came in again after taking the canoe back to 
 its place among the other boats, he found his 
 mother had returned. 
 
 "You come home early, good son," she said, 
 laying aside the stout stick on which she leaned 
 when she walked. 
 
 " I come from Ngatheing village," said Pho 
 Lone. 
 
 May Tsay smiled, " A love potion ? " she 
 whispered. 
 
 " Do not speak of it, good mother. I fear that 
 my friends will guess the secret." 
 
 " We will say that you went to the sayah to 
 buy a new medicine for me," said May Tsay, as a 
 bright thought came to her ; " we will tell neigh- 
 bours who ask questions that you went for that 
 purpose." 
 
 Pho Lone thought that a very good idea. The 
 neighbours might certainly well believe he had 
 been to get medicine for his mother's back, as 
 poor Mah Tsay had spent more rupees than they 
 could afford on charms and spells to make it 
 straight again. Some of the wisest wizards and 
 doctors in the district had prescribed for her, but 
 all without success. 
 
 The shadows were long now, and as Pho Lone 
 was hungry after his long journey, he bestirred 
 himself to get the rice ready. His mother came 
 to squat in her usual place on the corner of the
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 61 
 
 verandah whence she could watch the cooking, 
 but he did not talk to her this evening ; his mind 
 was too full of the charm on the bed-post upstairs, 
 for each time he raised his eyes he saw the great 
 water chatty at Moung Byoo's and Mah Helm 
 and her visitor sitting close by. It seemed a long 
 while before the gossip got up and came down the 
 street and Mah Hehn went in. 
 
 " She goes to get rice to boil," thought Pho 
 Lone, hopefully, for Mah Hehn always did her 
 cooking on the other side of the house out of 
 sight of the corner where the chatty stood, and 
 once she settled down to work it would be easy 
 to stroll by and drop in a pinch of the charm 
 unseen. 
 
 He waited till the smoke rose and then, asking 
 his mother to come down and watch the pot, went 
 to his room. Between eagerness to use the 
 potion and curiosity to see what it was like, his 
 fingers trembled, and as he squatted, holding the 
 packet with one hand and pecking at the fasten- 
 ings with the other, he was near dropping it 
 several times. After unrolling many leaves he 
 reached the charm itself : half a dozen pinches of 
 pale brown powder. It occurred to Pho Lone as 
 he sat staring at it that the charm Shway Toon 
 procured to protect himself against death by dah- 
 wound was very much like this, and he was a 
 little disappointed. Even with Oo Boo Nah's 
 final instructions ringing in his ears he could not
 
 m WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 At once make up his mind to touch the powder ; 
 but at length he screwed up his courage to take 
 a 'big pinch, and, balancing the open packet again 
 on the bed-post, went down to the street. Many 
 of the neighbours had come in from threshing 
 and winnowing now, and were loitering about 
 waiting till dinner should be ready. Of course 
 when they saw Pho Lone they wanted to know 
 where he had been, for a man does not leave the 
 village for a whole day during harvest time with- 
 out good reason ; and equally of course when they 
 heard he had been to see Oo Boo Nah upon his 
 mother's account they closed round to ask about 
 the visit ; for everybody knows the great wizard, 
 .and little details concerning the private life of 
 famous men are so very interesting. Pho Lone 
 began to fear that Mah Hehn would have boiled 
 her rice before he escaped from his friends, they 
 had so many questions to ask ; and certainly 
 one might have chewed a betel nut before he got 
 away. 
 
 He strolled up the street, the precious powder 
 growing damp in his fingers, keeping careful look 
 out lest he should pass anything bad. What he 
 had particularly to fear was passing the lower 
 garments of a woman ; there is something about 
 a tamein or sandals when they are not in wear 
 that is fatal to the virtue of charms. Belonging 
 to a female they are debased, in a manner of 
 speaking ; and though you may carry a charm
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 63 
 
 through all the women in the village without its 
 taking hurt, if by accident or carelessness you 
 bring it near a tamein hanging to dry, or a pair of 
 woman's sandals which the owner has left outside 
 her house, its virtue fades at once. The odd thing- 
 is that neck-kerchiefs and jackets are quite harm- 
 less ; it would not hurt the best charm to be 
 wrapped up in either. Only the sayahs can 
 explain why this is. 
 
 It was rather a dangerous hour, because, as 
 usual, many people were bathing after the day's 
 work ; men and women bathe in the pasoh or 
 tamein they have worn all day, and replace it with 
 a dry one on the bank afterwards, so it was pure 
 luck that no girl came up between the houses 
 from the creek side carrying her wet skirt. 
 Fortune was kind, however, and he did what he 
 intended, dropping the pinch safely into the 
 chatty in the act of stepping up to the verandah, 
 as if to see whether any one were at home. Then, 
 in sheer bravado, he went round and told Mah 
 Hehn that he would take leave to come in that 
 evening ; it is wonderful what confidence magic 
 gives a fellow. 
 
 "Come," said Mah Hehn, cordially. "You 
 were not at work to-day ? " 
 
 "I went to Oo Boo Nah to get medicine for my 
 mother," replied Pho Lone. 
 
 " More medicine ! Mah Tsay throws money in 
 the creek when she buys medicine now. She has
 
 64 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 spent enough," said Mah Hehn, pausing to 
 gesticulate with a burnt stick, "enough rupees to 
 build a pagoda." 
 
 " I think so too," said Pho Lone, for Mah Hehn 
 spoke what had been often in his mind, " but it 
 is her wish." 
 
 " Why does she not go to the great English 
 medicine-house at Bassein ? " asked Mah Hehn, 
 lifting the pot -lid to see how the rice got on, 
 " they would cure her back there." 
 
 " She does not like to ; nobody knows what 
 they would do to her. We have heard that they 
 cut off people's legs and arms." 
 
 Mah Hehn had heard the same story but did 
 not believe it ; was it likely, when nobody would 
 speak to a person with one arm if they could help 
 it ? Moung Pho Lone might depend upon it 
 those stories were not true. 
 
 She turned to the rice-pot again and Pho Lone 
 got up to go home ; he bore himself very 
 differently now. 
 
 " Pho Lone walks like a peacock this evening," 
 said Moung Yeik to Shway Toon as he passed 
 their house. 
 
 " Sweet words make some proud," rejoined 
 Shway Toon grinning good-naturedly. " I saw 
 him come from Moung Byoo's." 
 
 Moung Yeik shook his head and smiled 
 pityingly. " I will bet a silk pasoh on the 
 chance of Moung Maw," he said. " Moung Maw
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 65 
 
 is ugly and gruff, but I will bet a new silk pasoh 
 that Mah Pan prefers him." 
 
 " Marries him ? " asked Shway Toon. 
 
 Moung Yeik nodded. 
 
 " The bet is made then, friend. I do not believe 
 she will marry him." 
 
 Moung Yeik wished to know why, but Shway 
 Toon only laughed and said Moung Byoo's 
 daughter was not like other girls ; more than this 
 Moung Yeik could not draw from him. 
 
 Meantime Pho Lone, in the highest spirits, was 
 squatting in his room tying up the charm again ; 
 he promised himself that he would bewitch the 
 water afresh to-morrow, and every day he could 
 get the chance until the magic powder was 
 finished, and he laughed with delight as he 
 thought how Mah Pan's favour must from this 
 evening turn from Moung Maw to himself. He 
 had just put the parcel into the pocket of a linen 
 jacket that hung on the wall, as a safer place than 
 on the bed post, when his mother called to him 
 to come and eat his rice. He expected that his 
 father would chaff him about his visit to 
 Ngatheing, but Moung Let, who was already 
 eating, had too much to say about the news the 
 Bassein paddy broker's runner had brought that 
 day. 
 
 " Moung Choe said ' there are many ships now 
 waiting and the price will be very high at first,' ' 
 he observed, through a large mouthful of rice.
 
 66 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " Moung Choe says those words each year at 
 this time/' grumbled Mah Tsay from the darkness 
 behind. "It is his business to speak thus that 
 poor jungle-folk may bring their paddy quickly, 
 when the white merchants will buy it for a little 
 price. I do not believe the words of Moung 
 Choe." 
 
 " You speak wisely," said Moung Let ; " but 
 when there are many ships " 
 
 "I believe there are few ships," struck in Mah 
 Tsay, who, to do her justice, was less easily 
 dazzled by the fine stories of broker's men than 
 her husband. "It is not yet the time when many 
 ships arrive." 
 
 Before Moung Let could reply, Shway Toon 
 appeared at the verandah, and stepped in. He 
 came to say that Moung Maw had asked him to 
 tell them there would be play at his house that 
 evening and would they come. 
 
 " To lose rupees," murmured Mah Tsay, " to 
 play and lose many rupees." 
 
 "Or win, good mother," rejoined Shway Toon, 
 " this son of yours always wins : " which was true ; 
 Pho Lone was very lucky. 
 
 Hearing that the young man had not yet eaten, 
 Moung Let asked him to join them ; they had 
 been eating in the dark, but when Shway Toon 
 sat down before the heap of rice Mah Tsay rose 
 to get the lamp. There was no oil in it, so she 
 told Pho Lone to make the jungle travellers'
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 67 
 
 light, which consists of pieces of wax burned on a 
 .stone. It is not at all safe for use in the house, 
 because the blazing wax runs ; but it would be 
 very inhospitable to let a friend eat his rice in 
 the dark merely because you are afraid of an 
 accident. 
 
 Moung Let said he would go to Moung Maw's, 
 but Pho Lone declined at first : he was going to 
 see Mah Pan. 
 
 " You go too often," said Shway Toon with the 
 air of a man who understands women. " Girls do 
 not prize what they have too often." 
 
 " That is what I say to him," remarked Mah 
 Tsay. 
 
 "They should be kept hungry," said Moung 
 Let, "it is good to keep them hungry." 
 
 Pho Lone wavered. Oo Boo Nah had specially 
 told him that he must be with the lady as much 
 as possible in order to let the charm take full 
 effect ; but then Oo Boo Nah did not know that 
 she was angry : it might be wise to give her time 
 to forget that little unpleasantness of the other 
 night. On the other hand, he loved play, and 
 having spent all his money on the charm, was 
 glad of the chance to win some. 
 
 " You will come," said Shway Toon. " Look 
 here, if you do I will come with you to Moung 
 By oo's another night." 
 
 " Very well," said Pho Lone ; and rice being 
 now eaten, they got up to drink before going out.
 
 68 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 If Pho Lone had remembered, he would have 
 put back the charm upon the bed-post before he 
 put on his jacket and followed his father and 
 Shway Toon ; but he forgot it until he reached 
 Moung Maw's, when he did not feel inclined to go 
 back. It did not matter, he thought ; nobody 
 but his mother knew he had the charm, and there 
 could be nothing to hurt it in a house where only 
 men lived. 
 
 Play had begun when they entered, but Moung 
 Maw at once stopped rattling the dice and 
 politely begged them to join the circle on the 
 floor. 
 
 " Give Ko Moung Let place on the mat," he 
 cried ; for Moung Let being elderly was entitled 
 to be called " Ko " by young men though they 
 often forgot it. " Neighbour, there is room for 
 you there by the bottle." Everybody laughed at 
 this, for Shway Toon had been known to drink 
 more English spirits than was good for him. 
 " Moung Pho Lone, there is a place for you where 
 you stand." 
 
 Room was soon made for them, and the game 
 began again. The house was very bright, for 
 Moung Maw had borrowed lamps from his neigh- 
 bours ; they were wanted, for the dice were so 
 battered from continual use that the pictures 
 could only be seen in a good light. Beside the 
 usual cheroots and betel, there was a bamboo 
 bucket of toddy and a square black bottle half
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 69 
 
 full of gin, with a cracked English tumbler of 
 thick green glass to drink out of. The men of 
 Myothit said that the carpenter was a capital 
 host ; the women thought his play parties very 
 bad, and used to urge Ko Moung Galay to stop 
 them : but the head-man always said he would 
 not interfere because no harm was done : he 
 ought to have known for he often joined them 
 himself. 
 
 " I shall throw ! " cried Mourig Maw kneeling 
 to overlook the circle, and shaking the dice in a 
 brass bowl. " Neighbour, will you call ? " 
 
 " Elephant ! " said Moung Let, putting down 
 his two annas, " the elephant for me." 
 
 " Mother ! " shouted all, as the big dice skipped 
 over the floor and settled. " What luck : double 
 Elephant ! " 
 
 Moung Let laughed and swept up the pice 
 which were pushed to him from all round. It 
 was great luck to begin by winning a doublet. 
 Shway Toon called next, but Dog did not turn 
 up ; so he paid all round and sought refuge in the 
 green tumbler. 
 
 The Sixteen Animal game is a popular one for 
 evening play among friends, as any number can 
 take part, and any one can stop when he pleases 
 without disturbing the rest ; furthermore it is 
 very simple, and you can make a great deal of 
 noise over it. Six large dice having on each face 
 the picture of one of sixteen animals and birds are
 
 70 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 shaken in a bowl or box by an appointed player, 
 who asks each man in turn to name a creature 
 before he throws. If the beast or bird named is 
 among those which come uppermost, the caller is 
 paid the amount of his stake by each of his fellow 
 players, and if it is not he pays them. If two 
 Dogs or Pigeons turn up to a call of Dog or 
 Pigeon, the caller wins double his stake from 
 each of the others. A good deal of money may 
 change hands in an evening's play, though the 
 stakes are only one woo two-anna bit as they 
 always were at Moung Maw's, and though there 
 is no betting which was not always the case at 
 Moung Maw's. 
 
 The toddy bucket and gin bottle passed from 
 hand to hand, and the game grew noisier and 
 noisier, till the caller had to shout his loudest to 
 make Moung Maw hear. Uninvited guests, 
 whose disordered dress and streaming hair showed 
 they had been roused from sleep, came in and 
 joined the game or sat round outside the circle to 
 look on and bet. When a man won he jumped 
 up to dance and sing, and as callers had great 
 luck this evening there were often half a dozen on 
 their feet at once slapping their thighs and 
 shouting, while the rest roared to make them- 
 selves heard above the din. Pho Lone, though 
 
 o 
 
 he did not drink, grew as excited as the rest, and 
 when he won, which happened often, made rather 
 more noise than anybody else.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 71 
 
 "You sit in a lucky place," shouted Moung 
 Maw, not for the first time, when he won his 
 second doublet. 
 
 " Yes, certainly," agreed Pho Lone, out of 
 breath. " I have won now eight and a half 
 rupees." He sat down as he spoke, and suddenly 
 remembering the charm, put his hand to his 
 breast to feel if it were safe ; it might have 
 fallen out during his capers for he had quite 
 forgotten it. 
 
 " I asked you to sit there because it is a lucky 
 place," shouted Moung Maw. But he laughed so 
 strangely that two or three men looked up in 
 surprise. 
 
 "I think our friend must be a little drunk," 
 remarked one young man. " His words are very 
 good, but he looks at Pho Lone as if he would 
 kill him." 
 
 " Now then," bawled Zah Nee, who was throw- 
 ing the dice, " Play, play ! Neighbour Shway 
 Toon, call ! Ho, Shway Toon ! " 
 
 For Shway Toon had withdrawn from the circle 
 and was sitting by himself against the wall with 
 his eyes shut. 
 
 " Call, Shway Toon ! " cried several. 
 
 " Ber-r-randy," said Shway Toon at last, opening 
 his eyes and shutting them again. 
 
 The laughter at Shway Toon's choice of animal 
 became a roar, when somebody leaned over and 
 held up the gin bottle mouth downwards ; but
 
 72 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 some of the older men quickly grew grave and 
 began to get up and adjust their pasohs. Moung 
 Let was the first to move ; he did not like his 
 partner to get drunk before half the men of the 
 village. It may be all very well for low-class 
 people in towns to drink too much, but in the 
 jungle the man who does that soon loses his 
 character. 
 
 " I think it is time to go and sleep," said he, 
 when the men had ceased bantering Shway Toon ; 
 and without more words he shook out his pasoh 
 and went, followed by most of the older men. Pho 
 Lone would have gone too, but his neighbours held 
 him down, crying that he must not leave yet ; he 
 must stay while he smoked only one cheroot. 
 He always found it hard to refuse, and at 
 last consented to stay, though, as he said, he 
 was tired after his long paddle and wanted to 
 sleep. 
 
 " Just three turns," said Zah Nee, who had been 
 throwing the dice latterly, and had now persuaded 
 Moung Yeik to do it. "Just three turns, to let 
 me win a little. There are only six of us, and the 
 lamps will last." 
 
 Though the front of the house was half open, 
 the air within was hot and bad from the smoke of 
 the expiring lamps, which hid the dingy bamboo 
 rafters and drifted down, making the men cough 
 and wipe their eyes. 
 
 " Play, then, play ! Ho, let us play ! " shouted
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 78 
 
 Moung Maw, kicking his heels on the floor as 
 Moung Yeik rattled the dice. 
 
 Pho Lone seconded him with a yell of " Play, 
 play, play ! " But somehow there was no life in 
 the game now. The dice tripped noisily over the 
 floor, and the only word spoken was the caller's. 
 From silence grew ill-temper. Zah Nee, who had 
 had bad luck all night, objected to Moung Gyaw's 
 calling Buffalo after first calling Dog, because 
 double Buffalo turned up. Moung Gyaw retorted 
 that the dice were rolling, and that he said Dog by 
 mistake ; whereupon Zah Nee, saying Moung Gyaw 
 was a cheat, went away in a huff. The next round 
 did not improve matters. Moung Gyaw declared 
 Moung Yeik was not shaking fairly ; and Moung 
 Yeik told Moung Gyaw he was a little drunk, for 
 how could he shake unfairly when he did not know 
 what animal would be called ? In short, his guests 
 grew so quarrelsome that Moung Maw said the 
 lamps were going out and they must stop. They 
 were sensible enough to take the hint, and went 
 away to their own houses, each remarking as he 
 went out that all the world was quiet, as though 
 surprised that it was so late. 
 
 Pho Lone was the last ; he stayed to gather up 
 the pile of copper money he had won and tie it in 
 his head-kerchief. 
 
 " You have had great fortune," said Moung 
 Maw, standing over him ; " yours was the lucky 
 seat."
 
 74 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Pho Lone said it was, and hastened to finish 
 tying up his money, for there was something in 
 the carpenter's manner that frightened him. 
 
 " Stop a bit," said Moung Maw, as he lurched 
 on his feet. " I want to show you something." 
 
 He reached up, and taking a lamp from the wall 
 squatted to turn the flame higher, while Pho Lone 
 stood twisting the bundle in his hand, wondering 
 what he meant. Moung Maw having made the 
 lamp blaze, threw its light upon the roof over the 
 spot where Pho Lone had been sitting all the 
 evening. 
 
 "Do you see anything there? " he asked, shaking 
 with glee. 
 
 Pho Lone's heart beat against his ribs like a 
 smith's hammer, and his hand clutched at the 
 charm, for stuffed between the beam and the rafters 
 he saw a dingy bundle. 
 
 Moung Maw, who had watched his movements, 
 put the lamp on the floor and his mirth broke 
 loose in a peal of jeering laughter. 
 
 " You brought it, you brought it ! That is good. 
 Throw it away, then, neighbour, throw it away ! 
 That is the tamein Mah Htone wore when her 
 little one was born last month. That is the very 
 cloth." 
 
 Now a tamein that has been worn at childbirth 
 is the worst of all ; and Moung Maw had taken 
 the trouble to obt'ain it secretly from his sister's 
 house.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 75 
 
 Pho Lone looked at him for a moment in doubt, 
 for how could Moung Maw know that he had a 
 charm at all ? Then, stung by the carpenter's 
 sneering laughter, he raised the weight of coin in 
 his hand and aimed a savage blow at his head. 
 Had it fallen Moung Maw must have been stunned, 
 but he jumped back in time and rushed at Pho 
 Lone, who turned and fled from the house, 
 threatening to kill him. The chase was short ; 
 Pho Lone being the fleeter kept ahead, never for 
 a breath's space ceasing his threats to cut his 
 pursuer in pieces, till Moung Maw, catching his 
 foot in a litter of rubbish left by a maker of bamboo 
 matting, fell heavily, bruising his knee on a loose 
 stone. When he got up Pho Lone had disappeared 
 into his father's house, so he limped home, vowing 
 to punish him next day. 
 
 His anger did not last long ; while turning out 
 the lamps which still burned, his eye fell upon the 
 tamein he had borrowed from Mah Htone, and the 
 thought of Pho Lone sitting below it in the " lucky 
 place " quite overcame him ; he squatted on the 
 floor and laughed until he was tired. He was so 
 pleased with the success of his trick, and so much 
 amused at Pho Lone's folly in bringing the charm 
 with him, that when he lay down he had quite 
 forgotten the attempt to strike him. 
 
 It was not very wonderful that Moung Maw 
 should have guessed the secret, as Pho Lone 
 admitted to himself that night.
 
 76 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 The carpenter's work upon the village boats 
 kept him about the creek side, and he had noticed 
 that Shway Toon's canoe was absent from its place. 
 Hearing later that Pho Lone had not been seen 
 all the morning, he asked Mah Tsay casually as he 
 passed where her son was, and she replied that she 
 supposed he was at the threshing-floor like every- 
 body else, proving that she did not know where he 
 had gone. Therefore, when Pho Lone gave out 
 that he had been sent to Ngatheing by his mother 
 Moung Maw was not deceived like the rest of the 
 neighbours. He had heard from Mah Pan how 
 she had been insulted, and knew as surely as 
 though he had been there the real purpose of Pho 
 Lone's visit to Oo Boo Nah ; it was just what any 
 other fellow would have done to regain her favour. 
 When he made his trap and sent to ask Moung 
 Let and Pho Lone to come and play, he did not 
 know the nature of the charm ; it might have been 
 a spell engraved on a scrap of bone and let into the 
 skin of the young man's breast, in which case the 
 tamein would " kill " it, since the skin had not had 
 time to heal up. Before Pho Lone had been long 
 in the house the movements of his hand betrayed 
 him, and then Moung Maw had to hide his delight 
 by making two men's share of the noise. 
 
 Had he known that the charm had already been 
 used he would have been less happy.
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 " I DROPPED the packet while I ran last night ; 
 otherwise I might wash my head and scent the 
 charm and repeat the mandras to restore its 
 virtue as you say," said Pho Lone. " But it is 
 lost, and I shall not trouble about it any more 
 now." 
 
 "Your words are foolish," said Mah Tsay, not 
 unkindly. "You have charmed her, and should 
 obey the say ah. You must keep near her at the 
 threshing to-day." 
 
 "But I am afraid of Moung Maw," objected 
 Pho Lone. " I think Moung Maw will beat 
 me." 
 
 Mah Tsay, having heard what happened last 
 night, thought it possible ; but most likely he 
 had forgotten, and, at any rate, as she reminded 
 her son, he could run away. He could run faster 
 than Moung Maw. 
 
 "It is true," sighed Pho Lone with a touch of 
 pride, " I can run faster, but I am much afraid." 
 
 Mother and son were crouching over the fire 
 before their house. The sun winked through the
 
 78 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 rolling mist, but the air was chilly. Everybody 
 in the village was up and sitting over the fires 
 which smoked all along the street, but there was 
 no sound beyond the crackling of sticks and an 
 occasional yawn. The children, scarcely awake 
 yet, nestled their nakedness under the blankets 
 of their elders, and he pariahs circled about the 
 groups seeking warmth. 
 
 " I do not think it is any use to try and keep 
 near her," said Pho Lone, who had been thinking 
 it over, " because Moung Maw will certainly tell 
 her that I have worked magic and that he killed 
 the charm." 
 
 "Not so," replied Mah Tsay, "he will not do 
 that. Will he speak of the means by which he 
 killed it ? Do men love to sit under a woman's 
 rag ? No, good son. Moung Maw's tongue will 
 be silent." And Mah Tsay nodded wisely across 
 the fire. " He will not let the men know what 
 he did." 
 
 Pho Lone had not thought of this. Of course 
 the neighbours would be very angry were they to 
 hear that a woman's tamein had been above 
 their heads all the time they were playing. 
 Moung Maw would keep it secret for his own 
 sake. 
 
 "You speak wisely, mother," he said more 
 cheerfully. " There is no fear of his speaking of 
 the charm." 
 
 "There is Moung Maw," said Mah Tsay, who
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 79 
 
 sat with her back against the house. " He goes 
 to sit at Shway Toon's fire. See ! he walks with 
 a stiff leg." 
 
 Pho Lone looked over his shoulder, remarking 
 that the fellow tumbled down last night when 
 chasing him. Without doubt he was drunk to 
 fall on the smooth road. 
 
 "It is good, for he cannot beat you while he is 
 lame," said Mah Tsay. " Do not be afraid of him, 
 my son." 
 
 " I am not afraid," replied Pho Lone, and, 
 springing to his feet, he doubled his left arm 
 and slapped it in defiance, crying : " He ! Moung 
 Maw ! He, he ! you are the son of a she-dog ! " 
 
 "He is afraid," said Mah Tsay, when Moung 
 Maw did not look round, "he is afraid." 
 
 "Yes, he is," agreed Pho Lone, sitting down 
 again. "I shall certainly throw stones at him to- 
 night when the sky shuts." 
 
 Though Pho Lone's challenge had not reached 
 the ears of Moung Maw the neighbours near heard 
 it, and among them Ko Moung Galay, who got up 
 from his fire and came over. 
 
 " You shout He ! and an evil name at Moung 
 Maw," he said sternly. 
 
 "Not very loud," pleaded Pho Lone, "not too 
 loud. I think he was too far away to hear." 
 For he thought of Mah Sein, and did not wish to 
 be disgraced as she had been. 
 
 "You also incite to breaches of peace," con-
 
 80 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 tinued the head-man, who knew English law- 
 language. " Why do you strike the arm at 
 Moung Maw ? " 
 
 For a breath's space Pho Lone thought of 
 telling the head-man how the carpenter had 
 treated him last night. But he changed his mind 
 in time, and said he was very sorry ; he was sure 
 Moung Maw was too far away to hear, or he should 
 not have done it. He would not do it again. 
 
 " The day before yesterday," said Ko Moung 
 Galay, " you complained of a woman's bad tongue, 
 and we fined her ten baskets. Look, then ! If 
 anybody complains of yours I shall fine you thirty 
 baskets." 
 
 Pho Lone shiko'd meekly, hoping that the 
 neighbours who were watching did not hear what 
 the head-man said ; and Ko Moung Galay, settling 
 his blanket about him again, stalked back to his 
 own house. 
 
 Moung Maw, unconscious of Pho Lone's 
 challenge, limped along to Shway Toon's fire, 
 where room was at once made for him. 
 
 "You have a sick leg," remarked Shway Toon 
 huskily. 
 
 Shway Toon did not look well this morning; 
 his eyes were bloodshot and his face was yellow. 
 Already he had said to his friends that he should 
 never again drink English spirits. But he had 
 said the same thing often before, and now they 
 only laughed at him.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 81 
 
 " I fell last night," said Moung Maw, spreading- 
 his hands to the blaze. 
 
 " Over the bottle ? " grinned Shway Toon. 
 
 " No, friend ; or I had had a sick head." 
 
 Shway Toon joined faintly in the laugh against 
 himself, and said he should never again drink 
 anything stronger than the water of the cocoa- 
 nut. Then, adding that his head beat very much, 
 he got up and went to his house to lie down. 
 Three or four other men who had been very 
 silent followed his example, and Moung Yeik 
 remarked that it was curious how a little of this 
 English berrandy, which looked just like water, 
 should be so bad. For his part, he believed it 
 was poison. 
 
 " English men drink it themselves," said Moung 
 Maw. " How otherwise could I have bought that 
 bottle for one rupee in the shop at Bassein." 
 
 " Did you buy it at the shop ? " asked Moung 
 Gyaw, taking his cheroot from his mouth to put 
 the question, and everybody looked interested. 
 
 " It was more expensive at the shop," said 
 Moung Maw modestly, "but I know it is not 
 good to buy from the Talouks in the bazaar. I 
 have seen English shipmen drunk on liquor the 
 Talouks sold them." 
 
 " Shipmen are always drunk," remarked Moung 
 Yeik, sagely, " very many times I have seen them 
 in Bassein falling about the streets. Once I saw 
 one lying on the road and the Tall merchant came
 
 82 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 past in his pony-cart and stopped. I said to 
 him, ' Sir, I think this gentleman is dead/ he 
 answered, ' I will see,' and got down to look. 
 He put his face near the shipman's very close, 
 like this, and said to me, ' Bring much water.' 
 I brought two great oil tins of water, very heavy, 
 from the well which was near, and at the Tall 
 merchant's order I poured both on the shipman's 
 head and body." 
 
 " Was he dead ? " asked Moung Maw. 
 
 " The shipman got up," continued Moung 
 Yeik, bubbling over with laughter, " and ran at 
 the Tall merchant ; they ran a long way, but the 
 shipman did not catch him ; he fell down again, 
 and when the Tall merchant came to him, the 
 shipman cried very much." 
 
 " Why did he cry ? " 
 
 " I cannot tell," said Moung Yeik ; " when the 
 shipman jumped up, I ran through the ditch by 
 the roadside and looked on from the other side, 
 being afraid." 
 
 " What happened then ? " 
 
 " The Tall merchant took the shipman's arm 
 with his hand, thus, and led him to the creek 
 side ; there he called a kullah boatman and gave 
 him money to take the shipman to his own fire- 
 ship." 
 
 " The English are very curious people," re- 
 marked Moung Maw, thoughtfully. 
 
 " Very curious, indeed," agreed Moung Yeik,
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 83 
 
 " I saw a strange thing once, years ago, when I 
 was at Wahgyee, driving a bullock cart for the 
 Government-side." 
 
 " What was that ? " asked Moung Gyaw, who 
 knew Moung Yeik liked to be pressed to tell a 
 story. 
 
 " It was the strange way of the English. The 
 kullah soldiers, after many weeks hunting in the 
 jungle, had caught Boh Hpay, the dacoit, and 
 three of his followers ; they were all much 
 wounded, and the soldiers carried them into 
 Wahgyee in carts, for they could not walk. Well, 
 they put those four dacoits in the medicine-house, 
 and an English doctor tended them for many 
 weeks, giving them much English medicine both 
 for the stomach and for their wounds ; a kullah 
 who pulled a punkah at the medicine-house told 
 me he saw this daily with his own eyes. And 
 when the four dacoits were quite well, the English 
 tried them in court, and Boh Hpay and one man 
 were shot. I saw it with my own eyes." 
 
 " After keeping them in the medicine-house 
 and making them well ! " said Moung Maw. 
 
 " After taking so much care to make them 
 well : just as if they were English soldiers." 
 
 " I saw them shot," continued Moung Yeik, 
 " and that too was a strange sight, but also very 
 funny. The dacoits stood against a wall and ten 
 kullah soldiers with guns stood in a line a little way 
 off. An English sitboh gave orders ; a young sitboh
 
 84 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 with no hair on his face. Well, when the dacoits 
 stood up, I with many others stood near, and I 
 could see the young sitboh's face very white and 
 his hands shaking as though he had fever. He 
 gave orders, and, when the kullahs pointed their 
 guns, he turned his back to give the last. Then 
 he looked to see that the dacoits had fallen dead, 
 and walked away as if he were drunk." 
 
 "That was very strange," said several men, for 
 there was quite a crowd round the fire now. 
 
 " You said it was funny," said Moung Maw, 
 "why was the shooting of the dacoits funny?" 
 
 " The backs of their heads came out," chuckled 
 Moung Yeik. " Ho, ho ! The back of each head 
 jumped off and hung by the hair. It was the 
 funniest thing I ever saw," and he fairly rocked 
 with merriment as he thought of it, while his 
 hearers agreed that it must have been a very 
 amusing thing to see. 
 
 Mah Doh, Ko Moung Galay's wife, was now 
 calling that rice was ready, so the people left 
 their fires to gather at the head-man's house. 
 Moung Maw noticed that Pho Lone put himself 
 forward, showing much politeness to Mah Doh, 
 and remarking upon it to a friend, heard that the 
 young man had been scolded that morning by Ko 
 Moung Galay, and why. 
 
 " He called you a bad name, and beat his arm 
 at you," said the friend. " Many people near 
 heard him."
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 85 
 
 "If I had heard it, I should have killed him, 1 ' 
 said Moung Maw, calmly plunging his fingers into 
 a heap of steaming rice. "I do not love quar- 
 relling, but if he does it again I shall certainly 
 kill him." 
 
 Pho Lone, anxious to regain the favour of Ko 
 Moung Galay, was helping Mah Doh and Mah 
 Mee with the rice-pots ; but he overheard the 
 words, as Moung Maw intended he should, and 
 decided not to do it again. 
 
 " You did not come to see me last night," said 
 Mah Pan to Moung Maw rather loudly. " Why 
 did you not come ? " 
 
 The carpenter was a proud man and did not 
 like to be spoken to thus before the neighbours, 
 t3ven by the prettiest girl in the village. 
 
 " I forgot," he answered with his mouth full. 
 
 Mah Pan's ears tingled, for she heard the girls 
 giggling. She turned her back on Moung Maw 
 and talked to Mah Mee about whom Pho Lone 
 was hovering. She had not spoken to Pho Lone 
 since the evening when he insulted her, but now 
 she caught his eye and gave him her sweetest 
 smile ; Moung Maw must be punished. The 
 smile did its work and Pho Lone was at her 
 side. 
 
 " You are too busy to speak to one this morn- 
 ing," she said. 
 
 " No," said Pho Lone, casting a fearful glance 
 in Moung Maw's direction. " No, not too busy
 
 86 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 now. But I think there will be much work pre- 
 sently with the paddy." 
 
 "I think the elder brother no longer wishes 
 to talk with me ; no longer cares to speak to me," 
 said Mah Pan, with a glance. 
 
 Moung Maw was not looking ; he was laughing- 
 with some other men. Pho Lone dropped on his 
 heels, and made the most of the time. He was 
 very happy indeed when the party broke up, and 
 began to drift out to the threshing-floor. Mah 
 Pan had been sweeter than she had been for a 
 long time past, and Moung Maw had not even 
 looked at them. Without doubt that was a 
 wonderful charm Oo Boo Nah had given him ; 
 a single pinch had done this. How lucky 
 it was he had lost no time in putting it in the 
 water ! 
 
 Moung Maw, having finished his work on the 
 boats, came to the threshing, but more to enjoy 
 the society than to use his hands. He did not 
 once go near Mah Pan, and did not seem to 
 hear, even when she asked Pho Lone to let her 
 drink smoke from his cheroot. As Pho Lone 
 told his mother afterwards, he had to keep near 
 her, whether he wished to or not ; for what was 
 a fellow to do when a girl kept asking him to 
 help her lift sheaves, and told him he must sit 
 with her when she got tired ? Mah Sein said 
 the way they flirted was shameful, and though 
 everybody knew Mah Sein was bitter against
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 87 
 
 Pho Lone, no one contradicted her. Yet Moung 
 Maw, playing with the little boys by the thresh- 
 ing-floor, did not seem to see or hear. Pho 
 Lone's head was quite turned by noon when 
 work stopped. He had told Mah Pan of his 
 luck at play last night, and had received her 
 permission to buy a silver necklace with his 
 winnings. He felt that such a present as that 
 must complete what the love charm had begun 
 so well, and so excited was he that at a nod from 
 Mah Pan he would have beaten his arm at 
 Moung Maw again out there on the kwins. 
 
 " I cannot get the necklace till we go to 
 Bassein," said Pho Lone, as they walked back to 
 the village together ; " but I shall certainly buy 
 it then." 
 
 "That will be quite a month," pouted Mah 
 Pan. 
 
 " I shall play often again before then," said 
 Pho Lone quickly, " and shall win many more 
 rupees ; perhaps so much that I shall have 
 enough to buy you a dahleezan." 
 
 A dahleezan is the ornament of all others to 
 please a girl ; it is a mat-work of links and plates 
 and drops of silver to wear round the throat. 
 Mah Pan replied that if it were a dahleezan she 
 could certainly wait a month. 
 
 There was a little stir in the street when they 
 arrived. Moung Paw Thin, the policeman, had 
 arrived on patrol duty, and was squatting on Ko
 
 88 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Moung Galay 's verandah awaiting the head-man's 
 return. You could see at once that Moung Paw 
 Thin's was an important position ; everybody 
 who passed made a little shiko to him, which he 
 did not appear to notice. When he visited the 
 village for the first time, people were pleased to 
 see him, and crowded round to hear the news 
 from Ngatheing and other down-creek villages, 
 whence he had come ; they did not do so now, 
 and there was that in Moung Paw Thin's face 
 which said it would not be good to offend him. 
 Even Ko Moung Galay, when he arrived, showed 
 respect to the constable, and hastened to offer 
 him a mat to sit on. 
 
 " I have walked very far," said Moung Paw 
 Thin, as he allowed the mat to be put under 
 him. 
 
 "Is it your pleasure to eat rice and a little 
 dried fish ? " asked Ko Moung Galay anxiously. 
 
 It was Moung Paw Thin's pleasure ; he also 
 liked ngapee ; so Mah Doh had to light a fire 
 and cook food instead of going to sleep as she 
 usually did when she came in from work. Their 
 guest was hungry, and after he had asked twice 
 whether the rice were not ready, Ko Moung 
 Galay himself went to tend the fire. The first 
 stir had subsided, but there was an air of un- 
 easiness all along the street, groups of men and 
 women gathering between the houses to talk 
 instead of going in to sleep at once.
 
 89 
 
 Moling Paw Thin did not mention business 
 until he had eaten and had accepted a cheroot 
 which his host crouched to light for him. Then 
 he inquired what news there was of bad cha- 
 racters. 
 
 " By reason of the great vigilance of the 
 police," said Ko Moung Galay, "the district is 
 quiet. We have heard no word of dacoits for 
 many months, since you last came." 
 
 Moung Paw Thin gave the ghost of a nod, as 
 much as to say he knew there were no dacoits in 
 the neighbourhood, and the reason assigned by 
 Ko Moung Galay was the right one ; but all he 
 said was, " The book ! " 
 
 The head-man brought the official book which 
 he kept in his box, and after rummaging for a 
 time, found the ink-bottle and a rusty pen. A 
 drop of water made the ink fit to use, but 
 Moung Paw Thin scowled when he took up the 
 pen. 
 
 " I cannot write with that," he said angrily ; 
 but he crossed his legs, and resting the book 
 upon them, took a dip of ink from the bottle Ko 
 Moung Galay held, and made much display of 
 inability to write. " I shall report that the 
 Government property at this village is not pro- 
 perly cared for," he said, throwing the pen down 
 after a moment. 
 
 It was Ko Moung Galay's own pen, as Moung 
 Paw Thin knew very well ; but the head-man was
 
 90 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 wise, and said he feared it was not fit for a police 
 officer to write with. Would Paw Thin do him 
 the great favour to bring a new pen next time he 
 
 came ? Perhaps two rupees 
 
 Moung Paw Thin consented to buy it, if he 
 remembered, and tucked the two rupees into his 
 waist-cloth, adding that he did not know the 
 price, but no doubt that would be enough. Mah 
 Doh, who had been looking- on, remarked that 
 
 O ' 
 
 two pens cost half an anna, but Ko Moung Galay 
 signed to her to be silent, and Moung Paw Thin 
 did not hear. 
 
 " With your honoured leave, I shall write in 
 the book the words you command," said Ko 
 Moung Galay, rubbing the pen on the floor to 
 get the rust off. " I am your clerk, to write at 
 your order. 
 
 Moung Paw Thin pushed the book off his lap, 
 and between the puffs of his cheroot, dictated : 
 " I arrived in Myothit village at a little past 
 noon. Asked the head-man if there was news of 
 dacoits. He said there was none. Left at two 
 o'clock." 
 
 Ko Moung Galay scratched away at the book, 
 repeating the words as he wrote them. It was 
 a bad pen, and spat ink too much, as he con- 
 fessed to Mah Doh afterwards ; but one could 
 write with it. 
 
 Moung Paw Thin signed the entry, quite for- 
 getting how bad the pen was, and when the book
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 91 
 
 had been put away, he cleared his throat, and 
 said there was another matter. He was in- 
 formed there was much gambling in Myothit, and 
 that many people were thereby in debt. 
 
 " Several owe money to the kullah chetties," 
 admitted Ko Moung Galay, "but not because 
 they have gambled away their money." 
 
 " I have orders to arrest gamblers," said 
 Moung Paw Thin. "It is your duty to give 
 information about persons who break the law. 
 My order is that you tell me the names of men 
 who gamble." 
 
 Ko Moung Galay gave a little awkward laugh. 
 
 " Shall I read to you the names upon the 
 village tax-roll ? " he asked, in respectful play. 
 
 Moung Paw Thin looked at him from under 
 angry brows. 
 
 "At Thigyoung village last month," he said, 
 " I gave this order ; whereupon, like you, the 
 head-man laughed and read to me the names 
 upon his tax-rolls, beginning with his own. The 
 head-man of Thigyoung has lost the favour of the 
 Government." 
 
 Ko Moung Galay did not wish to lose the 
 favour of the Government. It would be bad for 
 himself, and also for the village. He knew quite 
 well what the Government wanted, but he would 
 not get any of his people into trouble if he could 
 help it. Still, he was not in a position to object. 
 In every village on the creek it was well known
 
 92 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 that the Ngatheing people had got into trouble 
 on a charge of harbouring dacoits, whom they 
 had never seen, because Ko Bah Too, the surly 
 head-man, had refused to order men to take the 
 Government in a boat to a distant village. He had 
 a printed notice in his box, which said in beauti- 
 ful language that head-men were to at once report 
 attempts at extortion to the Assistant Super- 
 intendent of Police at Bassein ; but Bassein was 
 far away, and one could not leave the harvest to 
 make a report, and an enemy at the same time. 
 Besides it was a great deal too much trouble, all 
 for the sake of a few rupees. 
 
 " The men in my village play only very little," 
 he said at length. 
 
 " You know it is against the law to play at all," 
 replied Moung Paw Thin. " Give the name of 
 one player." 
 
 "Well, then, Pho Lone, son of Moung Let, 
 plays," declared Ko Moung Galay in desperation. 
 After all somebody must suffer ; Pho Lone had 
 had all the luck lately, and the winner of rupees 
 was the only gambler the Government wanted to 
 see. 
 
 "Anybody else? " demanded the constable. 
 
 " No other man has been winning more than a 
 few pice for a long time," sighed Ko Moung Galay. 
 " As I have told you the men here do not play 
 very much ; they are poor." 
 
 The people were all lounging in their houses by
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 93 
 
 this time, but they looked out now and again 
 towards the head-man's. The patrol constable 
 was a new institution and nobody thought him a 
 good one ; he came about once in each month to 
 ask for news of dacoits, and never went away 
 without a present. Oo Yan grumbled most at 
 these new fangled ideas. What, he asked, could 
 one policeman do if there were news of dacoits ? 
 Go back at once and report ! Well, if he did the 
 dacoits would be miles away before he got to the 
 police thannah. Yes, yes, he knew that the 
 patrolling frightened dacoits, and that three or 
 four times gangs had been traced and broken up 
 owing to the news taken by patrol constables. 
 But what of that ? It was an accident in each 
 case. Who could say it was not ? Besides you 
 never knew that dacoits would attack the village ; 
 they might not. Myothit had not been attacked 
 for years. But the constable came each month as 
 surely as the full moon and always took money. 
 They must give him money, or worse happened. 
 The people generally agreed with Oo Yan. He 
 was old, so his words were naturally held in 
 respect, particularly by those men upon whom 
 the patrol constable had happened to call at any 
 time. 
 
 Hence, when Moung Paw Thin, followed by 
 Ko Moung Galay, went down the street to Moung 
 Let's everybody looked on much relieved. Moung 
 Maw lay in his house shaking with laughter. It
 
 94 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 was in his mind to go to Moung Let's and tell 
 the constable exactly how much Pho Lone had 
 won; but he did not, partly because he was 
 good natured and lazy, and partly because the 
 neighbours would have thought badly of him. 
 So he lay quiet with his chin on his hands, 
 listening, like every one else, to Mah Tsay's shrill 
 abuse of Moung Paw Thin and to Pho Lone's 
 frightened protests. Moung Let squatted against 
 the wall smoking calmly ; he could do no good 
 by joining in, and might get himself into 
 trouble. 
 
 The head-man and the constable were a long 
 time in the house, fully two betel chews, and 
 never for a moment did Mah Tsay's tongue cease. 
 When at last they came out Moung Paw Thin 
 carried, rolled up under his arm, a silk pasoh, 
 which every one recognised as Pho Lone's, and 
 fingered the fold of his own red cotton one where 
 a man keeps his money. They went back to Ko 
 Moung Galay's, and after a while, when it was 
 thought the constable would be asleep, the people 
 crept stealthily over to Moung Let's, for they 
 were all dying to know what the visitor's words 
 were and what he had done. Mah Tsay's account 
 was so long and loud that her husband had to 
 make her be silent for fear the Government should 
 come back again ; it was also rather confused, and 
 that was why every one assembled at Ko Moung 
 Galay's when the sky shut, soon after Moung
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 95 
 
 Paw Thin had gone, to hear him speak on the 
 matter. 
 
 Ko Moung Galay sat on his verandah, above 
 the people, and spoke wise words. In his opinion 
 Pho Lone had had a very lucky escape ; he had 
 been gambling, as everybody knew. Everybody 
 assented doubtfully. He had won money from 
 several neighbours. Several agreed bitterly. And 
 since gambling was against the law, the constable 
 would only have done his duty had he taken Pho 
 Lone to prison. Pho Lone would have been tried 
 in court and perhaps sent to prison where all his 
 hair would be cut off and he would wear chains 
 on his legs. Everybody said " Mother ! " in a 
 tone of sceptical awe. Yes, that might have been 
 the fate of Pho Lone. Instead of arresting him, 
 however, the constable had been content to con- 
 fiscate (a rumbling chuckle passed through the 
 crowd) to confiscate the rupees he had won ; nine 
 rupees and some copper coin. And such was Pho 
 Lone's gratitude (somebody laughed and many 
 found their throats required clearing) that he 
 begged the constable to accept his best pasoh as 
 a present. It was a lucky thing that Moung Paw 
 Thin was not a hard man. Gambling was not 
 good. The village had lost the work of an after- 
 noon owing to the constable's visit ; he hoped 
 his friends would eat rice at his house next 
 morning. 
 
 " He is the head-man," said Moung Yeik to
 
 96 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Shway Toon as they strolled home afterwards, 
 " and he must say those words because he receives 
 Government-side pay. He knows it is all nonsense 
 and that the constable is a thief: he will say so 
 to one but not to many."
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 IT was a full month since Moung Paw Thin's visit 
 to Myothit. There was no mist in the morning 
 now and fires were only needed to boil rice. The 
 cold season was over and men and women went 
 about in great leaf and canework hats to guard 
 against the sun, which glowed a dull red ball in a 
 pale sky. All the paddy was in ; the granaries 
 were full and great yellow heaps caught the sun 
 behind every house. The yield was the largest 
 Oo Yan could remember, and as reports said the 
 harvest was good everywhere, the men were 
 anxious to market their grain early before heavy 
 supplies should bring down the price. Hence 
 when Oo Boo Nah was requested, as usual, to 
 ascertain the propitious day for starting all were 
 glad when he determined a very early date. 
 Every boat was laden down to the gunwale and 
 ready to start for Bassein ; there had been some 
 talk of dacoits lately, and owners had decided that 
 it would be safe to make the voyage in company, 
 so there was none of the hurry to get away firsb 
 which Myothit had so often seen.
 
 98 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 There was no striving to be first, but ten or 
 twelve boats cannot start on the first trip of the 
 season without some bustle, and the bank was 
 alive this morning. Men were wading, swimming 
 and climbing on board, to vent their high spirits 
 when they got there by capering and shouting. 
 Every boy in the village who was old enough to 
 do what he ought not was where he was least 
 wanted. The men and women who were to remain 
 at home, sat on the top of the bank against the 
 piles of baskets which had been tossed aside after 
 loading, and screamed messages to their friends ; 
 those who had no messages to give, shouted 
 because it seemed good to make a noise. Pho 
 Lone was dancing wildly, singing and slapping 
 his thighs as though he had not a care in the 
 world, and Mah Tsay, sitting in a basket with her 
 chin on her knees, screamed cheerfully at him 
 from the bank. She was glad to see him so happy 
 again ; for he had been dull and mopish ever 
 since the patrol constable took away his money. 
 Pho Lone cared no more for rupees than another 
 man : money was not a thing to trouble about so 
 long as a fellow was happy. When he lost at 
 play he did not care, because the excitement was 
 the same, losing or winning : if he won, he was 
 ready to toss a friend for every coin and was 
 repaid in due measure by the fun of it. At any 
 other time he would have thought little of his 
 loss ; he would have called the constable bad
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 99 
 
 names for a day or two when the subject was 
 mentioned, and then in his natural wisdom would 
 have ceased to regret what he could not help, as 
 neighbours had done before in like cases. What 
 weighed upon him was his inability to buy that 
 silver necklet which he had promised Mah Pan 
 and which was to complete what the charm had 
 begun so well. It had been very plain that since 
 his loss he had made no progress in her favour, 
 though in obedience to Oo Boo Nah he had kept 
 near her as much as he could ; while on the other 
 hand, Moung Maw had been taken into favour 
 again and that in spite of his seeming indiffer- 
 ence. 
 
 However, he was joyous enough now. He was 
 on Moung Byoo's boat, and Mah Hehn and Mah 
 Pan were on it also, while Moung Maw, almost at 
 the last moment had exchanged into another boat, 
 to Mah Pan's hardly veiled anger. 
 
 " Push ! push ! push ! " roared the man who sat 
 on the high steering chair. " Ho ! clear those 
 oars there. Push away ! She goes ! she goes ! " 
 
 " Loo la, youk kya, Loo-la-heeey ! " sang the 
 men straining at the poles, "Loo-la, loo-la, heeey, 
 heey ! She floats ! " and all sang together as the 
 poles sank and the great boat glided clear of the 
 crush at the bank. 
 
 " Oars, oars ! " shouted the steersman ; for the 
 tide was just turning and Moung Byoo did not 
 wish to drift too far ahead. The rattan-tied oars
 
 100 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 creaked and splashed and the pointed prow swung 
 up stream, a few paddling gently to hold her so. 
 Moung Byoo would take the steering paddle him- 
 self presently, but just now he was busy with 
 more important matters, as a careful boat owner 
 should be when starting on a trip. He was 
 crouching in the attitude of respect on the prow, 
 holding in his hands a lacquer tray containing an 
 offering while he muttered prayers to the nats. 
 
 The creeks, like the fields and jungles, and the 
 air itself, are full of spirits, and very touchy spirits 
 at that. The water-nats are particularly huffy ; 
 the least little thing offends them, and when 
 angered or annoyed they are capable of any mis- 
 chief. They will put a snag in the shallows 
 where the boat must pass, cling to the smooth 
 bottom when the rowers are tired and so double 
 their labour ; make a split in the hull to let in 
 water and spoil the paddy, steal oars when you 
 forget to secure them on mooring, or play any of 
 a score of tricks, even to pulling a boat bodily 
 under water with all her crew. On a long trip 
 when men cannot go ashore they must give offence 
 to the nats ; and for this reason it is good to pro- 
 pitiate them at starting. Offerings nearly always 
 put them in a good temper, though cases have 
 been known of boats coming to grief in spite of 
 the most liberal treatment in this respect. Moung 
 Byoo was far too sensible a man to risk giving* 
 offence by any appearance of meanness. His tray
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 101 
 
 was laden with rice, plantains, betel-nuts, chillies, 
 tender shoots of bamboo and flowers. These he 
 offered freely, murmuring his prayer for the nats' 
 protection and indulgence, and asking forgiveness 
 in advance for any acts on the part of himself or 
 his men that should give them pain. Mischievous 
 and irritable as nats are, it cannot be said that 
 they are greedy ; indeed their appetites are very 
 delicate : they swarmed round in invisible crowds 
 to eat of the ngway, the essence of the good 
 things on the tray, thereby signifying acceptance 
 of Moung Byoo's bountiful offering. Even stingy 
 Mah Hehn, did not object to her husband's 
 lavishness in this matter ; because when the nats 
 had taken all they wanted the men ate the rest. 
 
 Boat after boat slid out from the bank and 
 hung against the ebb in a lengthening chain, 
 while the owners propitiated the nats, and men 
 girt their pasohs tightly about their hips and 
 poured water on the oar fastenings that they 
 might work easily. On most of the larger boats 
 the oars were tied to short uprights, which stood 
 up like the ends of ribs. Moung Byoo's had a 
 knee-high bamboo rail on either side to which 
 the oars were lashed, but then his boat was the 
 pride of the village ; the carved steering-chair 
 with its little sun-roof had cost a hundred and 
 seventy rupees, and the great gilt and red eyes 
 on the prow gave it a very fierce look. There 
 was not such another boat on the western creeks
 
 102 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 between Ngapoota and Mazalay. When people 
 of other villages boasted of their boats all a 
 Myothit man had to say was, " Moung Byoo's 
 boat is mortgaged for two thousand five hundred 
 rupees." Then the boasters exclaimed, " Mother I 
 is that so, neighbour ? " and were silenced. The 
 boat was mortgaged, but Moung Byoo had raised 
 the money from the English merchant to whom 
 he had sold his paddy for the last twenty 
 seasons. It is much wiser to mortgage one's 
 boat to a white man than to a grasping Madrasi 
 money-lender who asks three per cent, a month 
 and will foreclose in a minute if you happen to 
 lose at play the rupees you had saved to pay his 
 interest. Moreover, the Englishman will lend 
 the full value of a boat, while the chetty will not. 
 Of course you have always to sell your grain to 
 the merchant who holds the mortgage ; but no 
 hardship arises from this, because all the mer- 
 chants agree among themselves to pay the same 
 price, fixing the rate for a week or so at a time 
 during the season. 
 
 All this time Moung Byoo's boat had been 
 dropping slowly down the creek, and was now 
 round the bend out of sight of the village. One 
 by one others crept, stern first, into view, so that 
 a message could be passed from boat to boat 
 right home to Myothit a mile away. Moung 
 Gyaw had given over charge of the steering 
 paddle, and Moung Byoo, with Mah Pan at his
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 103 
 
 side, squatted on the perch watching the move- 
 ments of the fleet. Presently much splashing 
 and shouting on a boat just drifting round the 
 bend caught his eye. " All the boats are out," 
 he said, laying his cheroot aside. " Give me 
 room, good daughter." Mah Pan got out of the 
 way of the tiller, and he pressed it forward with 
 both hands. 
 
 "Now, my sons, put her round, round, round ! 
 Pull Moung Gyaw's side, back Zah Nee's ! " 
 
 " What great splashing ! " said Mah Hmway 
 Pan, as the boat turned. " The water leaps even 
 up here." 
 
 " All together, now ! Pull away, pull away ! " 
 
 Moung Gyaw and Zah Nee at the stroke oars 
 glanced at each other to set the time, and the 
 fourteen rowers stepped forward like one, throw- 
 ing themselves back with arms at full stretch. 
 The boat swept forward to their short, slow stroke 
 with a creak you could hear above the rowing 
 chorus, and Moung Byoo picked up his cheroot 
 again to smoke gravely as becomes a boat-owner. 
 
 Mah Pan settled herself comfortably, sought 
 Pho Lone among the rowers below, gave him a 
 laughing nod, and turned to look behind. 
 
 "All the boats follow now," she remarked. " I 
 think they are racing." 
 
 " Is Moung Let's first ? " asked Moung Byoo 
 with a chuckle. 
 
 " No," replied Mah Pan, facing round at once ;
 
 104 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 for Moung Maw was rowing on Moung Let's boat, 
 and she knew what her father meant. 
 
 It was pleasant to sit on the steering chair 
 high above the deck and shaded from the sun, 
 getting the best of the breeze from the motion 
 of the boat. Not a leaf stirred in the jungle 
 which hedged the glistening creek from the brink. 
 The men had ceased singing now and talked as 
 they swung the oars. Every one was in a good 
 humour, and presently Zah Nee, who was married 
 and ought to have known better, began to say 
 pretty things to Mah Pan. Others put in their 
 word, saying she was the queen of the boat : 
 this was very agreeable, and Mah Pan soon 
 forgot Moung Maw's desertion. When Zah Nee 
 had no more to say to her she began to make 
 eyes at young Hpo Chit, who pulled the oar 
 behind Pho Lone's. This was great fun, because 
 Hpo Chit, being very bashful, did not know where 
 to look, and Pho Lone, thinking her glances were 
 meant for him, looked so absurdly happy. 
 
 As the strength of the ebb increased the boat 
 went faster, though the oars were scarcely more 
 than dipped. Off Ngatheing village they stopped 
 and shouted to the people on shore, for the 
 Ngatheing boats were all ready to start, and, 
 it appeared, had been waiting since yesterday 
 for those from Myothit. The Ngatheing men 
 pushed off as they drifted by, and all went on 
 together, a noisy crowd spreading across the
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 105 
 
 stream from bank to bank. There was no jungle 
 to hide the country now, but there was nothing- 
 interesting in endless stubble fields, arid Mah Pan 
 was growing tired of her cramped seat. 
 
 "We shall come to Tawchoung on this tide," 
 said her father, whom she asked where they 
 should moor, "and go on again with the next 
 ebb. That will take us to the river, and we shall 
 go up to Bassein on two tides." 
 
 Tawchoung was still two hours away, so she 
 let herself down by the deck-house roof below and 
 went in to sleep. 
 
 The fleet glided on. Past the village of the 
 Karen Mission stockaded down to the water ; 
 past endless ranges of bush jungle so close that 
 not even deer could harbour ; past a weed grown 
 waste which had been paddy land, and past the 
 charred posts peering above the herbage, which 
 was all that remained of Thippingyee village after 
 the dacoits attacked it three years ago. The men 
 were growing tired and only paddled with their 
 oars, letting the current do the work. The creak, 
 creak of the cane fastenings at every stroke was 
 enough to send one to sleep ; now and again 
 when a bird screamed you felt how still it was 
 save for the oar-squeak from the twenty boats 
 astern. Moung Byoo sat with his hand on the 
 tiller looking fixedly ahead ; the tide was slacken- 
 ing and when it began to turn they must stop ; 
 men never row against the tide in the creeks of
 
 106 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 the Delta ; the progress made would not be worth 
 the toil. 
 
 " Pull away," he said cheerily, for they had but 
 little distance to go now, and the water being 
 nearly dead the boat was creeping like a log. 
 
 Pho Lone struck up the rowing chorus, and the 
 rest joined in, but as men who are weary. At 
 last the boat rounded a curve and a long low 
 spit where two creeks met ran out from the left 
 bank. " Tawchoung ! " cried Moung Byoo, and 
 soon the oars were trailing against the boat's side 
 and the anchor was dropped. The rest of the 
 fleet anchored as they came near ; and, the sun 
 having now sunk behind the trees, the men began 
 to boil their rice. 
 
 Moung Byoo's rowers were fortunate ; they 
 could sit down to rest and smoke, because the 
 women were there to cook for them. Pho Lone 
 was the only one who did not rest. This was the 
 time to which he had looked forward so eagerly, 
 and no sooner did Mah Hehn put out the pot than 
 he went to help. He got a dah and cut up the 
 sticks while Mah Pan measured out the rice, a 
 double handful for each man ; for rowing seven 
 hours together gives a great appetite. Pho Lone 
 helped her to set the pot on the fire-stones, three 
 pointed lumps of blackened clay buried in a 
 shallow box of earth ; and then, having set the 
 fire alight, squatted to help her watch the rice 
 boil. They did not talk much ; but now and again
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 107 
 
 Pho Lone glanced at his father's boat which lay 
 on the other side of the creek, and wondered if 
 Moung Maw were sorry now that he had not come 
 in Moung Byoo's. 
 
 The sky had shut ; all had finished eating and 
 sat in groups smoking and talking. Mah Pan left 
 her father and mother in the little cabin, and 
 found a quiet corner in the stern where she settled 
 herself comfortably to smoke. 
 
 " I have made a plan to get a little money," 
 said Pho Lone, appearing, as it seemed, from 
 nowhere, to sit near her. 
 
 Had he? What did he want rupees for so 
 much ? That necklet ? What necklet ? O yes ; 
 she had forgotten. And Mah Pan puffed her 
 cheroot lazily, looking out over the fleet of boats 
 sleeping on the black water. 
 
 " Shall I tell what the plan is ? " asked Pho 
 Lone meekly ; she did not seem very sweet to- 
 night. 
 
 " Tell," she said, as a mother might speak to a 
 child. 
 
 " I will help to measure my father's paddy," said 
 Pho Lone eagerly, " and I will cut each basket." 
 
 Mah Pan did not understand ; so he explained, 
 very proud of having thought of such a good way 
 of making rupees. She knew how paddy was 
 measured ? It was taken out of the boat and 
 heaped in the godown ; then a square wooden box, 
 called a basket, though it was not a basket at all,
 
 108 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 was used to measure it, box by box, into another 
 heap while Moung Let and one of the black 
 strangers of the godown kept count. 
 
 Mah Pan understood quite well ; but she did 
 not see how Pho Lone could make money by help- 
 ing to measure. 
 
 No ? Well he would show. He would handle 
 the measuring stick himself; each time the box 
 was filled, the paddy was levelled off with a short 
 round staff as thick as a man's arm at the 
 shoulder. By stretching the fingers as you drew 
 this staff over the box you could scoop out quite 
 a lot each time. 
 
 But would the godown stranger take short 
 measure ? 
 
 Kullahs, Pho Lone explained, were often stupid, 
 and when not stupid, could be made so by a little 
 present ; he did not expect any difficulty there. 
 After the paddy had been measured he should tell 
 what he had done, and his father, being much 
 pleased, would give him a present. 
 
 Mah Pan thought the plan very good. Moung 
 Let's boat carried four hundred baskets, but if 
 Pho Lone could cut each as it was measured it 
 might turn out a good deal more. She hoped 
 Moung Let would be generous, for she wanted 
 very much a silver necklet to wear. Now she 
 should go in to sleep. 
 
 The moon peeped over the black tree-shadows 
 down upon the boats straining to the flood ; the
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 109 
 
 water gurgled and lapped under their prows as 
 they slowly swung ; the crickets shrilled in the 
 jungle and fluttering bats chased each other to 
 and fro ; now a fish plunged, sending silver rings 
 to break in moonlit diamonds on a boat's side ; 
 and the fire-flies floated among the bushes over the 
 banks. A thread of smoke trickled up from a late 
 fire, but every man slept with his pasoh between 
 his body and the stars. 
 
 The tide had turned and had been running- 
 down for quite an hour when Moung Byoo awoke 
 and crept out on deck ; the moon, was shining 
 brightly, and all the men were still sound asleep. 
 He stepped among them carefully hoping that 
 something would soon happen to make a noise and 
 wake them ; but nothing occurred and he sat 
 down again to wait. Fortunately the men on the 
 boat anchored just above, being still half asleep, 
 were very clumsy and in starting managed to 
 bump up against Moung Byoo's. The squeaking 
 and groaning as she rubbed by was enough to 
 wake everybody, and in half a betel chew the 
 anchor was up and they were on their way to 
 Moogyouk where the Tawchoung creek enters the 
 river. There was not much talk as the men 
 rowed, but a good deal of yawning. They reached 
 Moogyouk just after the sun rose, and anchored 
 again to eat rice while they waited for the flood 
 which would carry them up the river. Moung- 
 Byoo reckoned that they should arrive at the
 
 110 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 little village of Kyouksay on this tide, and get 
 up to Bassein on the next with half a tide to 
 spare, unless there was wind, in which case they 
 would hoist the sail and arrive at the end of the 
 journey on the first tide. He had made the trip 
 three or four times each season for so many years 
 that he knew exactly what to expect. 
 
 Every one was glad when, after rowing a very 
 little way, Moung Byoo cried from the steering 
 chair to raise the mast. You could see the dark 
 ripple far away, and when the breeze came it 
 filled the sail hanging ready from its slender yard 
 of spliced bamboo and left the oars to spurt tiny- 
 fountains as they trailed alongside. It was not 
 worth going to the trouble of lifting the oars and 
 tying the blades to the bamboo rail ; the wind 
 might drop and then the work would be wasted. 
 Moung Byoo's boat sailed fast and gradually drew 
 ahead of the rest which, also under sail, were 
 stringing out as far as you could see. Nobody 
 was afraid of dacoits now the broad river was 
 reached ; it was different in the creeks where 
 dacoits could hide on the banks and shoot you in 
 the middle of the stream. 
 
 Mah Pan climbed up to sit by her father again. 
 She had been to Bassein before, certainly, but 
 that was some years ago and she remembered only 
 enough of the sights to make her eager to see 
 them again. There were the ships ; great ships 
 with three masts and more ropes than any man
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 111 
 
 could count ; three passed them to-day pulled by 
 little fire-ships which fussed along groaning and 
 throbbing as though angry with the lazy vessels 
 behind them. And the way the men on board 
 crowded to the side to stare ! You would have 
 thought a paddy boat was as strange a sight as 
 their own great vessel. Then a large fire-ship 
 passed up ; it rather frightened Mah Pan, it 
 came so close, and there was such terrible thunder 
 in its inside ; moreover it kicked up the water 
 behind in a most violent way. While the fire- 
 ship was passing a very surprising thing hap- 
 pened : a gentleman with hair all over his face 
 leaned over and putting bottles to his eyes, cried : 
 "Ho,Moung Byoo ! Where do you go?" in Burmese. 
 
 " He knows your name ! " exclaimed Mah Pan ; 
 and the rowers echoed, " The gentleman knows his 
 name ! " 
 
 Moung Byoo shouted back : "To Bassein," and 
 laughed ; but it was easy to see that he was a 
 little proud of the white man's calling him by 
 name. " I know the gentleman," he explained to 
 Mah Pan, "he is not a real shipman ; he lives at 
 Bassein and earns much money by steering ships 
 up and down the river. I forget his name, but 
 he is a very kind gentleman. Once when the 
 wind was strong against us, he told me to tie my 
 boat, this very boat, behind the fire-ship which 
 was about to leave the godown, and towed us 
 right down to Mougyook. Then he pretended
 
 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 that we must follow out to the sea, many tides 
 distant, but when we laughed he bade the ship- 
 men loose the rope." 
 
 " Do all Englishmen say, ' Ho, neighbour ! ' like 
 him ? " asked Mah Pan. 
 
 " Not all," replied Moung Byoo, hand on tiller, 
 eye on sail. " When a white young stranger 
 cannot speak it is not good ; when they learn to 
 speak well it is best ; they are then very polite 
 and love to joke." 
 
 " Yes, usually they are kind," he answered to 
 her next question, " but if they are made angry 
 they become dangerous. Once I saw Thaw' thekin 
 in a rage ; it was when he caught Bah Loogalay 
 cheating. Mother, how fierce he was ! He beat 
 Bah Loogalay till he howled." 
 
 Mah Pan took a note of the incident. Pho 
 Lone was nothing to her but she did not wish him 
 to be beaten. 
 
 The wind freshened as the sun rose higher, and 
 now the boat rushed through the wavelets, up- 
 right and steady, while the double bamboo mast 
 bent groaning to the rounded sail. The trailing 
 oars were raised and looped to the rail, and the 
 men, delighted that they need row no more, sat 
 about the deck smoking and chewing betel. Pho 
 Lone looked up at the steering chair now and 
 again, sighing. He was the only person who was 
 sorry there was wind ; he would gladly have 
 rowed all day for the sake of another evening like
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 113 
 
 the last. He hated Mah Hehn because she was 
 rejoicing- over the rice she had saved. 
 
 Round the last gentle curve in the river, and 
 the mills with smoking chimneys, the ships wait- 
 ing for rice, and the pagoda which overlooks the 
 town, all came in sight together. " In another 
 betel chew we are there," remarked Moung Byoo 
 contentedly, "it is the quickest journey I re- 
 member." 
 
 They ran past two or three godowns, before he 
 said, pointing with his cheroot, " Thaw' thekin's," 
 and gave the word to let down the mast. The 
 tide was just on the turn now, so the men waited 
 till the boat was abreast of the godown and half 
 a stone's throw from the bank, before they let fall 
 mast and sail together. The sail flapped and 
 bubbled, and it was while they were trying to 
 keep it from blowing over the side, that the 
 accident happened to Hpo Chit. 
 
 Nobody saw exactly how it came about, but 
 there was a cry, a bump, and a splash, and Hpo 
 Chit's feet were seen disappearing into the water. 
 He came up once, a bamboo's length astern, but 
 went down again. Then every one, saying " He 
 is hurt ; he will drown," squatted to watch. 
 
 " I think he struck his head falling," said Moung 
 Byoo, leaning from the steering chair to look round 
 the high stern-piece ; "he will certainly drown. 
 His mother will be very sorry." 
 
 The black kullahs on the bank shouted and ran 
 
 H
 
 114 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 to the water's edge when they saw the accident, 
 and their voices brought from the godown a white 
 man in white clothes with a little ship-dog at his 
 heels. He smoked a cheroot, and strolled out 
 with his hands behind him ; but when he heard 
 what the coolies were saying he dropped his 
 cheroot and ran out upon the jetty where 
 the ships lay to load, shouting to Moung Byoo's 
 men. 
 
 " Back ! back your boat quickly ; very quickly 
 back her ! " 
 
 "That is Thaw' thekin," said Moung Byoo, 
 shikoing. 
 
 " What does he say ? " asked Mah Hehn. 
 
 " He says to row back. What is the use ? Hpo 
 Chit will certainly drown." 
 
 Mr. Thorpe seemed very angry about something. 
 He stamped with his foot and roared, " Back her, 
 you fools ! Back three strokes hard, and you save 
 him ! Back ! will you ? " 
 
 " Row back a little," said Moung Byoo, slowly ; 
 11 it is Thaw' thekin's order." 
 
 The men got up and freed two oars, but both 
 on the same side ; all laughed at this mistake, and 
 Pho Lone, ever anxious to please, went to make 
 ready one on the other thwart. 
 
 " One oar, your honour ? " he asked, crouching 
 respectfully, " or more ? " 
 
 Mr. Thorpe did not answer ; he spun round on 
 his heel, ran back, and sprang from the jetty on
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 115 
 
 to the stone-strewn bank, and in three steps was 
 in the river, his dog behind him. 
 
 " Why does he swim ? " inquired Mah Pan. 
 
 " I expect he swims to catch Hpo Chit," 
 answered Moung Byoo, sucking at his cheroot 
 which had nearly gone out. 
 
 Seeing what the gentleman did, the rowers let 
 go their oars and squatted again to look on. 
 
 " Where is he ? " shouted Mr. Thorpe, swimming 
 hard, hand over hand down stream. 
 
 " I cannot see him now, your honour," replied 
 Moung Byoo ; "I think he has sunk." 
 
 Mr. Thorpe stopped swimming and trod water 
 for several minutes to look about, letting the tide 
 carry him down ; then he turned, swam slowly 
 ashore, and dripped up the bank. 
 
 " He does look very funny," said Zah Nee ; 
 " and hear the water in his boots ! How the little 
 ship-dog shakes himself ! " 
 
 The men laughed much at the way Mr. Thorpe's 
 skin showed through his wet clothes ; but they 
 laughed quietly, for they had dropped down to 
 within the gentleman's hearing, and they did not 
 wish to appear rude. 
 
 " Hpo Chit's father and mother will be very 
 sorry when they hear he is drowned. It is very 
 unfortunate indeed. Pull away there ! We must 
 go alongside the godown. I am very sorry about 
 Hpo Chit."
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 MOUNG BYOO'S boat was not kept waiting to 
 unload. In fact, the ropes had scarcely been 
 made fast before long planks were quivering 
 between bank and thwart, hatch coverings were 
 off, and coolies were trotting up and down, carry- 
 ing on their heads the baskets filled for them by 
 the rowers. Beside the steadily growing heap in 
 the godown Moung Byoo sat surrounded by most 
 of his men ; he had come from making his shiko 
 to Mr. Thorpe at his office, and all wished to hear 
 about the interview. 
 
 " He said to me, ' Why did you not back your 
 boat quickly when the boy fell in the water ? ' 
 and I replied, ' Your honour, I did not think of 
 doing it.' Then he said, looking sad and cross, 
 ' Did you not love this boy, that you all sat still 
 and watched him drown ? ' To that I answered, 
 ' I loved the good boy much ; we all loved him, 
 and his drowning is a great sorrow to us.' " 
 
 " Yes, yes, that was true," murmured the men, 
 " we are all very sorry that Hpo Chit is drowned, 
 very sorry indeed."
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 117 
 
 Moung Byoo went on, raising his voice in 
 imitation of Mr. Thorpe's. " He said, ' I cannot 
 understand you people ! ' and laid his face on 
 his hand. I think Thaw' thekin is much 
 grieved. He has sent his little fire-boat to look 
 for the body of Hpo Chit." 
 
 "That is very good, very good," said every- 
 body." 
 
 "Yes," sighed Moung Byoo; "but I am much 
 afraid they will not find him ; for the river is 
 deep, and there are many crocodiles and great 
 fish." 
 
 The men smoked in silence for a few breaths, 
 and then, Zah Nee, clearing his throat, and 
 moving aside from the dust of the paddy, began 
 to speak. 
 
 " I remember when I went to the pagoda at 
 Rangoon, at the Taboung festival, many years 
 ago, the white police chief was very angry about 
 an accident. He called me and other men fools 
 and animals, using very hard words ; he was an 
 old chief; but he could not speak except through 
 the mouth of a clerk." 
 
 " Tell about it," said Moung Byoo. 
 
 " It happened thus/' said Zah Nee, " a very 
 high ladder of bamboos had been laid against the 
 pagoda, and two men climbed up to do work at the 
 top. While they worked, many of us sat watch- 
 ing ; presently the bottom of the ladder slipped a 
 little on the pavement and stopped ; but the
 
 118 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 shaking made it slip again ; then it slid slowly 
 past our very feet, and slipping more and more 
 quickly, the two men came falling down a great 
 way, their heads struck the pavement and burst, 
 so that they died." 
 
 " But why did the police officer say hard words 
 to you ? " asked several. 
 
 "The policemen who carried the killed men 
 away said, 'You must come and give evidence 
 how their fall happened ; ' so we went. The 
 police chief said to us, ' You sat still while the 
 ladder slipped past your feet, and not one of you 
 put out a hand to stop it ? ' And when we said, 
 ' Yes/ he grew very angry. He said loudly, 
 ' You are fools and sons of fools ; by putting 
 forward a foot you could have saved the lives of 
 these poor men.' It was true ; but we answered 
 that we did not think of doing that. At this the 
 police chief said, ' I wish that I could send to 
 prison all who sat and watched the accident.' " 
 
 " That was very unjust," said Moung Byoo 
 warmly. " Go ! " he added, rising, " the measur- 
 ing kullahs and tallyman wait." 
 
 The group broke up ; some of the men stayed 
 to help with the measuring, others went to sit 
 outside and wait their turn to fill baskets 
 in the boat. Mah Pan wandered away with 
 Pho Lone to see the marvels of the mill. Jungle 
 people who have never been in a rice mill 
 have no idea how wonderful a place it is, with
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 119 
 
 its great wheels and bands making the earth 
 shake. 
 
 The measuring was over ; Moung Byoo had 
 compared his tally with that of the kullah, and 
 all he had to do now was to get the godown 
 clerk's note, on which he would be paid at the 
 office. Moung Dway did not happen to be near 
 at the moment, so he sat down to wait and listen 
 to Mah Pan, who had much to say about the 
 mill ; the English engineer had been very kind 
 and let them go everywhere, up to the top. 
 Pho Lone squatted near, staring at her ; she was 
 covered with dust from head to foot, but he 
 thought he had never seen her look so pretty. 
 
 While she talked, Mr. Thorpe came through 
 the godown and stopped for a moment. 
 
 " My daughter, your honour," said Moung 
 Byoo ; " she has been in the mill." 
 
 " Oh ! your daughter, Moung Byoo. And what 
 is your name, pretty one ? Miss Sweet Flower is 
 it ? And a very good name for you." Mah Pan, 
 the colour darkening her face, laughed shyly, and 
 answered, " Yes, your honour," too confused to 
 know what she was saying. At this Mr. Thorpe 
 laughed, Moung Byoo and Mah Hehn joining in ; 
 but the smile Pho Lone called up was rather 
 sickly ; he felt suddenly jealous of the gentleman. 
 
 " So you think this a wonderful place. Very 
 wonderful? Well, then, should you like to see 
 my house ? "
 
 120 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Mah Pan's eyes lightened, and she looked to 
 her mother to answer. 
 
 "Your honour is kind," said Mah Hehn 
 promptly, " she would like to see your house." 
 
 Mr. Thorpe said it was good, and went away ; 
 he had no time for talking in the busy season. 
 
 " When shall we go ? " asked Mah Pan. 
 
 " It was only his politeness ; he did not mean 
 anything," said Moung Byoo. 
 
 Mah Pan's face fell, and she looked at her 
 mother. Mah Hehn said nothing, but it was 
 plain that she did not think Mr. Thorpe's words 
 mere politeness whatever her husband's opinion 
 was. 
 
 The evening in the godown was even busier 
 than the day. The whole of the mat floor was 
 covered with heaps of grain, and a fog of grey 
 dust filled the place when Moung Let's boat 
 arrived, a little before the sky shut. He ex- 
 plained that the fire-boat, having gone a long 
 way in search of Hpo Chit's body, overtook them 
 on its way back, and hearing whither they were 
 going, passed a line and towed them up. 
 
 " It is good luck," said Pho Lone. " We shall 
 measure by the lightning lamps, and in the dark 
 these black dogs will not see what I do." 
 
 Till that moment Mah Pan had forgotten her 
 father's words about Bah Loogalay's punishment. 
 Now she told Pho Lone he had better not cheat, 
 lest he also got a beating.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 121 
 
 " Nobody will see," said Pho Lone ; " I shall be 
 very careful." 
 
 Mr. Thorpe had two ships waiting for cargo, 
 Moung Dway said ; and upon this account they 
 were in haste to measure up paddy, so Moung 
 Let's had better be landed this evening. Moung 
 Let was quite willing, and when his boat had 
 been unloaded he called upon Moung Maw and 
 Pho Lone to gird up their pasohs and do the 
 measuring. Now, Abdool Latif, the Chittagong 
 man, who kept tally for the godown was old, and 
 though he had slept all day in order to work at 
 night, seemed only just awake. The nearest 
 electric light shone down feebly through clouds 
 of dust, and unless Abdool Latif had looked very 
 closely he could not see whether the measuring 
 was done properly. Moung Let, also sleepy, and 
 confused by the roar of the mill and other noises, 
 sat on the floor, keeping count on slips of bamboo, 
 and giving all his mind to it ; and Moung Maw did 
 not care whether Pho Lone did the work fairly or 
 not, it was no affair of his. Over a hundred 
 baskets had been short measured before Moung 
 Dway came by. Pho Lone, not seeing him, scooped 
 out a lot of paddy in levelling the basket. 
 
 "He" ! " called Moung Dway. " You young man, 
 I see you cheat." 
 
 " No," said Pho Lone ; and Abdool Latif, not 
 wishing to have his pay docked for carelessness, 
 said there had been no cheating. As the tallyman
 
 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 denied it, Moung Dway only said, if he saw more 
 cheating he should report and have the paddy 
 measured over again. He waited to see a few 
 baskets passed and went his way. As soon as he 
 had gone Pho Lone began to cut as before. 
 
 " They will catch you," whispered Moung Maw, 
 " then you will be sore." 
 
 " Nobody is here to see," said Pho Lone ; "I 
 shall not be caught." 
 
 Even while he spoke, Moung Dway, having 
 passed round a mountain of grain behind them, 
 was watching close by, but Pho Lone did not see 
 him and went on cutting till the tallyman saw it. 
 
 " That is very bad," he said in his broken 
 Burmese ; " the other man must use the stick." 
 
 Moung Maw had just taken it from Pho Lone's 
 hand when Mr. Thorpe walked up with Moung 
 Dway behind him. 
 
 " Who was cutting ? " he asked sharply. 
 
 " That man, sir," said Moung Dway ; " two 
 times I saw it." 
 
 He pointed to Pho Lone, but Mr. Thorpe, 
 seeing the measuring stick in Moung Maw's hand, 
 stepped forward and gave him a slap that made 
 his ear sing. 
 
 " Not that one, sir ! " cried Moung Dway. But 
 Moung Maw, stung to fury, raised the heavy pin 
 to strike back. Mr. Thorpe caught him by the 
 throat and flung him backwards on the paddy. 
 
 " I did not do it," roared Moung Maw, all the
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 
 
 fight knocked out of him by the fall. " I had just 
 received the stick." 
 
 Moung Dway repeated that Pho Lone was the 
 man, and Mr. Thorpe, saying to Moung Maw, " I 
 will speak to you in a minute then," caught Pho 
 Lone by the wrist. 
 
 " Will you go to prison or be whipped ? " he 
 asked. 
 
 Pho Lone only begged for pardon ; so Moung 
 Let, frightened at the mention of prison, said, 
 " Your honour, pray give him a little beating." 
 
 The cane fell on his bare skin and Pho Lone 
 howled ; howled so loudly that every one near 
 came running to look on. " Eight, nine, ten ! " 
 concluded Mr. Thorpe ; " now, young man, next 
 time you will go to prison without choice." 
 
 " Where is the other man ? " he asked when 
 Pho Lone had fled, pressing both hands behind 
 him. 
 
 " He has gone away, your honour," said Moung 
 Let, who felt rather anxious lest his own turn 
 should come. " I am very sorry, your honour ; 
 being an old man, my eyes do not see well in this 
 dark light." 
 
 " Why, I know you, don't I ? " said Mr. Thorpe, 
 turning on him. " Are you not an advance- 
 man ? " 
 
 " Lord, for many years I have received from 
 your hand three hundred rupees each season to 
 buy paddy."
 
 124 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " You must be more careful in future about the 
 men you employ," said Mr. Thorpe. 
 
 " It was my own son that your honour whipped 
 with the cane," said Moung Let sadly ; for many 
 people had seen it, and he was disgraced. Bassein 
 is an old-fashioned place. 
 
 " Well, he won't cheat again, I think," said 
 Mr. Thorpe. " Perhaps the whipping will make 
 him honest like his father. I should not have 
 struck the other fellow had I known he did not 
 cut with his own hand, but he must have been in 
 league with your son." 
 
 " If your honour had not knocked him down he 
 would have killed you," said Moung Let ; and he 
 spoke the truth. 
 
 It was late that night when Moung Let went 
 to his boat to sleep. Pho Lone was there, 
 ashamed to go near Mah Pan after what had 
 happened. Moung Maw had not come to the 
 boat. Shway Toon, who had helped to row, said 
 that the carpenter had run by shouting that he 
 should not return. 
 
 " I think he will go to the jungles," said Shway 
 Toon. " He is proud and very angry, having been 
 wrongfully beaten." 
 
 Moung Let said nothing ; he thought it well 
 that Moung Maw should have gone, otherwise 
 Pho Lone would probably have received from him 
 a worse beating than Mr. Thorpe's. However, 
 the business was over now, and it was useless to
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 125 
 
 be unhappy about it. After all, he himself had 
 escaped easily, for no word had been said about 
 calling in his advance money as he had feared. 
 Pho Lone had behaved very badly, but he had 
 had a severe punishment. Moung Let was turn- 
 ing over in his mind whether he should give him 
 a scolding to make him more honest or two rupees 
 to console him when he fell asleep. 
 
 When Moung Maw ran out of the godown he 
 had no idea where he was going or what he meant 
 to do. He was mad with rage, and had he come 
 upon Mr. Thorpe or Pho Lone in the dark it 
 would have gone hardly with either. He came out 
 of the mill yard upon the road behind, and the 
 lights of the town catching his eye he went in 
 that direction. The night was very hot, and 
 people sat outside their houses talking. Nobody 
 spoke to him, for men are less friendly in the 
 town than they are in the jungles, and Moung* 
 Maw reached the dimly lighted bazaar before he 
 recovered himself sufficiently to think what he 
 should do to pass the time. Having walked fast 
 he was thirsty, and it suddenly came to him 
 that it would be good to go to the liquor shop 
 kept by Ah Chain, the Chinaman ; he had no- 
 money, but Ah Chain knew him and would give 
 credit. The shop was a wooden house with a 
 big, white sign-board over it ; all the front was 
 open to the street, and many lamps made the 
 bottles on the shelves at the back twinkle like
 
 126 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 rows of stars. A number of white men, whom 
 Moung Maw knew at once to belong to ships, 
 were in the shop drinking and making a noise ; 
 but he walked in, and waited for Ah Chain or 
 his man to see him. The sailors saw him first, 
 however. Having been ashore only a few hours 
 after many weeks at sea they were very happy, 
 and three or four at once began to make signs to 
 him to drink at their expense. They were so 
 hearty and good-tempered that Moung Maw 
 nodded and joined them. He could not under- 
 stand a word they said, but when Ah Chain told 
 him they wished to know what he would drink 
 and he said "berraridy," they roared with laughter 
 and slapped him on the back. 
 
 " They say you are a good man," laughed Ah 
 Chain ; and when Moung Maw saw they slapped 
 each other on the back he laughed also, and 
 thought the ship-men very good fellows. He had 
 one glass of liquor and then another, and after 
 that a third. The ship-men caught the word 
 th-ouk from Ah Chain's mouth, and were so 
 pleased with themselves that they made Moung 
 Maw understand that he must thouk with each 
 one of them in turn. Now, three glasses of 
 brandy, particularly bazaar brandy distilled only 
 Chinamen know how, are more than enough for 
 
 o 
 
 a sober jungle man, and there were eight of the 
 sailors. Moung Maw felt the liquor in his brains, 
 and told Ah Chain to say that he could not
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 127 
 
 thouk any more. The bar-keeper told the sailors 
 what he said, and they cried like one that that 
 was mean ; he must thouk with each of his new 
 friends in turn or they should be offended. Ah 
 Chain repeated their words, and said if Moung 
 Maw were wise he would humour them, for the 
 sailors had had much liquor and their temper 
 would very easily turn. So Moung Maw, against 
 his will, drank two more glasses. 
 
 Whether he reached the eighth glass or a 
 twentieth he never knew. He had some recollec- 
 tion of falling against a sailor and feeling a dash of 
 something wet on his back, then there was crashing 
 of glass, fighting in the road, and a great shouting. 
 After that he knew nothing, except that he 
 would not go into a house because he did not 
 want to drink any more and was carried in by 
 the arms and legs. After that, blank darkness. 
 
 When he awoke in the morning he knew what 
 had happened ; the police had taken him up with 
 the only sailor drunk enough to be safely caught, 
 and they two were to be sent before the magis- 
 trate. The sailor groaned a great deal, but 
 Moung Maw, though his head beat terribly, and 
 he felt sick, sat quietly looking out through 
 the bars of the thannah cage. After the police- 
 men had given him rice and a drink of water 
 he got better, and asked what would happen to 
 him. 
 
 " I expect only five rupees fine, or one week,"
 
 128 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 answered a good-natured constable. "You did 
 not beat the police." 
 
 Having no money with him, Moung Maw was 
 alarmed at this ; but he had little time to think 
 about it, for he and his companion were soon 
 called out and marched off. He was very much 
 ashamed when the police made him follow the 
 sailor on to a railed platform, where all the 
 people in the court could stare at him. He 
 crouched on his heels with his hands pressed 
 together before him, and wondered at the cool- 
 ness of the sailor, who leaned on the rail swing- 
 ing his hat. 
 
 The magistrate, a young man in white clothes, 
 came in from behind a curtain, and sat at a great 
 table under the punkah. He spoke one word, 
 and a policeman stood forward, and told a long 
 story. 
 
 The sailor was dealt with first ; the magistrate 
 talked to him in English, so Moung Maw knew 
 nothing of what was said. But presently he was 
 told to stand up, and the magistrate spoke in 
 Burmese. 
 
 "The policeman says you were drunk. Is that 
 true?" 
 
 " Lord, I was very drunk indeed," said Moung 
 Maw. 
 
 " And fighting in the street also ? " 
 
 " Lord, I cannot tell ; I was too drunk to 
 know."
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 129 
 
 How came he to be drinking and fighting with 
 English sailors ? 
 
 Well, having done much work in Mr. Thorpe's 
 godown, he was thirsty, and went in to drink 
 a very little liquor ; yes, was a son of the jungle, 
 and seldom drank anything ; did not wish to 
 drink much ; the sailors made him drink ; was 
 afraid to refuse. Thus he got drunk ; felt very 
 ill this morning, and thought he should die ; yes, 
 he was a fool a very big fool. Had never been 
 in court before. 
 
 The magistrate then spoke again with the 
 sailor, and Moung Maw knew their talk was of 
 himself. 
 
 " This Englishman says your story is true," said 
 the magistrate, at last. " Therefore you may go. 
 Do not be foolish and drink with white men again." 
 
 The police hurried him out of court before he 
 quite understood that he was to be neither fined 
 nor sent to gaol, and he squatted outside on the 
 verandah to wind on his head-kerchief, feeling 
 very happy. While he did this, the sailor came 
 out with a black stranger, who seemed to have 
 been waiting for him. 
 
 " The ship-man says you and he got off easily," 
 said the black stranger. " He says, will you 
 come and drink a little on that account." 
 
 Moung Maw stared at the sailor ; he imitated 
 the action of drinking ; there was no doubt what 
 he meant.
 
 130 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " Mad ! " thought Moung Maw ; and he hurried 
 away as fast as he could towards the river, for 
 he did not feel safe in the town with mad ship- 
 men about, and also thought a swim would do 
 him good. 
 
 The trouble in the godown had sunk out of 
 sight behind his later adventures, and while he 
 bathed his only fear was lest the Myothit boats 
 should have gone while he was away. In spite 
 of this fear he spent some time in the river ; for 
 though the sun was very hot, the wind blew 
 softly, so it was very pleasant splashing in the 
 shallows. He wondered whether Mr. Thorpe 
 would attack him again when he went back 
 through the godown. The gentleman had beaten 
 Pho Lone severely, but he deserved it ; and 
 Moung Maw, wallowing up to his chest, thought 
 of the young man's howls, and chuckled. He 
 was not ill-natured, but it was all Pho Lone's 
 doing that he himself had got into trouble. 
 
 While Moung Maw was bathing, Mah Hehn 
 and Mah Pan were enjoying the greatest treat 
 that had ever come in their lives. Mr. Thorpe's 
 invitation had not been empty politeness ; for 
 early next morning, when he saw them in the 
 godown, he came up and said they were to eat 
 rice with him presently ; meantime they must 
 come to his house and see it. Fortunately, Mah 
 Hehn, intending to go up to the bazaar, had 
 brought silk tameins, clean linen jackets, and gay
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 131 
 
 neck- kerchiefs for them both in her rush- work 
 box, so they were able to dress properly. 
 
 "It is very good," said Moung Byoo, as they 
 came out of the little cabin ; "it is well to wear 
 good clothes to go to his honour's house. Take 
 a little present in your hands three bundles of 
 cheroots ; his honour will be pleased, they being 
 rolled by Mah Pan." 
 
 Mah Hehn said it was a wise thought, so they 
 chose three bundles of the best, tied them with 
 paper bands, and Mah Pan carried them on her 
 head in the big lacquer tray. Mr. Thorpe was in 
 his office under the house when they arrived, so of 
 course they could not go upstairs ; to do so would 
 have been to heap ignominy upon him by standing 
 over his head ; moreover it would spoil his charms 
 if he happened to have any about him ; therefore, 
 they sat in the office verandah and waited. 
 
 " Now, follow," said Mr. Thorpe coming out 
 and leading the way upstairs. " First you will 
 drink lemonade with ice in it." Mah Pan knew 
 what " lem'nay " was, but had never heard of ice. 
 It was certainly very agreeable to drink the 
 sweet stuff from a long tumbler with a lump of 
 solid water tinkling in it. As she frankly admitted 
 it burned the inside, and the tumbler grew so hot 
 she had to pass it from one hand to the other, and 
 was finally obliged to put it on the floor. How- 
 ever she finished it to the last drop and tried 
 her best not to shriek when at the gentleman's
 
 132 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 suggestion she took the remaining ice in her 
 mouth. 
 
 The lemonade finished, Mah Hehn, failing to 
 persuade Mah Pan to do it, offered the cheroots. 
 
 " They are very well rolled," said Mr. Thorpe, 
 lighting one. " I think the Sweet Flower rolled 
 them." 
 
 " She rolled them with her own hands," assented 
 Mah Hehn proudly, " she rolls better than any 
 girl in the village." 
 
 " Will you make some for me ? " asked Mr. 
 Thorpe. 
 
 Mah Pan blushed and promised to send five 
 hundred next time her father came. 
 
 " The price is one rupee eight annas a hundred," 
 said Mah Hehn. 
 
 It did not seem fair to overcharge the gentle- 
 man thus. One rupee was the proper price ; but 
 her mother's eye forbade Mah Pan to speak. 
 Mr. Thorpe, however, said lightly that it was a 
 little price for cheroots rolled by the Sweet Flower, 
 and that he would buy a thousand if she would 
 send so many. 
 
 Never had Mah Pan, or her mother for that 
 matter, seen so beautiful a house. The walls 
 were smooth boards painted light green and hung 
 with English pictures of horses and dogs, hardly 
 any of which had the glass broken. Instead of 
 dark and dirty rafters white canvas was stretched 
 overhead ; there was only one hole of any size in
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 133 
 
 the whole ceiling ; that was in the corner where a 
 great brown stain appeared, and Mr. Thorpe 
 explained that owls had had their nest there till 
 he cut the canvas with a knife tied to a bamboo 
 and let a basketful of rubbish with two young 
 birds among it fall into the dining-room. Mah 
 Pan was not interested in owls at any time, and 
 now the furniture and the glass on the sideboard 
 took up all her attention. The chairs were 
 delightful, particularly those with long arms in 
 which one could lie down ; and she lay in them 
 by turn, her admiration increasing with each. 
 The coloured wine-glasses were finer than anything 
 she had ever seen, but she was afraid to touch 
 them they looked so fragile. In the whole house, 
 however, the thing she liked most was a great 
 mirror in the vacant bed-room ; for the first time 
 in her life she saw Mah Pan, and she studied her 
 for quite a betel-chew ; she thought one would 
 never feel alone if one had a glass like that. The 
 matting on the floor was the only thing in the 
 house she did not admire ; it had many great holes 
 in it and her bare feet tripped very often. " I 
 should take it up if it were in my house," she said, 
 forgetting that Mr. Thorpe spoke almost as well 
 as a Burman. 
 
 " It is very old and bad," he said laughing, 
 " When you come and see me again I will have 
 new matting down." 
 
 " For me ? "
 
 134 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " For the Sweet Flower." 
 
 " We have no matting on the floor in our own 
 house," said Mah Pan. " Nor such a mirror as 
 your honour has ; " and she sighed. 
 
 " I wish that mirror would keep your picture," 
 smiled Mr. Thorpe. 
 
 " You do not want my picture," said Mah Pan 
 pertly. 
 
 Breakfast was her dream for weeks afterwards. 
 It was strange to sit on a chair and eat at a table 
 covered with a cloth very nearly white ; it was 
 not so good as sitting on the floor, but finding she 
 could raise her feet on the chair without being 
 seen she made herself comfortable and hoped it 
 was not improper. As she told her father that 
 evening you could not tell how rich Mr. Thorpe 
 was till you ate with him. He, her mother and 
 herself had separate plates, while the fish, chicken, 
 curry, and the sweet mess called mother would 
 remember its name yes, poo-ding, were handed 
 round each on its own dish by two kullahs who, 
 further, gave a new plate for each kind of food. 
 
 " I should like to live in a house like this," she 
 remarked, as they sat smoking in the darkened 
 verandah after breakfast. 
 
 " Should you ? " said Mr. Thorpe, thoughtfully. 
 
 "Your honour has much business," said Mah 
 Hehn, after a short silence, " and we must go to 
 the bazaar. Is there leave to go " 
 
 " There is leave," said Mr. Thorpe rising. " Look,
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 135 
 
 Sweet Flower ; bring the cheroots yourself if your 
 mother allows it." 
 
 " She shall bring them in her own hand," said 
 Mah Hehn ; and they came downstairs, Mah Pan 
 carrying a large paper bag of sugar which Mr. 
 Thorpe had ordered his servant to bring her. 
 
 " It is a very beautiful house," said Mah Pan, 
 looking back. 
 
 " Thaw' thekin is a very kind gentleman," said 
 her mother. 
 
 " His voice is kind ; and I should love to live 
 in a house like that." 
 
 Passing through the godown, they met Moung 
 Maw ; his red swelled eyes showed he had been 
 drinking last night, and he must have known that 
 his face betrayed it, he looked so uneasy. 
 
 "We come from Thaw' thekin's house," said 
 Mah Pan through a mouthful of sugar. " We 
 have eaten rice there." 
 
 Moung Maw only nodded ; he felt very sick 
 still and was on his way to the boat to sleep. 
 
 " English gentlemen do not get drunk," said 
 Mah Hehn, as the carpenter moved away. 
 
 "It is very disgraceful to be beaten for cheat- 
 ing," said Mah Pan, half to herself.
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 " You should have waited, my son," said Mah 
 Tsay when she heard about it. "It is good that 
 parents talk first of these matters." Pho Lone 
 had no reply to make to this. 
 
 "Also you chose a bad time to speak," con- 
 tinued Mah Tsay. " Many of the neighbours had 
 seen you beaten, and a girl does not love a young 
 man when he is shamed." 
 
 It was all Moung Byoo's fault : he in his good 
 nature had sought out Pho Lone before starting 
 on the homeward trip, and asked him to come 
 back with them ; Mah Pan, he said, was very 
 sorry and angry that he had been beaten, and 
 Mah Hehn would give him for his back some of 
 the English medicine she had bought in the 
 bazaar. Hence, when the boats crept away from 
 the godown in the moonlight, Pho Lone pulled his 
 oar on Moung Byoo's boat, instead of rowing in 
 his father's as he intended. 
 
 The women were very good to him. Mah Hehn 
 gave him medicine at her husband's order ; a 
 very little, but as she said, it was expensive.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 137 
 
 Mah Pan sympathised with him, saying it was 
 bad luck to be caught cheating and he would 
 remember she advised him not to ; but she 
 was sorry. She was so sorry as they sat 
 together next night, the boat being anchored 
 for the tide at Tawchoung, that Pho Lone had 
 mistaken her mind, and asked her to marry 
 him. 
 
 " I think Mah Hehn and Mah Pan are very 
 proud, having eaten in Thaw' thekin's house," said 
 Pho Lone, "they boast that the gentleman, sitting 
 at the table, ate with them." 
 
 " It makes a woman proud to be thus treated," 
 said Mah Tsay, nursing her knees as she rocked 
 idly to and fro, "a male dog stealing the offerings 
 is higher than a woman saying prayers at the 
 pagoda. No wonder a girl likes to marry an 
 Englishman." 
 
 " I shall still keep very near her," said Pho 
 Lone, his thoughts flying away with his tongue, 
 " perhaps she will change her mind." 
 
 " Perhaps," said his mother ; but her voice was 
 doubtful. 
 
 It was past noon ; not a leaf stirred ; you could 
 scarcely step on the verandah where the sun 
 struck ; it pained the eyes to look down the street, 
 and even sitting quite still in the house water 
 started all over the skin. There was no work just 
 now, nor would there be until the time came to load 
 the boats for the next trip to Bassein, so every
 
 138 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 one was glad to lie in his house and sleep away 
 the hot silence of the days. 
 
 Though there was no work, much business had 
 to be done in the cool mornings of those days on 
 which the Books say it is lucky to buy and sell. 
 The boats returned from Bassein empty and light 
 on Tuesday afternoon's tide, and as Wednesday, 
 like Thursday and Friday, is a good day for 
 trading, all the men in the village, whether boat 
 owner or cultivator, met at sunrise under the 
 bamboo clump near the pagoda to do business. 
 Nobody knew whether the price of paddy would 
 rise above the Rs 85 paid by the merchants for 
 the first arrivals, or fall below it ; so as every man 
 and his wife had their own opinion about this, 
 trade was very brisk indeed. 
 
 " Take a hundred and fifty baskets," said Ko 
 Moung Galay to Moung Byoo. " I will give a 
 hundred and fifty." 
 
 "No," said Mah Hehn. And Moung Byoo 
 said, " No." 
 
 "It is a good price for five days' hire of the 
 boat," said Ko Moung Galay. 
 
 Moung Byoo had nothing to say against the 
 offer, as an offer. But he repeated that, like the 
 head-man, he believed the price of paddy must go 
 up, and therefore he wished to buy outright from 
 neighbours who held the contrary opinion, and 
 take his chance of making money. He thought 
 prices must go up.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 139 
 
 " Go up ! " echoed Oo Yan in his cracked voice. 
 " Bet you " and he paused to glance round. 
 
 " Go on, neighbour, your wife is not by," said 
 Shway Toon. 
 
 "Bet you twenty baskets the price is under 
 eighty-five when you sell again," said Oo Yan 
 ignoring the laughter. 
 
 " No, no, it will certainly rise," cried Zah Nee, 
 " there is news from the Karen village that more 
 great fire-ships have passed up." 
 
 "Bet?" asked Moung Byoo, for Mah Hehn 
 was making faces at him. 
 
 " Yes : twenty-five rupees." 
 
 " Good ! if it falls, I save that much money." 
 
 " I have eight hundred baskets to sell cheap," 
 said Moung Ket Kay. "It is better to sell to a 
 neighbour than that dog's son, the chetty to 
 whom I owe so much money." 
 
 Mention of the Madrasi money-lender caused 
 business to stop for a moment : there was always 
 a little joke about him. 
 
 "Say the black animal's name, Ko Ket Kay," 
 cried Moung Maw, and the rest shouted, " Yes ! 
 Say his name." 
 
 " It takes too much time," replied Moung Ket 
 Kay, laughing slowly ; he was the only man on 
 the creek who could say the chetty's name, and 
 was proud of it. 
 
 " Well, then," he said, after a little more 
 pressing, " When you speak to the animal you
 
 140 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 must call him you must say ' Teeroopalaythoray 
 Annasawmy Soobramaneyam Chetty ;' for that is 
 his name." 
 
 " Good ! Oh very good, such a name ! " 
 laughed everybody. 
 
 " How did you learn it off like that ? " asked 
 Moung Maw, after a pause. 
 
 " From the hoondi !" * replied Moung Ket Kay 
 drily ; and the neighbours laughed more than ever. 
 
 " His interest is very big, like his name," said 
 Moung Ket Kay, relapsing into business ; " if he 
 seizes my paddy he will pay as little as he 
 pleases," and saying this, he got up and stepped 
 round to Moung Byoo's side. 
 
 "Now, friend, if I put the grain into the boat 
 will you pay fifty rupees a hundred baskets for 
 it?" 
 
 " Forty-five is a good price," said Mah Hehn. 
 
 If his wife had not been at his elbow, Moung 
 Byoo would have closed the bargain at fifty, for it 
 was cheap enough ; but he knew that if he did, he 
 should be scolded about it after, and hesitated. 
 
 " Fifty is a good price," urged Moung Ket Kay. 
 
 " Forty-five is better," put in Mah Hehn. 
 
 Moung Byoo looked first at his neighbour and 
 then at his wife. 
 
 " Toss you, fifty rupees or forty -five," he said, 
 and Mah Hehn scowled. 
 
 " Look friends ! we toss," cried Moung Ket Kay 
 
 * Hoondi = promissory note.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 141 
 
 gaily, as he drew out a rupee. " Fifty rupees, 
 neighbour Moung Byoo pays, or forty-five." 
 
 " Flower ! " he shouted, as the coin fell. " Ho, 
 ho ! good neighbour, you pay fifty ! " and he 
 jumped up to dance a little, while every one 
 laughed except Mah Hehn. She got up and 
 walked away without speaking ; but Moung Byoo 
 knew by her face that she would have something 
 to say by-and-by. 
 
 " Never mind," said Moung Ket Kay, " it is 
 a good bargain for you at fifty. Bet you the 
 price goes up." 
 
 " Twenty rupees it is under eighty-five when I 
 sell," said Moung Byoo. 
 
 " Baskets," suggested Moung Ket Kay ; but 
 Moung Byoo preferred rupees. 
 
 " It is a bet," agreed his friend. " Go ! It 
 grows hot." 
 
 " It is fully rice-time now," said two or three, 
 getting on their feet ; and business ceased for 
 the day. 
 
 " You are a fool," was Mah Hehn's greeting to 
 her husband, as he stepped into the house, " a 
 stupid-head and a fool. He must sell, and you 
 could have bought for forty-five. A baby would 
 make a better bargain than you." 
 
 " Moung Let would have paid fifty, I think," 
 said Moung Byoo easily ; " and I bet him twenty 
 rupees that the price will fall." 
 
 " A wise man would have bet forty," retorted
 
 142 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Mah Hehn. " Look where you put your feet, 
 you have killed many little insects." 
 
 Moung Byoo looked, and saw a thin stream of 
 ants pouring across the floor ; he had trodden on 
 it, killing many, as his wife said. 
 
 "It was an accident," he remarked ruefully. 
 
 "More expense," grumbled Mah Hehn; " you 
 must give alms to atone for breaking the law ; 
 one rupee worth of rice gone under your clumsy 
 foot." She went to take the pot off the fire 
 outside, calling, " He, dog ! " for a big pariah was 
 snuffing about it hungrily. 
 
 " One rupee worth of rice to the Lord Ruler 
 for breaking the law by killing," she scolded. 
 " Go, dog ! " and the pariah tucked in his tail and 
 fled, yelping from the boiling water she tilted 
 over his yellow back. " You will say that one 
 rupee worth is not enough, I daresay," she 
 went on, as she brought in the pot and set it 
 to steam. For Moung Byoo was a very devout 
 man. 
 
 " Being an accident, I think a little alms will 
 atone," he answered, idly watching the pariah 
 which, still shrieking with pain, had crawled 
 under the house over the way to curl up and 
 lick the hair off the great red scald. " Yes, 
 certainly, a very little will be enough." 
 
 Mah Hehn sat grumbling to herself, while 
 Moung Byoo ate his rice, and then called to 
 Mah Pan and Mah Noo to eat with her.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 143 
 
 "It is not such food as we ate ate at Thaw' 
 thekin's," she said, as they crouched over the 
 rice. 
 
 " That is true," murmured Mah Pan ; " I feel 
 the poo-ding now in my mouth." 
 
 Moung Byoo got up and strolled over to Moung 
 Maw's ; he had heard rather much about Mr. 
 Thorpe's style of living already, and the English 
 method of women eating with men had been 
 pressed somewhat frequently upon his attention. 
 It was not good that women-folk should visit 
 white men ; it made them too proud. 
 
 As he crossed the street he forgot these 
 matters, for people at the further end were 
 coming out of their houses and gathering round 
 somebody who sat on Moung Let's verandah, 
 drinking from the chatty. He had evidently just 
 arrived, and in haste, for women stood in their 
 houses calling to ask what the news was ; a man 
 does not come from a distant village in the heat 
 of the day for nothing ; and Moung Byoo went 
 down to learn what he came to tell. 
 
 The visitor was Shway Gyee of Ngatheing. 
 He had been running ever since the sun looked 
 over the jungle, to escape and to bring warning 
 to Myothit ; for Boh Tah's gang had attacked 
 Ngatheing, and by this time everybody there 
 was killed, the village burned, and all the 
 property in the place carried away. 
 
 " I cannot see smoke," said Ko Moung Galay,
 
 144 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 looking anxious. " Had the dacoits come when 
 you left ? " 
 
 They had not actually arrived ; a boy had run 
 home to say he saw them coming, and certainly 
 when the dacoits had burned Ngatheing they 
 would come on to Myothit ; if the people were 
 wise they would cross over the creek at once and 
 hide in the jungle. 
 
 " We have much money," said Ko Moung Galay. 
 " 1 think it is good to put the rupees and property 
 in a boat ready to take away when the dacoits 
 come." 
 
 Everybody was quite satisfied that Boh Tah 
 would come ; the only question was, when ? 
 
 " Not yet, I think," said Ko Moung Galay ; 
 " there will be plenty of time for us to go and 
 hide before the sky shuts. The dacoits have not 
 burned Ngatheing. Therefore I think they eat 
 rice there and sleep." 
 
 Every eye strained eastward seeking smoke ; 
 but the sky was clear, and Oo Yan said he thought 
 the head-man's words were good. 
 
 " There are guns in Ngatheing," said Ko Moung 
 Galay, wishing to calm his people. " Dacoits want 
 guns far more than rupees, and we, having none, 
 will perhaps not be attacked." 
 
 " Ko Bah Too, our head-man, was loading his 
 gun when I ran past his house ; he cried to me : 
 ' Stop, I shall shoot the dacoits when they come.' " 
 
 " You were wise to run then," said Moung Let,
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 145 
 
 " the dacoits will be very angry if he fires at them, 
 and will certainly kill every one." 
 
 Shway Gyee had always thought Ko Bah Too 
 a fool ; he was just the stupid man who believed 
 he could fight dacoits, charmed against all kinds 
 of death though they were. Fools like him were 
 not common, and the Ngatheing people were un- 
 lucky having one of them for head-man. 
 
 " Well then, friend," said Ko Moung Galay, 
 " you have run very far ; come to my house to eat 
 and sleep. We will go presently to the jungle." 
 
 " I think it will also be time to take our money 
 when we go ourselves to hide," remarked Moung 
 Let, as the head-man moved away followed by 
 Shway Gyee. " For my part I wish to sleep just 
 now." 
 
 " You speak well, neighbour," said several. And 
 like him they went back to their houses, glad to 
 get in from the street. It really was too hot to 
 think of carrying heavy bags of money and bundles 
 of clothes all the way to a boat. 
 
 The sun stared down upon the dusty brown 
 thatch ; the boats at their moorings rubbed sides 
 on the flow, and you heard the clack of a pariah's 
 teeth as he snapped at the flies which shared the 
 cool darkness under the house ; the brown birds 
 hidden in the bushes woke up to clutter and laugh, 
 ceasing suddenly as if the sound of their own 
 voices frightened them in the stillness ; and all 
 Myothit slept.
 
 146 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 When Pho Lone opened his eyes he saw that 
 the shadows rippled right across the creek, and 
 rose quickly, girding up his pasoh as he went 
 down the ladder. Thanks to the patrol constable 
 he had nothing to carry away with him. Finding 
 that his mother sat in her place against the wall, 
 smoking stolidly, he asked whether his father had 
 yet gone ; of course she would not go to hide ; an 
 elderly woman, ugly and deformed, runs no danger 
 at the hands of dacoits except being killed, and 
 we must all die some time or other ; besides Boh 
 Tah and his followers might want food, and it was 
 well for somebody to stay and prepare it for them 
 lest they should be displeased. 
 
 "He went long ago," said Mah Tsay. "All 
 have gone now. I thought you slept late, my 
 son." 
 
 Pho Lone was frightened, and he went out 
 behind the house to look whether a canoe had 
 been left. Moung Byoo's and other large boats 
 remained, but every craft that one man could 
 work was gone, and knowing where to look he 
 soon made out the stern-pieces of canoes and 
 small boats peering from a tiny cove smothered 
 with jungle. It was useless to call and ask the 
 men who were hidden over there to send over for 
 him, even had it been wise to speak loud when 
 the dacoits were probably very near ; so he went 
 back to ask his mother's advice. 
 
 " Go and lie down in the jungle beyond the
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 147 
 
 pagoda," she said. "The sky will soon shut, and 
 dacoits will not find you even if they pass that 
 way." 
 
 Pho Lone lingered, rubbing one foot against 
 the other. 
 
 " I do not like to hide alone," he said. " What 
 was that noise ? " 
 
 " Buffaloes striking their horns together. But 
 go, my son. If the dacoits come they come soon." 
 She blew smoke through her nostrils and watched 
 it float and curl. " Go quickly." 
 
 " I shall certainly be killed, I know " 
 
 A sound of twigs, pressed stealthily aside, 
 stopped him ; and darting behind the house he 
 raced along the creek bank, never pausing till he 
 reached the jungle which grew up to the worn 
 brick paving about the pagoda. It was too dense 
 to force one's way through, so looking fearfully 
 towards the village he crept along by the bushes 
 to the narrow path which came out behind the 
 pagoda, and turning down that began to look for 
 a hiding-place. He did not go far, partly because 
 he was afraid, and partly because he wanted to 
 know what the dacoits did ; so finding a place 
 where he could creep below the undergrowth, he 
 curled himself up and listened. The path was 
 very near his hiding-place, but the dacoits were 
 not likely to see him if they passed along, and he 
 felt tolerably safe. 
 
 As soon as her son had gone, Mah Tsay got up
 
 148 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 and let down one of the mats hinged to the beam 
 below the eaves to form the front of the house ; 
 it was heavy in its wooden frame, and it was as 
 much as she could do to lower it without a crash. 
 By this means she made a dark corner in which, 
 unless a dacoit came on the verandah and looked 
 into the house, she could not be seen. The noise 
 in the jungle came nearer, and each moment she 
 expected the yell which dacoits give when they 
 rush into a village, and which hurts one's very 
 inside. Her heart jumped like a newly caught 
 fish as she held her breath to listen a helpless 
 old woman who could not even stand upright 
 without her staff. From down the street now 
 came the clink of cocoa-nut shell ladles in chatties 
 as the dacoits drank. Then they talked together, 
 and she could hear a voice ordering the men to 
 search the houses. It was curious that there 
 was no shouting. Mah Tsay could hear them 
 in the neighbours' houses pulling about the 
 boxes and turning them over to shake out the 
 contents, but even when money was found they 
 did not call to each other as she expected. 
 Nearer they came, taking house by house in 
 turn. They were next door now, and she could 
 hear them grumbling at the poor clothes they 
 found. 
 
 " Not a man in this place has a silk pasoh," said 
 one. 
 
 " I have taken four rupees and a broken silver
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 149 
 
 bangle of one rupee weight," said another, with a 
 sulky laugh. 
 
 " Nothing here worth carrying," said the dacoit 
 who had spoken first. " Let us go to the next." 
 
 Mah Tsay pressed her hands on her breast to 
 still the heart-beat as the verandah creaked to 
 footsteps. 
 
 " Have care, friend," said a voice at her elbow, 
 " there is some one in there." 
 
 A man's head came cautiously round the mat 
 edge. For half a breath Mah Tsay, her lip shaking, 
 stared at him. Then she shut her eyes, and all 
 her pent up terror burst in a scream. It was 
 such a terrible cry that when the men hiding 
 across the creek heard it they sprang up and flew 
 through the jungle, tearing their skins on the 
 thorns. Pho Lone heard it, and scrambled out 
 upon the path to listen. Another scream, another, 
 and more. The dacoits were killing his mother, 
 and he turned to run, anywhere, nowhere. When 
 one is frightened one must run, arid he sped along 
 the path with flying hair, dashing round the 
 corners like a deer. Running so blindly he fell 
 over a stone, and while getting up thought he 
 heard the sound of feet behind ; yes, and now 
 breathless voices urging haste. He flew on again ; 
 but now the path wound suddenly out of the 
 jungle and across open land with a bamboo clump 
 here and there, and the dacoits were close behind. 
 When they saw him running they would certainly
 
 150 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 shoot him dead. He pulled up and dropped, 
 panting, on his heels, with hands pressed together, 
 just as the dacoits poured out of the jungle. They 
 hesitated for a moment when they saw him, and 
 then advanced. 
 
 " Kill," said the leader who was evidently 
 angry ; and having flung the word to his men 
 walked past. 
 
 Pho Lone threw himself upon his face. " Lord, 
 do not kill me. I will follow. I am your lord- 
 ship's slave ! Master of Nine White Umbrellas, 
 have mercy ! Do not kill a slave whose desire it 
 is to follow your lordship." 
 
 Now the dacoit leader was out of temper and 
 felt that the sight of blood would be very pleasing ; 
 the men had already cleared Pho Lone's long hair 
 off his neck and were quarrelling for the honour 
 of striking first blow. This delay had given Pho 
 Lone time for his petition and the leader time to 
 change his mind. He was not the chief, and he 
 knew his chief wished to get more men, for he had 
 been out for only one season and his following was 
 by no means so strong as he could wish, number- 
 ing only thirteen. He had one gun, and a bamboo 
 bound with wire, which when charged with 
 
 o 
 
 powder made a very alarming noise, and on that 
 account was of much service in attacking villages 
 
 O O 
 
 at night, though no man dared hold it in his 
 hand to let off. All the men had dahs or spears, 
 some of them, two; but until a dacoit chief has at
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 151 
 
 least three guns and a score of men he cannot hope 
 for a really successful season. 
 
 " Send for his lordship," said the dacoit squat- 
 ting, " his lordship will decide." Two young men 
 ran off, arid after a long time came back walking 
 behind the real chief of the band. 
 
 " Do not kill," said Boh Tah, and the men fell 
 back. " He", you ! " kicking Pho Lone as he lay 
 sobbing and praying by turns, " Can you show 
 villages where there are guns ? " 
 
 " Yes, yes, my lord; the Ngatheing people have 
 three guns." 
 
 Mention of Ngatheing village caused a little 
 silence ; Pho Lone was wondering why, when the 
 dacoit who had ordered that he should be killed 
 dropped on his heels near the Boh's feet and 
 pitching his voice high sang rather than spoke : 
 
 " Listen !" he cried, " we were led to Ngatheing 
 village this day. In the village were guns and 
 money, jewellery and silk, and we had but to take. 
 Yet his lordship, of his great clemency and might, 
 was pleased to hear the prayers of the people who 
 are as dirt below his feet. They prayed for mercy 
 and he bade us leave them. So great was the kind- 
 ness of this Destroyer of Cities that he took not 
 one rupee. Lord ! " and he shiko'd to the Boh. 
 
 " These are true words," cried the men, eagerly ; 
 " the words of Moung Toke are true." 
 
 Pho Lone took courage also to shiko to the 
 chief, behind whom he caught sight of a young
 
 152 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 man re -settling a bloody cloth about his arm ; it 
 crossed his mind that Mah Tsay had scratched or 
 perhaps bitten him before she was killed. 
 
 "Has the head-man of this village a gun? " asked 
 the Boh of the man who had sung his praises. 
 
 " May it please his lordship, no man in Myothit 
 owns one," said Pho Lone when the question had 
 been passed on, " but the head-man of a village 
 three days from here has a fine gun." 
 
 " What village ? " asked the Boh through 
 Moung Toke as before. 
 
 " Kyouksay on the river, by his lordship's 
 favour. It is only three days' march through 
 jungles, but there are three creeks to cross." 
 
 " His lordship's magic dries up creeks at his 
 word," said Moung Toke severely. Pho Lone 
 shiko'd again, and was relieved to see that the 
 chiefs face cleared somewhat. 
 
 " The young man will follow," he said. " I spare 
 his life because he gives information. But if it 
 prove that there is no gun in Kyouksay village 
 he shall be cut in pieces." 
 
 "It is good," said Pho Lone clasping Boh Tah's 
 feet, " I follow." 
 
 He was quite at ease in his mind now, for he 
 knew that the Kyouksay head-man had not only 
 a gun but also some powder and large shot. He 
 had seen these treasures each time he had stopped 
 at the village on the way to Bassein, for the 
 head-man of course was very proud of possessions
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 153 
 
 which proved that the Deputy Commissioner 
 thought well of him. 
 
 " Follow ! " said the Boh ; and Pho Lone got 
 up to take his place at the end of the line as the 
 men filed past. 
 
 The sky was shutting now, and before they 
 reached the jungle on the further side of the open 
 stretch it was quite dark. The young man with 
 the rag about his arm was next to Pho Lone, and 
 as he could not walk as fast as the others, the 
 two fell behind a little on the narrow path ; 
 presently the cloth slipped down and they stopped 
 to tie it again. 
 
 "You have been shot with a gun," said Pho 
 Lone, surprised as he saw the wound, " this cloth 
 is not good now;" and throwing the blood-soaked 
 rag aside he took off his head-kerchief and used 
 that for a bandage. 
 
 " Yes, it is a shot-hole," said the dacoit. " At 
 Ngatheing some one lay in his house and fired 
 poung ! when we came in the street." 
 
 Pho Lone remembered Shway Gyee's words 
 that the head-man of Ngatheing had loaded his 
 gun to fight the dacoits ; but he said that without 
 doubt there were a great many police with 
 English officers hidden in the village. 
 
 The dacoit thought so too ; he had followed his 
 comrades as quickly as he could, but was much 
 afraid that he should be taken prisoner owing to 
 the wound which bled very much.
 
 154 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " I think you will die," said Pho Lone tying 
 the last knot, " your face is sick and your arm 
 is very large." 
 
 The dacoit thought not ; the shot had gone 
 right through the flesh without hurting the bone ; 
 the wound would be well in a few days. 
 
 " Did you take many rupees from my village? " 
 asked Pho Lone as they moved on again. He did 
 not like to ask if Boh Tah had killed his mother, 
 as the dacoit might think it not polite. 
 
 " We took very little," said the dacoit, " we 
 had news that there was much money in the 
 village, the people having returned from Bassein." 
 
 Pho Lone explained how it was that large sums 
 were not found ; but he said he thought some 
 would have been left behind. 
 
 " We might have taken more," said the dacoit ; 
 " but while searching in the houses, we heard 
 great screaming, and being much frightened ran 
 away very fast." 
 
 " My mother was in her house ; everybody had 
 gone across the creek. She, having a bent back, 
 remained." 
 
 "It was a very terrible screaming," said the 
 dacoit. 
 
 " I myself ran away when I heard it," said Pho 
 Lone. " Go ! it is not good to walk alone thus in 
 the jungle at night ; let us come up with the other 
 men."
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 " I THINK that is the noise of oars," said Ko 
 Moung Galay, suddenly sitting up on his mat. 
 "Listen!" 
 
 " Each day since Boh Tah came you think of 
 dacoits," replied Mah Doh ; but nevertheless she 
 sat up too, and strained her ears. 
 
 It was very still outside. Ko Moung Galay 
 heard the perspiration drip from his arms on the 
 mat as they listened. 
 
 " It is certainly a boat," he repeated. 
 
 " Yes, it is ; but boats bring others than 
 dacoits," retorted Mah Doh. " Another gang 
 would not so soon follow Boh Tah's, there being 
 nothing left to take." 
 
 " Boh Tah took nothing," yawned Ko Moung* 
 Galay. 
 
 " How shall other dacoits know that ? " asked 
 his wife, getting up : for her ear caught the 
 flutter of clothing and swift patter of feet out- 
 side. Ko Moung Galay heard it too, and rose 
 also to throw open the big teak box which stood 
 in the dark corner of their sleeping room.
 
 156 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " Well ? " he said, as Mah Doh reappeared. 
 
 " Hasten," she said, " the people are running 
 away. Certainly dacoits are coming." 
 
 Ko Moung Galay needed no urging ; he 
 plunged into the box, and with shaking hands 
 gathered the money and gold ornaments together, 
 while his wife went down again, to run to the 
 jungle he supposed. 
 
 " It is strange," she said, standing on the 
 stairs, and looking in with a puzzled face, " the 
 dacoits neither shout nor beat gongs." 
 
 " Boh Tah and his men crept into the village 
 like snakes," said Ko Moung Galay, tying up the 
 bundle. " I think all the people have gone now. 
 I shall be last of all," he added fearfully. 
 
 Mah Doh, more inquisitive than frightened, 
 went out again, and presently she called from the 
 bank. 
 
 " Stop ! put back the money and things." 
 
 " Why ? " asked Ko Moung Galay, on his way 
 downstairs, hugging the bundle. 
 
 " Put that back in the box, quick," said Mah 
 Doh, bustling across the street. " Get the dah 
 quickly, and sit outside as if waiting to fight." 
 
 But Ko Moung Galay, having made up his 
 mind to run, still hesitated. He did not under- 
 stand, and said so. 
 
 "It is the police," said his wife. She took the 
 bundle from him, and tossed it into the sleeping- 
 room, out of sight ; then, wiping the perspiration
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 157 
 
 from her forehead, pointed to the dah hanging 
 against the wall. 
 
 " But I must go and shiko the officer," objected 
 Ko Moung Galay. "It is not respectful to wait 
 sitting in my house." 
 
 " Can you see the police ? " demanded his wife, 
 forcing the dah into his hand. " Do we not hear 
 dacoits, in fear of whom all the people have run 
 away ? " 
 
 Ko Moung Galay looked at her for a breath 
 or two, and understood. He nodded gravely, 
 gripped the weapon, slipped outside, and sank 
 down in an attitude. 
 
 " You are sure it is police ? " he said ; for the 
 dogs bristling and barking told that the boat was 
 very near now. 
 
 " I see the white helmet of the officer," said 
 Mah Doh, standing on tip-toe behind him, and 
 screwing her eyes to look out in the glare, " and 
 now his face. I think it is a gentleman, and not 
 a half-caste." 
 
 " Good," said Ko Moung Galay ; and he looked 
 fiercer than ever. The boat swept up on the 
 tide, and the pariahs bolted under the houses as it 
 turned to run in just opposite Ko Moung Galay 's. 
 
 " Now go and shiko," said Mah Doh as the 
 prow seethed on the mud. " Take also the 
 umbrella to hold over his honour's head." 
 
 "Are you the only people in this village?" 
 asked the officer, springing ashore.
 
 158 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Ko Moung Galay replied that, by his honour's 
 leave, he and his wife were alone in the village. 
 "Every one else having run away in great fear," 
 added Mah Doh. 
 
 " In great fear ? " echoed the officer. He was 
 a young man with little hair on his face, but he 
 spoke well. "What were they afraid of?" 
 
 " Dacoits, your honour," said Ko Moung Galay. 
 
 "Yes, dacoits, your honour," added Mah Doh 
 hastily. " Hearing the oars they ran to hide in 
 the jungle. My man remained to defend the 
 village, he being the head-man." 
 
 " Yes. Being the head-man, I stayed to fight 
 the dacoits," said Ko Moung Galay, nursing his 
 dah. " But I am glad that police and not 
 dacoits are come." 
 
 "I shall remember this," said the officer, 
 taking the open umbrella offered him, and look- 
 ing with much approval upon Ko Moung Galay. 
 " I shall report in your favour to the Deputy 
 Commissioner. ' ' 
 
 Ko Moung Galay replied that he should 
 always pray for his honour's continued good 
 health and immunity from all the Accidents, 
 Misfortunes, and Diseases, also for his rapid 
 promotion. Then, having shiko'd again very 
 profoundly, led the way across the street to his 
 house, stooping that his pasoh might hide his 
 feet. 
 
 The officer's Burmese servant, having placed
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 159 
 
 his chair in the shady verandah, and given him 
 light for his cheroot, Ko Moung Galay squatted 
 at a respectful distance to answer questions. 
 Mah Doh, he saw, was anxious to talk, but he 
 waved her into the background. The gentleman 
 did not ask much. Ko Moung Galay had to tell 
 him what day Boh Tah visited the village, how 
 the dacoits neither killed nor hurt anybody, nor 
 obtained any booty worth speaking of, owing to 
 the care the village people took to leave nothing 
 behind them. 
 
 "You ran away yourself that day, then ? " said 
 the officer. 
 
 " We went across to hide our property," said 
 Mah Doh. "While in the jungle the dacoits 
 came, and they had gone when we came back." 
 
 " Exactly," said her husband. 
 
 " I see," said the officer, smiling a little. " Well, 
 which path did the dacoits take when they left ? " 
 
 Ko Moung Galay replied that they took the 
 path through the jungle to Ladaw village, two 
 days distant. If his honour proposed to give 
 chase, he begged leave to recommend the jungle 
 path ; the creek shallowed a tide's journey higher 
 up, and a large boat could not go there. 
 
 The officer was silent for a breath or two, and 
 then he sent Ko Moung Galay to tell the police- 
 men to came ashore and eat their rice before 
 marching. This was Mah Doh's opportunity ; she 
 waddled on her heels to the gentleman's chair and
 
 160 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 began to ask questions. She had, however, only 
 ascertained that his clothes cost fifteen rupees in 
 Rangoon, that he liked hunting dacoits, and that 
 his name was Mah Kin Lay, when the police ser- 
 geant interrupted by coming to ask for orders. 
 He was much too proud to take orders through 
 the mouth of a jungle head-man. 
 
 " Sell rice," he said to Mah Doh on receiving 
 orders to buy supplies for two days. 
 
 Mah Doh loved bargaining as well as another 
 woman. She had taken her cheroot from her lips 
 to say, "Two rupees a basket," when a clever 
 thought struck her. " I have none to spare," she 
 replied with an effort; "but the people are now 
 coming back, and the broken woman, one Mah 
 Tsay, has plenty. She will sell rice to you." 
 
 The people were coming back ; they might be 
 seen creeping along behind the houses and round 
 the corners into their verandahs, whence they 
 emerged boldly with an air of surprise as if they 
 had been very sound asleep and had only just 
 awakened. It was terribly hot ; every man's 
 pasoh clung about his legs, and the perspiration 
 ran in heavy trickles down back and breast ; but 
 in a betel-chew every soul was squatting in the 
 sun before Ko Moung Galay's house ; for a white 
 man had not visited Myothit since Thaw' thekin 
 came to shoot ducks three years ago. They sat 
 patiently blinking at him, comparing notes on his 
 appearance, and wondering whether he would
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 161 
 
 take off his coat when his skin would be seen ; 
 or eat, which latter is a particularly interesting 
 sight. 
 
 Mr. McKinlay did neither of these things. After 
 accepting a drink of cocoa-nut water, which Mah 
 Doh offered in Moung Maw's tumbler borrowed 
 for the purpose, he turned his chair to face the 
 crowd, flicked the ash from his cheroot, and began 
 to speak. Each person felt that the gentleman 
 addressed him direct, and by consequence when- 
 ever he paused all pressed their hands together 
 and said, " Lord, yes, certainly," in chorus. 
 
 He began by saying he had been this morning 
 at Ngatheing and had learned that when Boh Tah 
 attacked that village the head-man fired his gun, 
 driving the gang away. By doing this Ko Bah Too 
 had gained much favour with the Government, 
 and for reward his village would pay no taxes for 
 one whole year. People who ran away and left 
 their property for dacoits to take incurred the 
 displeasure of Government. 
 
 The crowd murmured, "Lord, certainly," but 
 sorrowfully ; and Ko Moung Galay, creeping a 
 little forward on his heels, begged leave to point 
 out that when he and his people ran away they 
 took all their goods with them, whereby the 
 dacoits got nothing. He hoped Government 
 would make a small rebate on the year's taxes 
 upon that account. 
 
 Mr. McKinlay was afraid that any petition for
 
 162 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 remission of taxes on that ground would be re- 
 jected, and advised that such should not be sent 
 in. He should not, however, forget that on his 
 arrival to-day he found the head-man armed with 
 his dah in readiness to defend his house against 
 dacoits. The Government would approve that 
 action, which was no doubt due to the excellent 
 example set by the Ngatheing head-man a few 
 days back. 
 
 " It was, your honour," said Mah Doh readily. 
 
 " He would have been killed, had dacoits and 
 not police come," said Moung Byoo, much surprised 
 to hear that his neighbour had been so rash. He 
 himself had been among the first to fly. 
 
 " Yes ! " said Mr. McKinlay, throwing out his 
 arm so sharply that every one shiko'd ; " but if all 
 you men remained to fight the dacoits would run 
 away." 
 
 " His lordship does not think of the dacoits' 
 magic," said Moung Byoo, forgivingly ; " white 
 people do not understand these things." 
 
 The neighbours murmured assent, and eyed Mr. 
 McKinlay more hopefully, for he was unbuttoning 
 his coat. It was disappointing when he began to 
 speak again without taking it off; but this time 
 his words were more interesting. 
 
 He said he had heard that they did not like the 
 patrol system. (" We do not like it at all, your 
 honour," said Mah Doh.) Well, then, if they had 
 any complaint against the patrol constable they
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 163 
 
 could always come and lay it before himself 
 and he would inquire into it. It was the patrol 
 man who brought the news of Boh Tah's visit to 
 Ngatheing, thus enabling the police to start at 
 once in pursuit. Now they could see how useful 
 the patrol system was. 
 
 " It is a wise plan," said Mah Doh, " but it 
 would be better if a gentleman like your honour 
 came to the village. Your honour would not say, 
 * the pen is bad, give me two rupees to buy you a 
 new one/ the price of pens being about one anna 
 each, I think. Two rupees I the thief ! " and 
 she nursed her knees, puffing viciously at her 
 cheroot. 
 
 "The woman talks nonsense, your lordship," 
 said Ko Moung Galay, scowling at his wife and 
 wishing the neighbours would not giggle. " I 
 shall certainly report if the patrol constable asks 
 for presents." 
 
 Before Mr. McKinlay could reply the sergeant 
 came up to say that his men had eaten and that 
 he had bought a basket of rice. 
 
 "Very good ; we go at once," said Mr. McKinlay, 
 rising from his chair. " Well, mother, what do 
 you want ? " 
 
 " Lord ! " cried Mah Tsay, holding out an eight 
 anna piece, " I have received only this money for 
 my rice, the price being one rupee." 
 
 " Of course the price for a full basket is one 
 rupee. Sergeant ! What is this ? "
 
 164 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 "The woman lies, your lordship," replied the 
 sergeant easily. " I paid her one rupee ; Constable 
 Bah Twin is witness. Moung Bah Twin ! " 
 
 " Lord, Sergeant Moung Kya paid one rupee 
 into her hand," said Bah Twin, dropping on his 
 heels behind his superior. " Constable Shway 
 Hlaing also saw it. Moung Shway Hlaing ! " 
 
 " Lord, I saw the money, one rupee, paid into 
 this woman's hand," said Shway Hlaing, dropping 
 on his heels behind Bah Twin. " Moung Poh also 
 saw it. Moung Poh ! Ho, Moung Poh ! " 
 
 " Lord, I saw the money paid," said Moung 
 Poh, dropping on his heels behind Shway 
 Hlaing. 
 
 " How much did you see paid ? " demanded 
 Mr. McKinlay, whose sharp eye caught Shway 
 Hlaing turning his head to speak to his comrade. 
 " Stand up you ; attention ! How much did you 
 see paid ? " 
 
 Moung Poh opened his mouth and shut it, 
 opened it again and gaped round helplessly. The 
 village men chuckled ; and Mah Tsay cried that 
 that policeman was not present. 
 
 " Constable Shway Hlaing called me to wit- 
 ness," said Moung Poh, rubbing his knees together. 
 
 " That will do. Moung Kya will give the 
 woman one rupee more, and it will be cut from 
 his pay." 
 
 " Now," said Mr. McKinlay, hitching up his 
 sword, " Are all the men here ? Go ! " and
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 165 
 
 nodding to Ko Moung Galay, he strode off up 
 the village at their head. 
 
 " Policemen are liars," shrieked Mah Tsay after 
 them. " But for the white stranger they will 
 rob their mothers. Policemen are thieves and 
 lepers, and sons of she-dogs, and " 
 
 " Be silent ! " struck in Ko Moung Galay. 
 " Will you make all these enemies for one half 
 rupee ? Besides, you have received the price and 
 more." 
 
 " It was the order of the officer with the 
 woman's name," grumbled Mah Tsay. "If he 
 had not been here, I had been robbed." 
 
 " They are great liars," said Moung Byoo ; " I 
 laughed when his honour caught Moung Poh 
 
 lying." 
 
 " It is true," said Oo Yan, " I know the police. 
 
 In the thannah all tongues are one against a son 
 of the village." 
 
 But Mah Tsay was whimpering again, and the 
 men, who were beginning to relate stories of 
 police mendacity, stopped. 
 
 " I have sold rice to the dog's sons who will 
 shoot my boy," wept Mah Tsay, and her voice 
 was shrill. " Why have I done this ? " 
 
 " Because because the price was good," said 
 Ko Moung Galay lamely. 
 
 Mah Doh, swelling with importance, put her 
 husband down with a word and explained. 
 
 " It was my thought. The sergeant said to
 
 166 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 me, * Sell rice/ and I said to him, ' Buy from my 
 good neighbour, Mah Tsay.' ' 
 
 She paused ; the silence was flattering as she 
 could wish, and she went on. 
 
 "If the police catch Pho Lone" (Mah Tsay 
 howled), " if the police catch him," repeated 
 Mah Doh, fixing her good neighbour with the eye 
 of reproach, " Mah Tsay will be witness, saying, 
 ' I am his mother, and sold rice to the police. The 
 son of a helper of the Government is not a dacoit.' '' 
 
 " Very good ; very good indeed," cried all the 
 neighbours. " Truly that was a very wise 
 thought." 
 
 " Yes," agreed Mah Doh. 
 
 " But nobody ever heard of police catching 
 dacoits," said Moung Let, who saw that his wife 
 was not much consoled. " Besides, somebody 
 must have sold rice to them." 
 
 "Why? they are not dacoits," said Moung 
 Maw, drawing lines in the dust with his great 
 toe. "Police do not beat us for refusing it. 
 Boh Tah will be very angry." 
 
 " Yes, he will," said Mah Hehn, scowling at 
 Mah Tsay. 
 
 " Then it's a pity you offered to sell to the 
 sergeant, neighbour," retorted Moung Let ; and 
 the rest laughed so much at this that Mah Hehn 
 got up and went to her house in a huff. Mah 
 Hehn was too anxious to make annas and pice 
 to be loved in the village.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 167 
 
 " We have not heard yet how it was you 
 stayed to fight," said Moung Byoo, addressing 
 the head-man. " Tell ! " 
 
 Ko Moung Galay grinned and wagged his 
 elbow at his wife, who explained how the idea 
 had come to her ; and the story amused her 
 neighbours so much that they agreed it was 
 nearly as good to gain the favour of the Govern- 
 ment as of Boh Tah. 
 
 " Mah Kin Lay thekin is our friend now," said 
 Ko Moung Galay. " Next we shall gain the ear 
 of the Deputy Commissioner himself." 
 
 This was ambitious, but Mah Tsay remembered 
 the head-man's words a few days later. 
 
 .AA. M. Jf, J/, J/, 
 
 TV" "TV* "TV* "TV* "VY" 
 
 It was one night a week or ten days afterwards. 
 All the people who had not gone on the second 
 trip of the season to Bassein were sitting on the 
 creek bank watching for the return of the empty 
 boats ; not that they were particularly interested 
 in their coming ; but the night was so still and 
 close that no one could sleep and they sat together 
 outside for company's sake. It was terribly hot ; 
 the scorched earth was pouring out the day's heat, 
 and the wooden walls still glowed where the sun 
 had fallen. The world was awake ; pariahs trotted 
 about snarling over garbage, or baying the full 
 moon ; you could hear the mosquito - teased 
 buffaloes stamping at their pickets and blowing 
 great sighs for freedom to go and wallow in the
 
 168 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 mud ; the crows scuffled among the branches, 
 croaking crossly as they fluttered from perch to 
 perch ; the crickets shrilled in the jungle, the wall 
 lizards chirped and the tuctoo bawled his name 
 from a tree close by. Over the group on the bank 
 you might see the mosquitoes hovering in swarms. 
 
 "It is too late this tide," yawned Oo Yan, 
 nodding at the creek where the moon shone down 
 as on a black-bordered mirror. 
 
 " No ! " cried a little boy knee-deep in the water. 
 " A boat comes." 
 
 The screech of oars came from far away, but 
 soon a dark shadow crept in moonlit ripples round 
 the bend. 
 
 " Ho, neighbours ! " cried a voice all knew as 
 Moung Let's. " Ho, neighbours." 
 
 "What is the news?" called Oo Ket Kay 
 lazily. 
 
 " There is news," replied Moung Let, and the 
 oars were still as he spoke, " the daughter of 
 Moung Byoo is married to Thaw' thekin ! " The 
 jungle echoed " Thaw' thekin " sharply; but the 
 people answered " Mother ! that is news indeed. 
 Mah Pan is a lucky girl." 
 
 " I heard it as we pushed off from the godown," 
 shouted Moung Let, proud to be first with the 
 great news. Moung Byoo called to me, " His 
 honour marries Mah Pan." 
 
 Other boats arrived before the tide set down, 
 but Moung Byoo's was not among them. This
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 169 
 
 was a little disappointing, but the bare fact gave 
 food for a whole night's talk, and the red star had 
 risen before Myothit went to bed. 
 
 Moiing Byoo and Mah Hehn came on the 
 morning's tide ; it was boiling time ; but every 
 pot was left to take care of itself, for every one 
 wanted to hear exactly how the marriage had 
 come about. Moung Maw was the only person 
 who did not seem interested ; but as he had 
 pulled an oar in Moung Byoo's boat he had heard 
 all about it ; perhaps more than he cared to, 
 some of the women said slyly. However, he 
 did at last stroll over to Moung Byoo's and 
 stand on the edge of the crowd which packed 
 the floor. Mah Hehn had just begun to tell the 
 story over again as he came in ; so he sat down 
 and listened. 
 
 " His honour said to me, ' Three hundred and 
 fifty rupees,' and I said : ' My Lord, it is my great 
 wish to earn Merit by building a new monastery 
 for the reverend monk in my village ; this work 
 will cost much money ! ' At this Thaw' thekin 
 lay back and laughed very much ; so much that his 
 little ship-dog got up and barked ; never have I 
 seen a white gentleman laugh so." 
 
 " How very strange," said the neighbours, 
 " Why should he laugh so much ? " 
 
 " I cannot tell," said Mah Hehn perplexedly, 
 "but he did. Presently having wiped his eyes he 
 said, ' Very well, female builder of a monastery,
 
 170 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 four hundred rupees.' To this I made answer, ' I 
 think if Mah Pan were not happy she would wish 
 to return home. She would be happy if I were 
 able to build the new monastery.' His honour 
 then looked a little cross. He said, ' Four hundred 
 rupees is a large present/ and I said then, ' I will 
 take it.' " 
 
 " Thaw' thekin must be very rich," said one. 
 
 " He is very rich," said Mah Hehn, " but not 
 I think, very generous." 
 
 " She is a most fortunate girl," said several, 
 " most fortunate." 
 
 " And when will the work be commenced ? " 
 asked Ko Moung Galay. 
 
 " Very soon," replied Moung Byoo. " The boards 
 are bought ; we took the four hundred rupees 
 which Thaw' thekin's clerk paid into our hands 
 and went to the Chinese carpenter to give order 
 for the boards and other timber. As soon as we 
 have found good posts Moung Maw will begin." 
 
 "Yes, I picked the planks," struck Moung Maw 
 
 so suddenly that people started, " sixty, of good 
 
 teak, scarcely any having beeholes ; also boards 
 
 for the floor and stout pieces for the rafters and 
 
 joists, and shingles." 
 
 " Mother ! " 
 
 "Yes, the roof of the new kyoung will be of 
 shingles, not thatch," said Mah Hehn. She had 
 right to expect that the neighbours would be sur- 
 prised, for not a house in Myothit, or Ngatheing
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 171 
 
 for that matter, was roofed with the wooden tiles 
 which give such a respectable look ; they are 
 expensive compared with thatch. 
 
 " Will there be carving too ? " inquired a voice 
 respectfully. 
 
 " Yes, there will be carved pieces at each corner 
 of the roof/' replied Mah Hehn. 
 
 " Truly, it is a great work ! " 
 
 " All must give the work of their hands in this 
 building," said Mah Hehn graciously. "It is my 
 wish that all shall join in it." 
 
 Every one said 'that it was very good, and with- 
 out doubt the new kyoung would be one of which 
 the village might be proud. And as it was now 
 very hot and much after rice-time, Mah Hehn's 
 visitors began to go their way ; in the best of good 
 humour, as well as they might be, for such an 
 opportunity to earn Merit does not come every 
 day. Mah Hehn was entitled to much respect, 
 and the women whispered to each other that after 
 very few more existences she would certainly be a 
 man. 
 
 " If my son were here, he also would earn 
 Merit by helping to build," sighed Mah Tsay as she 
 crept down the street after Moung Let, " but he 
 is gone with the dacoits and we shall never see 
 him again." 
 
 Both the parents were very unhappy in these 
 days. Nothing had been heard of Pho Lone ; the 
 men had made search for his body, and not finding
 
 172 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 it, knew what had happened. It was no new 
 thing, but all were sorry because Pho Lone was 
 his mother's only son. 
 
 " He will come back Avhen the monsoon breaks," 
 said the neighbours hopefully. " When the rains 
 come, Boh Tah will send his men home to their 
 villages." 
 
 At first Mah Tsay had listened gratefully ; but 
 after Mah Kin Lay thekin and his police went in 
 pursuit she gave way to despair. They would 
 hunt the Boh and kill him and all his followers ; 
 and if they did not kill Pho Lone they would 
 catch him and cut off his hair and send him over 
 the sea to be kept in prison for the rest of his life. 
 The thought that she had sold rice to the men 
 who would do this clung to Mah Tsay ; and she 
 would crouch in the corner all day sobbing to her 
 knees, while Moung Let sat brooding over his 
 cheroot, only opening his mouth to say, " The 
 woman speaks truth." 
 
 In vain their friends tried to reassure them. 
 Who, they asked, ever heard of police catching 
 dacoits ? How, they desired Moung Let to say, 
 could mere police catch a Boh whose magic was 
 the talk of the country side ? Mah Kin Lay 
 thekin and his men would walk here and walk 
 there, stopping at every village to ask questions, 
 while the Boh got further off every day. 
 
 They were sitting silent and unhappy on their 
 verandah that evening when Moung Byoo came.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 173 
 
 He had something important to say concerning 
 Pho Lone, and did so without any beating about 
 the bush. 
 
 " When I go to the godown again," he said, " I 
 shall say to my son-in-law Thaw' thekin ' Pho 
 Lone was a good lad who lived with his mother. 
 He was taken against his will to follow the Boh, 
 and I beg your lordship to speak these words in 
 the ear of his honour the Deputy Commissioner.' 
 His honour, being a friend of Thaw' thekin, my 
 son-in-law, will listen. Thus, if Pho Lone is 
 caught by the police, the Deputy Commissioner 
 will sign an order, and the good youth will be set 
 free, not even his hair being cut." 
 
 These were very good words ; Moung Let and 
 Mah Tsay were comforted, and told Moung Byoo 
 his talk was as English medicine to a pain in 
 one's inside. 
 
 " I was a little sorry when I heard the girl had 
 married Thaw' thekin," said Mah Tsay, when 
 Moung Byoo had gone ; " but I am now very 
 happy it is so. Through Thaw' thekin poor jungle 
 people can now speak in the ear of the Deputy 
 Commissioner himself." 
 
 " His honour must speak for us," agreed Moung 
 Let, " having married a daughter of our village."
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 " His lordship's order ! " cried Moung Toke 
 hoarsely, as a man who has just awakened. 
 " Listen to the words his lordship commands 
 that I speak ! " 
 
 Those of the men who had not yet drawn their 
 pasohs from their faces, did so quickly and sat up 
 yawning. The sun had risen ; through a rift in 
 the foliage above, you might see where his rays 
 touched a lofty tree ; but down in the jungle was 
 twilight. 
 
 " His lordship has dreamed a dream ; " sang 
 Moung Toke, and his voice echoed through the 
 gloom. "The omen is evil. In his dream his 
 lordship walked by a ruined pagoda, and from the 
 bricks came a snake which bit his sacred foot, so 
 that he should die. Lord ! Wherefore this being 
 a most evil omen his lordship will not to-day attack 
 Ladaw village. Lord ! " 
 
 Repeating "Lord!" Moung Toke shiko'd, and 
 crept back to his place by Boh Tah's mat, which 
 was spread against a tree a little way off. "It is 
 .a good place to rest," Pho Lone heard the chief
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 175 
 
 say, " therefore we remain here ; if there is a good 
 omen to-night we will go to-morrow to Ladaw." 
 
 Moung Toke replied that his lordship spoke 
 wisely, in which Pho Lone silently agreed, for he 
 had been made to work very hard since he followed 
 the Boh. His duty was to carry the rice bag, the 
 big iron cooking-pot, tools for digging, and the 
 chiefs mat, in which various pieces of silk, and, 
 judging by the weight, a good many rupees were 
 rolled ; and as the others had only their dahs and 
 what little property they had stolen, they could 
 march much faster than Pho Lone. In conse- 
 quence he often lagged, and then Moung Toke 
 would wait behind and beat him with his spear 
 shaft till he trotted up to the rest. It would be 
 a pleasant change, after three days of such toil, 
 to sleep away the heat in this cool jungle, with 
 the little stream close at hand to bathe in. There 
 was no danger of being found by the police either, 
 for the underwood was thick and a person passing 
 along the path a bowshot distant could not see 
 the fire. 
 
 He set about his work of cooking the morning 
 rice quite cheerfully, and as Moung Chaik, the 
 young man with the wounded arm, helped him, 
 not being able to bathe like the rest, they soon 
 had the fire blazing, and sat down to tend it and 
 talk. 
 
 " I think there is only rice for one more meal," 
 said Moung Chaik, eyeing the limp bag from
 
 176 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 which Pho Lone had filled the pot, " that is bad 
 for us." 
 
 " Good for me who must carry it," laughed Pho 
 Lone, weighing the bag in his hand, " there is 
 enough left for two little meals, I think." 
 
 " Wonder if his lordship will dream well to- 
 night," remarked Moung Chaik, " that was a very 
 bad omen he dreamed." 
 
 " It was indeed," assented Pho Lone : for he 
 knew the Dream-book as well as another, and 
 could have repeated word for word the page which 
 tells that the Snake signifies an enemy and its 
 Bite defeat. 
 
 ' ' I don't know what his lordship will do if he 
 has another bad dream," sighed Moung Chaik. 
 His arm gave him pain and he slept little at night, 
 so he was apt to take a gloomy view of matters. 
 
 " We shall be all right," said Pho Lone, whom 
 the prospect of an idle day had put in the best 
 spirits. " For my part I am happy." 
 
 If Moung Chaik had not been suffering he would 
 have had faith in the Boh ; but as it was he felt 
 obliged to show that they were in a very bad case. 
 Here they were three hours from Ladaw, and 
 unable to attack, having rice only for to-night's 
 eating and no prospect of refilling the bag. They 
 had counted on getting food at Ladaw to take 
 them to Kyouksay four days farther on. How 
 did Pho Lone propose that fifteen men should 
 march four days having no food ?
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 177 
 
 " Well there is plenty for to-day," said Pho 
 Lone easily, as he raised the lid to see how the 
 rice got on. " Let to-morrow take care of to- 
 morrow." 
 
 By the time the men came up from the water, 
 the rice was ready and heaped in the pot-lid for 
 lack of anything more convenient ; and Pho Lone, 
 having received permission to bring the Boh his 
 portion, joined his comrades who were already 
 eating. 
 
 " No dried fish, no ngapee, not even a chilli," 
 grumbled Moung Chaik, plunging his fingers into 
 the steaming white mass. " I wish," he glanced 
 round and dropped his voice, " I wish I were back 
 in my village." 
 
 The other men ate and said nothing. The Boh 
 had pulled them through worse straits ere now, 
 and they were content to take things as they 
 came. They finished the rice to the last grain, 
 strolled away to take a drink at the stream, and 
 came back to enjoy the idleness. 
 
 It was good to lie on one's back and smoke, or 
 chew betel till the red juice trickled from the 
 corners of the mouth, for it was yet very cool in 
 the jungle. Here and there the sun pierced the 
 foliage and struck a broken patch of light on the 
 tree trunks to make the dark shades pleasanter 
 by contrast ; the doves cooed sleepily in the 
 distance, and the splash of the flying squirrel as 
 he leaped from bough to bough startled the 
 
 M
 
 178 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 stillness. The sun-patches crept slowly down the 
 trees and one by one the men fell asleep. 
 
 Pho Lone stayed awake sucking his cheroot 
 and watching the blue smoke curl and wreathe 
 unshaken by a breath of air ; to-day he liked being 
 a dacoit much better than he had done during the 
 three days he had followed Boh Tah. When his 
 life was spared he had made up his mind to make 
 the best of his misfortune and enjoy himself as 
 much as he could ; and the tales his new com- 
 panions told that first night after eating rice had 
 excited his fancy. He had pictured himself re- 
 turning to Myothit with a bag of rupees so heavy 
 that his shoulders ached, and a great bundle of 
 silk pasohs and tameins, in which gold jewellery 
 was hidden, on his back ; for that was exactly what 
 each man of the gang expected for himself. The 
 picture had become a little dimmed in these three 
 days ; his shoulders ached from the rice bag he 
 had been made to carry as the last enrolled 
 member of the gang, and his thighs were sore 
 from Moung Toke's spear-shaft ; it seemed as 
 though a fellow had become a slave instead of a 
 dacoit ; but no doubt other new men would join 
 very soon and then, if he could gain the favour of 
 the Boh, he would be relieved of this coolie work. 
 Certainly he did not stand very well with the 
 chief at present ; only last night Moung Toke 
 had warned him that if he lagged again it was 
 their intention to hang him by the feet to a
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 179 
 
 tree and leave him with a fire lighted under 
 him. But then Moung Toke had lost at play 
 last night and was cross ; so perhaps he said 
 more than the Boh meant. Anyhow his threat 
 did not seem real this morning, and Pho Lone 
 was enjoying the envy and admiration of Moung 
 Maw and the neighbours when sleep overtook 
 him. 
 
 The cooking fire was black out, and had been 
 made on bare ground for convenience sake, so it 
 must have been a live cheroot, falling from drowsy 
 fingers, that set the dry grass smouldering ; but 
 whatever the cause it was the sudden burst of 
 heat from blazing underwood that woke the men. 
 Pho Lone sat up to see the flames leap and the 
 leaves high overhead dance and shrivel in the 
 smoke, while the blaze spread with a savage roar 
 that drowned the orders shouted by Boh Tah. 
 There was no need for him to tell them to run ; 
 nobody can tell where a jungle fire will stop, and 
 every man caught up his dah and bundle and fled 
 through the thorns to the stream. At first they 
 thought only of escape from the fire, and after 
 crossing the shallow stream and wide stretch of 
 sand beyond, stopped to look back at the flames 
 leaping higher among the trees. 
 
 "Will it cross to us ? " asked Pho Lone of the 
 man beside him ; but before he got an answer the 
 Boh was shouting to them. 
 
 " Go ! " he cried. " If the police come, they
 
 180 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 come quickly to see who made this fire. Go 
 then ! " 
 
 " The wisdom of his lordship is as the wisdom 
 of Bhudda himself," said Moung Toke in a very 
 distinct voice, as he snatched up the bamboo gun 
 and ran after the leader. " Hasten all of you ! " 
 
 They ran along the watercourse until they 
 struck the path which clove the steep flood-worn 
 banks. Boh Tah took the way to Ladaw without 
 pausing, and sped along. The roaring of the 
 flames was faint in their rear when his run 
 slackened into a rapid walk, and presently crossing 
 an open glade he stopped to look back. They 
 could no longer hear the fire, but above the forest 
 a great column of smoke tapered, to spread in 
 purple clouds and reflect the glow. 
 
 "That will be seen two days' inarch away," 
 remarked Moung Chaik gloomily, "and will bring 
 the forest guards if not the police." 
 
 That seemed to be the Boh's thought also, for 
 he jerked himself on to his feet, and called to the 
 men to follow. Moung Toke waited till Pho 
 Lone passed, to give him a word of advice. 
 
 " I think the bad omen of last night means 
 that the police chase us to-day," he said. " If 
 you fall behind now, his lordship will to-night 
 give the order to spit you from buttock to 
 shoulder upon a bamboo." 
 
 He glowered savagely, and trotted on to take 
 his place next the Boh, while Pho Lone hunched
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 181 
 
 up his load and drew his pasoh tighter about his 
 hips, before he started again to bring up the 
 rear. The track was very narrow, and wound 
 sharply through dense jungle, so that the leaders 
 of the file, as it strung out, were seldom in sight 
 of the hindmost. Pho Lone did his best to keep 
 up, but the thorns caught in his load, detaining 
 him so often that he was continually in fear of 
 Moung Toke's coming back to beat him. The 
 sweat dripped from his elbows as he strove to 
 hold his load steady, and trickled down his brow, 
 half blinding him. He longed to put the things 
 down and rest his tired back, but he dared not, 
 and stumbled along as best he might, full two 
 bamboos' length behind the last man, seeing and 
 hearing nothing for utter weariness. 
 
 Turning a corner which showed the path 
 straight for a little distance, he shook the hair 
 from his face, to see how far behind he had fallen 
 before making an effort to catch up. As he did 
 so, he saw the Bob's gun held high, and the file 
 suddenly halt ; a moment's pause, and every man 
 flung his weapon far into the jungle, and leaped 
 like one in the opposite direction, to vanish like 
 deer, and with as little sound. For a breath Pho 
 Lone hesitated ; then he dropped his own load 
 carefully behind a bash, and stole along the path 
 to seek a hiding-place, for now he too heard the 
 tramp of feet which had caught the more prac- 
 tised ears of his companions. He was stepping
 
 182 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 gingerly off the track, for the jungle was thorny, 
 when a shout stopped him, and he looked up to 
 see a white officer striding along with levelled 
 revolver, and a party of police crowding behind 
 him. Pho Lone drew back from the bushes, and 
 crouched on his heels, hoping that the pot and 
 bag had not been seen. 
 
 "Who are you, and where do you come 
 from ? " demanded the officer, lowering his pistol. 
 
 Now if Pho Lone had been less in awe of Boh 
 Tah and Moung Toke, whom he knew must be 
 hiding close by, he would have confessed the 
 truth, although he saw prison and chains for life 
 before him. But he was too much afraid of the 
 chief, so replied that he was Moung Gyee, son of 
 Moung Loogalay, of Ladaw village. 
 
 " And what are you doing in the jungle when 
 the sun is high, so far from your village ? " 
 
 Fear quickened Pho Lone's wits ; he answered 
 that, with the officer's permission, he was seeking 
 a few medicine leaves. 
 
 " You were trying to hide," said the officer, 
 eyeing him keenly. 
 
 " Lord, I heard many feet, and being greatly 
 in fear of dacoits, did try to hide myself." 
 
 " Stand up and show your body." 
 
 Pho Lone rose, thankful that the Boh had con- 
 temptuously refused Moung Toke's proposal to 
 cattoo him. Not only had he no charms particu- 
 larly affected by dacoits he had not even taken
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 183 
 
 the most ordinary precautions ; was neither gun- 
 proof nor sword-proof; the only protection he 
 had against jungle perils was that against snake- 
 bite ; and the person who has not two or three 
 blue spots below his ankle, where the medicine 
 has been tattooed into the skin, is not to be 
 found in town or country. Pho Lone therefore 
 stood up confidently to be examined, and was 
 relieved to see that the officer's face now showed 
 disappointment. 
 
 There was a little silence while the white man 
 put his pistol into his belt, and drew off the thick 
 cord which secured it to his wrist. Pho Lone 
 stood, straining his ears to catch a rustle which 
 might betray the presence of Boh Tah or his 
 men, but all one could hear was the cluck of a 
 lizard and the heavy breathing of the police 
 who had been travelling fast since they saw the 
 fire. 
 
 " Is there any talk of Boh Tah's gang in your 
 village ? " inquired the officer in a less severe 
 tone. 
 
 " We had news that he burned Ngatheing and 
 Myothit villages, after killing many people," 
 replied Pho Lone, wishing to please the chief, if 
 he chanced to be listening. 
 
 " Now, look here. The jungle has been fired 
 about one hour and a half from this place. Did 
 you know that ? " 
 
 Pho Lone denied it, but looked much
 
 184 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 frightened. Luckily the officer misunderstood 
 his fear, and went on to say, if he did not want 
 to fall into the dacoits' hands, he had better run 
 home to his village as fast as he could. 
 
 " Wait a bit," he added, seeing that Pho Lone 
 was about to go ; " where does the path lead to 
 w T hich meets this one two hours march back ! " 
 
 " To the creek, your honour, to a very small 
 village where fishermen live. I hope the dacoits 
 have gone that way, being afraid lest the fire 
 should bring the police." 
 
 "With your lordship's leave," struck in the 
 sergeant, dropping on his heels, " I think this 
 jungle-man speaks truth ; he must have seen the 
 dacoits had they come this way, there being but 
 the one path." 
 
 " That's just what they have done," said the 
 officer viciously, and he drew his cheroot case 
 from his pocket and lighted one while he seemed 
 to be considering. 
 
 " I suppose they have many boats at the little 
 fishing village you speak of? " he said presently. 
 
 " They have three or four large boats at 
 Panmaw village," replied Pho Lone, glad to be 
 able to speak truth again ; " boats that pull 
 many oars and good for shallow water. Your 
 lordship, I think these dacoits will steal boats to 
 escape in," he added for the Boh's benefit. 
 
 The officer made no answer. He turned 'on his 
 heel, called " Right about turn, march ! " and
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 185 
 
 strode away, leaving Pho Lone to shrink off the 
 path as the policemen passed. There were nine 
 men with rifles, and Pho Lone thought Boh Tah 
 would need all his magic to deal with a party so 
 well armed as that. The steady tramp of the 
 officer's boots died in the distance, and still 
 he crouched among the bushes afraid to move. 
 He felt sure that the dacoits would kill him for 
 being caught, and wished the police had taken 
 him away prisoner. 
 
 Fully a betel-chew passed before Boh Tah and 
 Moung Toke stole out upon the path. Pho Lone 
 trembled and crawled out to beg for mercy, but 
 before he could speak the Boh addressed him 
 mouth to mouth for the first time. 
 
 " You have done well, young man ; I am pleased 
 with you." 
 
 " I am your lordship's slave," said Pho Lone, 
 so astonished and gratified that he did not know 
 what else to say. 
 
 " You are appointed my Life-guard ; henceforth 
 you carry the gun. Moung Toke will give the 
 rice and baggage to another man." 
 
 "Your lordship heaps favours on his slave," 
 said Pho Lone, shikoing once more. A reception 
 so different to that he had looked for set his head 
 whirling ; he could hardly believe his ears. The 
 Boh smiled condescendingly, and Pho Lone was 
 his follower at heart from that moment. 
 
 " He threw them completely off our path," said
 
 186 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Moung Toke. " They will go to Panmaw, which 
 is two days from this place. Before they find 
 out their mistake we shall sack both Ladaw and 
 Kyouksay." 
 
 " I give orders what shall be done," said the 
 Boh, and Moung Toke shiko'd and collapsed. 
 
 " Forty police dogs each having a rifle," re- 
 marked Boh Tah presently. " That is without 
 counting the Englishmen." 
 
 " Nothing escapes his lordship's eye," cried 
 Moung Toke. He had counted only nine himself, 
 but if the Boh said there were forty it was not 
 his place to contradict ; and for a little time the 
 three squatted on the path, reflecting upon the 
 danger from which they had escaped. 
 
 " What are your honour's commands ?" inquired 
 Moung Toke, as the chief rose thoughtfully and 
 felt in the fold of his pasoh for a cheroot. 
 
 " Follow those policemen, kill them all, and 
 take their guns and cartridges. What was that?" 
 he added, taking one step into the jungle. 
 
 " It might be the police returning," replied 
 Moung Toke, whose keen eye had caught a 
 monkey shaking a bough, " but I do not think it 
 is. Will it be pleasing to your lordship that I 
 call the followers together ? " 
 
 The Boh assented. So Moung Toke, having 
 first recovered the gun, which the chief passed 
 to Pho Lone with another gracious smile, went to 
 collect the men. This was easy, because he had
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 187 
 
 merely to shake a little tree and imitate the 
 cry of the lizard ; but finding the weapons and 
 baggage was a very different matter, as it must 
 be when a gang is well disciplined. Frequent 
 false alarms had given Boh Tah's men practice, 
 and now they executed the manoeuvre so well 
 when the signal to hide was given that it some- 
 times took an hour and a half to find all the 
 weapons when danger was past. 
 
 After much searching, at the cost of skin and 
 clothes among the quickset, everything was re- 
 covered except the bamboo gun, which was 
 Moung Toke's especial charge. He thought he 
 had marked the spot where he flung it, but it 
 was nowhere to be found. And when it seemed 
 that they must leave it for lost, the chiefs brow 
 grew so black that Moung Toke's knees began to 
 shake. Iron wire of the strong kind necessary 
 to bind a bamboo gun can only be got in the 
 bazaar of a big town, and Moung Toke could 
 scarcely have done worse had he lost the bag of 
 large shot. This was Pho Lone's lucky day, as 
 everybody said that evening. It was he who 
 spied out the missing weapon sticking upright, a 
 man's height above the ground, in a thick bamboo 
 clump. He pointed it out to Moung Toke while 
 the Boh was looking the other way, and so made 
 the lieutenant his friend. While the men were 
 searching each one took a chance of telling Pho 
 Lone how glad he was to hear of his promotion,
 
 188 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 and begged him if he found himself short of betel, 
 cheroots or anything, to confer on his friend the 
 favour of asking for what he wanted. It was 
 very likely Pho Lone would find his supplies of 
 these things run short, because up till now the 
 men had helped themselves from his box to save 
 their own. 
 
 Moung Toke divided the load Pho Lone had 
 carried between Moung Chaik and Shway Dway, 
 who happened to have been somewhat lax of late 
 in paying their respects to him ; and this having 
 been settled, the Boh was informed that all was 
 ready for the march. 
 
 "We have come far and fast to-day," said Boh 
 Tah. " I will lead you to a safe resting-place, 
 whence we shall go to Ladaw to-morrow." 
 
 " We shall not follow the police to kill them 
 and take their guns, then ? " asked Pho Lone. He 
 was fairly drunk with good fortune, or would 
 never have said such a thing. The men stared 
 with amazement, and Moung Toke, pressing 
 forward, whispered in his ear, " Fickle is a great 
 man's favour. Still tongue, wise head," and drew 
 back again, nodding at him earnestly. Another 
 Boh would most likely have ordered the young 
 man to be thrown down and flogged with split 
 bamboos ; but Boh Tah knew when to be severe 
 and when kind, and he lost nothing in the eyes 
 of his followers by seeming not to hear. 
 
 " The fool," said Moung Toke to the man next
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 189 
 
 him ; " does he think fourteen men with dahs 
 can kill forty policemen with rifles ? " 
 
 " He is young and will grow wiser," said 
 Shway Dway, whose hair was touched with 
 white, " to-day the youth has had great good 
 fortune, also," and he sighed ; he had been dacoit- 
 ing at intervals for many years, but had never 
 had much luck. 
 
 The Boh was in no haste to start, and the sun 
 was declining when he gave the order to march, 
 and led the way in the Ladaw direction. He 
 moved slowly, for that village was now less than 
 one hour distant, and he did not wish to be seen 
 by people who might be out in the jungle to 
 gather firewood or on some other errand. He 
 followed the path a little way, and then, the 
 jungle being thinner, turned aside to look for 
 water, near which they might camp for the night. 
 He found a place which pleased him in the bend 
 of a deep water-course, along whose sandy bed a 
 tiny stream trickled ; the elephant bamboos met 
 overhead at this spot making it very dark. Pho 
 Lone's heart sank when he saw the chief throw 
 down his dah. 
 
 " There is night here," he whispered to Moung 
 Toke, " it being yet day outside. I think there 
 are many evil spirits in this place." 
 
 " Dark camp, good camp," said Shway Dway, 
 who heard his complaint. " See the print of the 
 deer's feet, good son ; nobody ever comes here."
 
 190 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 When rice had been eaten that evening, Boh 
 Tah called Pho Lone and told him to tell Moung 
 Toke that, unless anything happened to-night to 
 prevent it, they should attack Ladaw next 
 morning, and he must therefore make the usual 
 preparations. 
 
 " It is a trouble," said Moung Toke when he 
 received the message, lying at full length on 
 the sand ; " but it must be done. Ho ! Shway 
 Dway, Bah Chet, bring the mamootees, we go to 
 prepare for to-morrow." 
 
 " Why do we carry the digging tools ? " asked 
 Pho Lone, as they felt their way out of the gully 
 and back to the path. 
 
 " To dig the hole for his lordship, of course," 
 replied Moung Toke. 
 
 " I don't understand," said Pho Lone. 
 
 Moung Toke, albeit much surprised that Pho 
 Lone should have followed for four days without 
 discovering a fact so important, explained, as they 
 walked stealthily along in the direction of the 
 village. His lordship was not a common fighting 
 leader; his charms were so powerful and therefore 
 so precious that he must not run any risks ; if he 
 were killed his charms would be spoiled, and then 
 his followers might as well go home to their 
 villages. 
 
 " On that account he does not fight himself? " 
 said Pho Lone, much impressed. 
 
 " Exactly," assented Moung Toke. " His lord-
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 191 
 
 ship is a Pit-hiding Chief. We now go to dig the 
 hole in which he will hide to-morrow, while we 
 fight the village men ; his charms being thus 
 safe from hurt will protect all into whose 
 hand his lordship shall give a little magic 
 rice." 
 
 " Then shall I myself be commanded to stay 
 and protect his lordship ? " inquired Pho Lone. 
 
 " We cannot tell what he may order," replied 
 Moung Toke ; " now, we come near the Ladaw 
 paddy kwins and must be quiet." 
 
 They walked on in silence until the jungle came 
 to an end and straggled out in low bushes to 
 meet the cultivated land. Against the soft light 
 of the night-sky the roofs of Ladaw stood out, 
 about half a mile away. You might walk 
 across the fields straight to the village, or 
 by threading your way through the jungle get 
 round unseen till the nearest house was but 
 a stone's throw distant. Moung Toke looked 
 about and finally selected a spot at the foot 
 of a great tree, between whose buttress-like 
 roots six men might crouch and be hidden from 
 the village. 
 
 " This is a good place," he said, " the roots 
 being large we need not dig deep, being tired 
 after so much marching to-day. Also the wild 
 swine have loosened the earth for us." He 
 signed to Shway Dway and Bah Chet, and they, 
 having muttered a prayer to the spirits of earth
 
 192 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 and forest, whom they were about to disturb, 
 tucked up their pasohs and bent their backs to 
 the digging. They worked with a will ; but the 
 many voices of the jungle night smothered the 
 noise of their tools.
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 THE day was breaking. Pho Lone, drawing his 
 pasoh from his face, lay watching the ragged 
 patches of sky through the leaves grow lighter. 
 He would have risen, but as he awakened he 
 caught the voice of the Boh speaking to Moung 
 Toke and thought it good to listen. 
 
 " And this I dreamed last night," said the Boh. 
 making an end of speech. 
 
 " Indeed a very good dream, your lordship. It 
 is written in the Book, he who dreams that he 
 eats the flesh of an enemy slain in fight dreams 
 well. The layman dreaming this thing shall cer- 
 tainly soon receive a Government appointment ; 
 and the official thus dreaming must look for much 
 honour and promotion." 
 
 " It means success in my undertaking," said the 
 Boh. " Without doubt it foretells great measure 
 of success ; for I, having awakened after dreaming, 
 saw, by the sinking moon, that the hour of mid- 
 night was long past." 
 
 " Dreams which come before midnight are not 
 good to read as omens," remarked Moung Toke,
 
 194 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 for lack of anything better to say ; "when one 
 eats at the evening meal food that is a little 
 strange, or much curry that is highly spiced, 
 one's inside is troubled and dreams follow quickly 
 upon sleep. Such dreams must not be read as 
 omens." 
 
 " I know, I know," said the Boh, a little angry 
 that Moung Toke should tell him what every child 
 knows ; " as I have told, I wakened and knew that 
 the dream came long after midnight." 
 
 " Lord," said Mourig Toke respectfully. 
 
 Pho Lone lay listening with strained ears, but 
 for many breaths he heard only the drip of the 
 dew. 
 
 "Your lordship will no doubt command your 
 servants to attack the village to-day? " said Moung 
 Toke presently. 
 
 " Having again fallen asleep, very happy by 
 reason of the good omen," said the Boh, paying 
 no heed to the question, " I dreamed yet another 
 dream." 
 
 "Another dream ! " 
 
 " In this dream, friend, I, lying upon my mat, 
 saw come down to me from the darkness of the 
 heavens the full moon, like burnished silver, and 
 having many bright stars hanging from his rim. 
 Whereupon I, saying, ' King, Grandfather Moon ! 
 speak, why do you come ? ' the moon made 
 answer, ' Conquest awaits the bravery of your 
 followers and your own very great wisdom.' And
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 195 
 
 having spoken these words the moon faded up 
 again into the sky of the night." 
 
 " What fortune is his lordship's ! " 
 
 " Yes, I dreamed this dream when I slept, 
 having already dreamed that I ate of the flesh 
 of an enemy," said the Boh. 
 
 " Two such omens ! " said Moung Toke under 
 his breath. 
 
 " This second dream, just before I woke at the 
 dawn," said the Boh thoughtfully. " We shall 
 attack to-day. I go now to learn the propitious 
 hour." 
 
 Pho Lone, lying as though still asleep, heard 
 the mat crackle as the Boh rose, and presently 
 heard him brushing through the jungle above the 
 water-course. He sat up and saw Moung Toke 
 smoking. He rose and coiled up his hair, for it 
 is not very respectful to address a superior with 
 one's hair hanging loose on the shoulders. 
 
 " His lordship's dreams last night were full of 
 the best omens," said Moung Toke. " Listen, I 
 will tell you all that he dreamed." 
 
 Moung Toke was so eager to repeat the dreams 
 which had come to their chief that Pho Lone 
 squatted and heard them again from his mouth. 
 
 "Without doubt there are none more favour- 
 able in the Book," said Pho Lone, when he 
 finished. 
 
 "None," said Moung Toke, with conviction. 
 "His lordship has already gone to the jungle
 
 196 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 to learn the auspicious hour for attacking Ladaw 
 village." 
 
 " What a leader ! " said Pho Lone. 
 
 " There is not such another in all the land," said 
 Moung Toke. " Two such dreams in one night, 
 and nearly in the hour when one can see the veins 
 in the hand ! " 
 
 " The best of hours," said Pho Lone. 
 
 Somebody yawned loudly at this moment and 
 Moung Toke moved away. It was good to repeat 
 such news to Pho Lone, who enjoyed his lordship's 
 favour, but he was not going to tell every one in 
 this friendly way. Time enough for that when 
 the Boh returned and commanded him to relate 
 the dreams with proper ceremony. In the time 
 one takes to smoke a cheroot the chief came 
 back, and sitting upon a fallen tree trunk ordered 
 silence ; and all having shiko'd Moung Toke sang 
 with long-drawn breaths the dreams which the 
 chief had dreamed. 
 
 " And it is the order of his lordship," he went 
 on, having lent ear to the Boh for a little time, 
 " that the attack be made two hours after noon, 
 that hour being found by his lordship the propi- 
 tious hour. Lord ! And the gun being fired by 
 me, his lordship's servant, all shall rush upon the 
 village with very great and fierce shouting, that 
 the people being awakened from sleep in fear shall 
 run from us. This is the order of his lordship. 
 Lord!"
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 197 
 
 All shiko'd. Pho Lone did so, wishing the Boh 
 had discovered that two hours before noon was a 
 propitious hour, for he was hungry and there was 
 no rice left. The others looked as though the 
 same wish was in their hearts, hut nobody spoke, 
 for the chief was now holding something out 
 beyond his knees in both hands, while he gazed 
 over it into the gloom. 
 
 " By my order " he spoke as a man speaking 
 to himself " By my order, a little rice was saved 
 last night when the bag was emptied." 
 
 He opened his hands and all could see that his 
 lordship held his head-kerchief tightly rolled in a 
 ball. " That my followers may escape from death 
 by gunshot or by sword and from capture, I give 
 each a little of this rice which I have charmed by 
 magical arts." 
 
 Every one shiko'd again. Pho Lone felt a little 
 frightened, for the gloom and the tone of the Boh's 
 voice made him think of Oo Boo Nah and his evil 
 smelling house far away by Ngatheing. Holding 
 the cloth carefully in one hand, the Boh unrolled 
 it slowly, and at a word from Moung Toke the 
 men crept forward one by one to receive in up- 
 raised hands a few grains of the magic rice. Pho 
 Lone, looking respectfully upon his, thought it 
 was like rice that had been stirred in curry stuff. 
 Perhaps the chief had used turmeric in working 
 his charm ; he was so clever at magic that he 
 could produce wonderful results with the simplest
 
 198 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 means. It was the first charm against dangers 
 of war that Pho Lone had ever possessed, and he 
 took care that the Boh should see him wrap the 
 yellow rice in a rag and tie it about his neck. 
 
 Having given out the rice, the Boh sat for a few 
 moments gazing into the shades, then slipped off 
 the log and stalked quietly up the gully to dis- 
 appear in the jungle. 
 
 " His lordship goes to work more charms and 
 make offerings," said Moung Toke in an under- 
 tone, " it is good that he should do so we having 
 had but little fortune in the last few villages." 
 
 "It is certainly very good," said all. Pho Lone 
 spoke with the rest and, remembering the cause 
 of the band's ill fortune at Myothit, hoped no old 
 woman of Ladaw would scream, at all events 
 until they had got a basket or two of rice. 
 
 The morning passed very slowly. It was the 
 Boh's order that no one should go ten bamboos' 
 length from the black spot which marked last 
 night's fire, or Shway Dway, who cared little for 
 the Law, might have tried to catch a few fish in 
 the pool which could be seen from the bend below 
 the camp. They stayed hunger by drinking much 
 water, and sat round in the brightest place 
 nursing their knees and talking of the great 
 deeds they were to perform. The jungle grew 
 still under the rising- of the sun they could not 
 
 o / 
 
 see, and talk languished ; some slept and others 
 whiled away the time playing a child's game with
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 190 
 
 pebbles on the sand. It was not a very good 
 game and hardly served to keep the players 
 awake until Shway Dway said, " Last time I 
 played this game was in the sawyer's shed of 
 Henzada gaol where we were always locked on 
 Sunday afternoons with nothing to do." 
 
 " Why do you talk such talk just before we go 
 to work ? " snarled Moung Toke rising to his feet, 
 " I think you are an old fool." 
 
 " It is very unlucky to speak of such places at 
 this time," said Moung Chaik. 
 
 "I shall report him to his lordship," said Moung 
 Toke dropping on his heels to continue play. 
 " His lordship will punish him." 
 
 Shway Dway blinked solemnly and rolled his 
 chew, for the angry grumblings of his comrades 
 made him ashamed. He said he should go and 
 make an offering with prayers to dispel the bad 
 omen of his thoughtless words and strolled away 
 into the jungle. 
 
 He had been back some time and the men were 
 beginning to ask each other if the sun were not 
 now much past the meridian, when the Boh 
 suddenly appeared in their midst and gave the 
 order to march. 
 
 " I give my English gun to Pho Lone," he said 
 taking it from the heap of bundles against whicli 
 it leaned, " it will kill ten men when fired." He 
 handled it fondly before he raised the hammer 
 and poured fresh priming into the pan. It was a
 
 200 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 very short gun with a thick barrel much eaten by 
 rust ; but, as Shway Dway said, any one who 
 knew about guns could see what a fine weapon it 
 was ; and Pho Lone heard the murmur of envy as 
 the chief gave it him and showed him how to let 
 it off. 
 
 " Go then," said the Boh, " the omens are the 
 best ; great success awaits us." 
 
 This was very cheering to men in rather low 
 spirits by reason of their long morning of hunger 
 spent in the gloom of the choung. At the chiefs 
 words they drew themselves up and flourished 
 their dahs ; but for Moung Toke's warning they 
 would have shouted. 
 
 " March next to his lordship, most favoured 
 one ! " said Shway Dway smiling to Pho Lone. 
 
 " His lordship has done the Myothit son great 
 honour," said Moung Toke, "march forward, 
 friend." 
 
 Accordingly Pho Lone led the file behind the 
 Boh, feeling very proud as he heard the men 
 speak of the honour conferred upon him. 
 
 " He will lead the attack, I think," said Shway 
 Dway ; and the others echoed, " Yes, he will lead 
 the attack." 
 
 Now Pho Lone was very proud of the honour, 
 but he did not wish to lead the charge upon the 
 village ; so when Moung Toke bade them all wait 
 in the jungle while he went on to guide the Boh 
 to his hiding hole, he crept to Shway Dway's side
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 201 
 
 and offered him the gun saying, " You are very 
 brave and have so much experience ; I think the 
 honour of using his lordship's gun should be 
 yours." 
 
 Shway Dway took the gun, passed his hand 
 along the barrel and sighed as he gave it back. 
 He should dearly like to take it and lead the 
 attack, he said ; but Moung Toke would certainly 
 tell his lordship, who would be angry at his favour 
 being thus set aside. Pho Lone said he would 
 explain to the Boh, but Shway Dway was firm ; 
 so he offered the gun to Moung Chaik. Moung 
 Chaik also declined it, as did all the others in 
 turn : each man said how much he should esteem 
 the honour, but not one would accept it, because 
 the Boh would be so angry with Pho Lone. 
 Hence when Moung Toke returned saying, " His 
 lordship is pleased to say I chose a good place for 
 the pit," Pho Lone still squatted with the gun 
 between knees which shook in spite of his arms 
 round them. 
 
 " Now be silent and follow," said Moung Toke. 
 
 The men rose and started to creep through the 
 jungle behind him. They had not far to go to 
 strike the little path which curved with the edge 
 of the forest and from which the open kwins and 
 the distant village could be seen. The sight of 
 the houses brought the sweat in great drops down 
 Pho Lone's face ; he could hear his heart beat 
 as he stole along, and he looked round to see
 
 202 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 how the others were feeling. Each face was set 
 and yellow ; only Shway Dway appeared happy ; 
 he chewed betel as he walked, and grinned 
 pleasantly to Pho Lone as he caught his eye. 
 The way seemed long because Moung Toke was 
 so careful. If a twig snapped under foot his 
 hand went out, and the band dropped on their 
 heels, lest any one in the village, having heard, 
 should look. It seemed unnecessary to do this, 
 when Ladaw was still a gunshot distant, but all 
 obeyed Moung Toke's smallest sign. Thanks to 
 the skill with which he led the advance, they 
 came to the end of the jungle, where it trickled 
 out in a point a bowshot from the nearest house, 
 without even a dog having barked ; but the pain 
 of creeping forward like this in silence was so 
 great that, had they had much further to go, 
 Pho Lone felt he must throw down the gun, and 
 fly into the jungle. He was quite glad when, 
 there being but a few bushes before them, Moung 
 Toke put down his bundle, and motioned the men 
 on in front. 
 
 " All are here," he whispered, as they passed 
 and crouched close under the shrubs. " Now, 
 when the village men hear the pouiig ! " he laid 
 the bamboo gun carefully on the ground and un- 
 wound the rag from the touchhole " I think 
 they will wake in a fright and run away. But 
 lest any stay to fight, you must go first and shoot 
 them with his lordship's gun."
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 200 
 
 The men, craning forward to listen, nodded 
 approval, and somehow Pho Lone, without moving, 
 found himself in front and Shway Dway at his 
 elbow whispering encouragement. Shway Dway's 
 words were sweet, but Pho Lone was frightened 
 when he looked in his face. There was that in 
 his eyes and the way he was balancing his dah 
 which fairly pulled up his heart. 
 
 " Don't fear ; you lead and I keep near you," 
 said Shway Dway. 
 
 " I shall certainly be killed," stammered Pho 
 Lone, with bloodless lips. 
 
 " Only if you run the wrong way," replied 
 Shway Dway, whipping off a twig with his dah 
 to show its edge. " When the gun goes poung ! 
 lead with great shouting." 
 
 Pho Lone watched Moung Toke laying the 
 train to fire his bamboo gun, and wondered how 
 long he would take. He was very slow ; he 
 could not shake out the powder properly, and 
 when at last he got the train laid he tried many 
 times before he could strike a match. At last he 
 saw the blue smoke leap, and Shway Dway gave 
 him a little push. The gun went off, and some- 
 thing seemed to break in his head. He knew 
 that he screamed as he ran, for Shway Dway's 
 first yell was so terrible. He had a glimpse of 
 people flying and great splashing in the creek ; 
 but when a hand seized his arm, and a voice bade 
 him stop, he felt as if he had dreamed and was-
 
 204 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 now awakened in the Ladaw street surrounded by 
 breathless men. 
 
 " You are a leader," panted Shway Dway. "You 
 fired the gun." 
 
 Pho Lone felt a pain in his chest, and saw a 
 bruise. It was there that the gun kicked him, he 
 thought. 
 
 . " He is indeed a leader," cried the rest ; and 
 one added : "I think his shot wounded a boy. I 
 saw him stagger, and his mother swung him upon 
 her hip." 
 
 " Every person in the village has fled," said 
 another man, looking up and down the ragged 
 row of houses which faced the narrow creek. 
 
 " Our great shouting frightened the dogs," said 
 Pho Lone proudly. " They are very much afraid 
 of us." 
 
 Moung Toke now limped up. He explained 
 that when he fired the bamboo gun it jumped 
 and struck his foot. Upon that account he fell 
 down, and was not able to charge with the 
 rest. 
 
 " However, the work is now done," he said. 
 " Moung Chaik, Bah Chet ! Go, tell his lordship 
 the village is captured. We light a fire to cook 
 before we search the houses." 
 
 It was a most successful attack. The people 
 had been in such haste to escape that they had 
 taken nothing in their hands. Not a box was 
 open ; some of the women had even left their
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 205 
 
 neck-kerchiefs, with the keys tied to them, on the 
 mats whence they had been roused by the firing 
 and shouts. 
 
 " This plan of making great noise is much the 
 best," Pho Lone said to Shway Dway. " I am 
 glad I so advised his lordship." 
 
 Pho Lone was beginning to give himself airs ; 
 but Shway Dway did not wish to quarrel with 
 the Boh's favourite, so he said that Pho Lorie's 
 advice was certainly very good. 
 
 " Come, little chief," he said, " let us search this 
 house, which looks as if it might belong to a rich 
 man." 
 
 It was good to be called " Boh galay " by the 
 most experienced man of the band, and Pho Lone 
 held up his head as Shway Dway addressed him 
 thus. It was nearly as good to climb the steps to 
 the dark sleeping-room and find two large teak 
 boxes, both locked. 
 
 " Something worth having here," said Shway 
 Dway, lifting one by the handle. 
 
 "Money !" exclaimed Pho Lone, whose ear caught 
 the rumble and clash of rupees. "How can we 
 open the box ? " 
 
 " The jungle-man's key," laughed Shway Dway, 
 raising his dah ; and with a few quick blows he 
 cut away the wood about the hasps and prised 
 up the lid. " There, little chief, turn it out while 
 I open the other." 
 
 Pho Lone groped in the box till he found a
 
 206 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 bundle of rupees tied in an old cotton pasoh, and 
 lifted it out in triumph. 
 
 " I told you so," he cried. " Five hundred 
 rupees and more by the weight." 
 
 "Turn it quite over," said Shway Dway, chopping 
 at the other box. " Spread a cloth and turn it 
 upside down." 
 
 Pho Lone did so, and was rewarded by finding 
 a diamond ear ornament and a gold bracelet. 
 
 "This is better than being a cultivator," said 
 Shway Dway. " What do you think ? " 
 
 " The life of the jungle for me," laughed Pho 
 Lone gaily. " Look at this silk pasoh ; it must 
 have cost forty rupees." 
 
 "Go then, little chief. I think we have taken 
 everything, and I am hungry." 
 
 Pho Lone had forgotten his hunger in the 
 excitement of the search, but now he felt that he 
 could eat three men's portion of rice, and fol- 
 lowed Shway Dway out of the house, laden with 
 booty. 
 
 There was already quite a large heap of 
 property in the street, though the men had not 
 yet searched half the houses. Pho Lone put his 
 bundle with the rest, and after reckoning that 
 the money taken amounted to quite six thousand 
 rupees, picked up the Boh's gun and went to join 
 the rest, who were beginning to eat in the 
 head-man's house. 
 
 " We shall be laden like coolies now," remarked
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 207 
 
 Moung Toke, through a mouthful, as he glanced 
 out at the pile. 
 
 " No ; we shall march like a Royal army," said 
 Bah Chet, stepping upon the verandah , "I have 
 seen an elephant standing under the tree over 
 there." 
 
 Bah Chet's words gave great joy ; the Boh 
 himself looked up from his rice, and before 
 Moung Toke could repeat the news, asked, 
 " Who can drive an elephant ? " 
 
 "Your lordship's slave has been an elephant 
 driver," said Bah Chet shikoing. 
 
 " Then I appoint this man driver of my 
 elephant," said the Boh ; and Bah Chet shiko'd 
 again, with a prayer for his lordship's prosperity. 
 
 When rice had been eaten, the chief called 
 Moung Toke aside, and the two sat talking in 
 the far corner of the verandah. Pho Lone in his 
 pride would have joined them, but Shway Dway 
 said, " Disturb not tigers eating," and he took 
 the old man's advice, much as he wished to show 
 that he enjoyed Boh Tah's favour. A heavy 
 meal makes men lazy ; so, although many houses 
 yet remained unsearched, none were anxious to 
 go out in the still heat and finish the work. 
 There was plenty of betel -nut in the head -man's 
 house, for his wife kept a little shop for the sale 
 of such things ; and it was good to find half- nuts 
 neatly made up with pink lime and fresh soap- 
 leaves ready for chewing ; the men helped them-
 
 208 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 selves and settled down to enjoy a quiet afternoon. 
 The village people were hiding in the thick jungle 
 just across the creek, for once or twice Pho Lone 
 heard a child's cry checked short, as if by a hand 
 over its mouth ; but though he watched with the 
 eye of fear, lest the village men should suddenly 
 plunge through the bushes and across the creek 
 to kill them all, not a leaf stirred until the 
 shadows stretched and the evening breeze moved 
 the hot air. 
 
 The Boh and Moung Toke sat long in talk, and 
 at last called Shway Dway to them. Shway 
 Dway had passed all his life in the jungles, 
 except when in prison, and knew the forests 
 better than any man of the band. Once Pho 
 Lone had asked him, " What is the name of 
 your village ? " and Shway Dway made answer, 
 " Jungle-town, which lies between the great sea 
 and the Ngawoon River." And Pho Lone say- 
 ing, " A large village, truly," Shway Dway 
 replied that the police could not find him there ; 
 the police were his enemies because he had a bad 
 name. He could not dwell in peace in his own 
 village, which was below Ngapoota : he had tried 
 many times ; but whenever a dacoity occurred, 
 though a hundred miles away, the police always 
 came and arrested him. Upon that account he 
 preferred the jungles ; during the fine weather he 
 followed some Boh, and when the rains came he 
 used to lie up in a tiny hamlet called Nyounglay,
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 209 
 
 which was, he said, known to very few people. 
 When Shway Dway was asked if it was a good 
 village to hide at, he said, " The hair of many at 
 Nyounglay is short," so it was easy to guess what 
 kind of place it was. 
 
 Pho Lone would have been glad to lie idle till 
 the order was given to start ; but the chief, look- 
 ing round, gave, through Moung Toke's mouth, 
 the order to finish searching the houses at once, 
 and he got up feeling a little angry. 
 
 "I want to do mischief," he said to Moung 
 Chaik, as they went out. 
 
 Moung Chaik said he felt the same, so they 
 went together. 
 
 It was while they were searching the last 
 house that a bright thought came to Pho Lone. 
 He caught sight of the three little earthen jars, 
 which stood on a high shelf to contain the 
 sadahs* of the house-owner, his wife and children. 
 
 * The sadah, or horoscope, is drawn out in mysterious 
 cabalistic squares on a strip of palm-leaf for every child when 
 he or she is about three years old. It sets forth the exact 
 moment, day and date of birth, records the planet under 
 which the owner was born, and sundry other details. It is 
 extremely important that these particulars should be kept 
 private, because any evilly disposed person possessed of the 
 information set out in your sadah would be in a position to 
 work charms and spells against you. The jars are kept where 
 they can be seen, high up to show them respect, and also to 
 avoid risk of accident. It would be the height of discourtesy 
 even to refer to a neighbour's jars or their contents. 
 
 o
 
 210 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " Let us carry away all the sadahs we can 
 find," said Pho Lone, with a malicious laugh. 
 
 " What would be the good of that ? " 
 
 " Think of the fear the people will be in when 
 they find them all gone," sniggered Pho Lone, 
 knocking down the jars with the gun he carried. 
 " Mind that scorpion ! " as the pots shattered on 
 the floor. " There, five sadahs. Let us go to the 
 next house." 
 
 Moung Chaik was not much pleased with the 
 plan, but rather than offend the Boh's favourite, 
 he went. They smashed the pots so as to show 
 the village people what they had done. 
 
 " Now what are you going to do with them ? " 
 asked Moung Chaik as Pho Lone added the last 
 to his bundle of strips. 
 
 Pho Lone had not quite made up his mind. 
 He thought it would be very amusing to throw 
 the whole lot down in the street, when the people 
 on their return would have a fine sorting and 
 each would see every one else's before he found his 
 own. Then everybody would be uneasy because 
 his neighbours had seen his sadah and would not 
 know what spells might be worked against him. 
 While he squatted, turning the palm leaves about 
 in his hands, Moung Toke called him to the head- 
 man's verandah, where he still sat with the Boh. 
 
 "What have you there ?" inquired the chief; 
 and seeing, before Pho Lone could reply, he smiled 
 more graciously than ever.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 211 
 
 " This youth is the best man among my follow- 
 ing," he said to Moung Toke. " He collects the 
 sadahs that the people, knowing I thereby hold 
 their fate in my hands, may become very submis- 
 sive. You have indeed done well, Myothit 
 
 son: 
 
 Pho Lone had not thought of this valuable use 
 to which the sadahs might be put ; but he was 
 wise enough to shiko and express gratitude for 
 his lordship's good words, without confessing this. 
 
 " This young man will one day be a very great 
 chief, leading hundreds of men and having many 
 elephants," said Moung Toke with a touch of envy. 
 He had had many opportunities, but it had never 
 come to his thoughts to hold villages in his hand 
 by such simple means. 
 
 " He certainly will," agreed the Boh. " There 
 is leave to go, friend. Give order to bring my 
 elephant and see it loaded with the property I 
 have taken ; we march very soon for Nyounglay, 
 having so much to carry." 
 
 The elephant was brought up and Pho Lone 
 gave, through Bah Chet, orders to load it. It 
 was a great work for inexperienced men to pack 
 all the loose property safely in the riding basket, 
 but Pho Lone squatted at a little distance giving 
 his orders and did not lift so much as a betel box. 
 
 " All is ready now, neighbour," said Bah Chet 
 cheerfully as he tugged at the last knot, " shall I 
 bid the elephant rise ? "
 
 212 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Pho Lone took no notice, so Bah Chet stepped 
 astride the elephant's neck and repeated his words. 
 Pho Lone scowled. 
 
 " Does your lordship give order that his servant 
 bids the elephant stand ? " said Bah Chet, slipping 
 quickly to the ground and crouching on his heels. 
 
 "Bid the elephant rise," said Pho Lone, throw- 
 ing the command over his shoulder without look- 
 ing at Bah Chet ; and Bah Chet shiko'd.
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 
 " WHO makes that great crying which has 
 awakened me ? " 
 
 The Boh always slept a little apart from his 
 men, so he was the last to be disturbed by the 
 groans and cries which had roused the whole 
 camp. His voice was sleepy and harsh, and 
 Shway Dway trembled a little as he called across 
 the darkness that the Myothit son was very ill 
 with great pains in his inside. 
 
 The men who sat yawning and blinking round 
 Pho Lone, edged away as they heard the chiefs 
 mat crackle. 
 
 " Make fire that I may see," said the Boh, step- 
 ping among them. " I must have light to discover 
 the nature of this sickness." 
 
 They hastened to blow up the dying embers of 
 the pot-fire till it lighted all the glade and showed 
 Pho Lone's face drawn with pain as he sat with 
 bent body on his sleeping mat. He did not 
 answer when the Boh spoke to him but cried con- 
 tinually that he had been bewitched. 
 
 " I fear the good son is indeed bewitched," said
 
 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 the Boh, squatting at his side and studying him 
 closely. 
 
 There was a sleepy murmur of assent from the 
 men, and Moung Toke remarked it was well for 
 Pho Lone that his lordship's powers were greater 
 than those of a Kaway, a born witch versed in the 
 twenty -four branches of sorcery. 
 
 " I can guess what has brought this sickness on 
 the little chief," said Moung Chaik, in an under- 
 tone ; " among the sadahs which he brought away 
 from Ladaw village is the sadah of a witch : this 
 is her revenge." 
 
 " I never thought it well to take those sadahs," 
 said Moung Toke ; but in a whisper, for he did not 
 wish the Boh to hear. 
 
 The Boh had been too much absorbed watching 
 Pho Lone to notice what his men said, but now 
 he began to mutter charms while he drew caba- 
 listic squares on the ground. When he did this 
 Pho Lone groaned more than ever, and the men, 
 now wide awake, looked on in silence. 
 
 " A little time, only a very little time," said 
 Shway Dway, clasping his knees and looking up 
 at the fire-flecked foliage, " and the witch-sign 
 will show." 
 
 " By my order ! " exclaimed the Boh, rising to 
 his feet, and speaking very loudly ; "by my order 
 the witch has entered into the body of my friend. " 
 
 At these words, Pho Lone straightened his 
 back with a jerk, flung out his hands, and
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 215 
 
 dribbling from the mouth, swung round and round 
 from the waist like a failing top. 
 
 "See!" cried Moung Toke, "look all of you! 
 By his lordship's order the witch has entered 
 the youth. You see he rolls his body. Were 
 his sickness merely of the belly he would rock to 
 and fro thus." 
 
 " Moung Toke would teach the babe to take the 
 breast," said Shway Dway, impatiently. 
 
 " Or give his lordship lessons in magic," added 
 Moung Chaik. 
 
 Moung Toke pretended not to hear what they 
 said ; he was always telling people what they 
 knew already, and if he had not enjoyed the Boh's 
 favour would have been told often and plainly 
 what the men thought of him. 
 
 Pho Lone continued to roll, and threw his arms 
 about, until the Boh held out his hand so that all 
 could see the long yellow thread he held. 
 
 " Be still, witch ! " he commanded ; but Pho 
 Lone only writhed and howled the more. 
 
 "A bamboo," said the Boh, looking round ; "a 
 stout one." 
 
 Somebody crept forward and handed his lord- 
 ship a staff used to carry bundles. He drew the 
 yellow thread carefully about his neck that it 
 might not fall to the ground and so lose its virtue, 
 and fell to beating Pho Lone till the bamboo 
 split and drew blood from his back. 
 
 " That has made her obedient," said Shway
 
 216 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Dway to himself, as Pho Lone ceased rolling and 
 groaning. 
 
 The Boh threw the stick aside, and bidding the 
 witch be still if she did not want a worse beating, 
 tied the yellow thread about Pho Lone's arms. 
 This magic bond tamed her as though it had been 
 an iron chain ; Pho Lone sat quite still, shivering 
 a little, though the perspiration streamed down 
 his face and breast, and the witch, through his 
 mouth, answered the Boh's questions very meekly, 
 showing that her powers were much inferior to 
 those of the chief. 
 
 It was exactly as Moung Chaik thought. 
 Among the sadahs taken at Ladaw was that of 
 Mah Too ; she desired the document back ; she 
 was the slave of the sorcerer who had thus com- 
 pelled her attendance and would do his bidding ; 
 she implored that he, of his great justice and 
 mercy, would grant her prayer for reparation. 
 
 The Boh pretended to consider her request, 
 because it is never a good plan to consent readily 
 to a witch's prayer, however reasonable ; and after 
 thinking for the space of a few breaths he bade 
 Moung Chaik bring the sadahs to the fire that he 
 might look them through. Moung Toke stirred 
 the fire till the sparks leaped in the smoke among 
 the boughs, and the Boh sat down to turn over 
 the bundle of dingy palm leaves. 
 
 " This is yours, witch," he said holding one up. 
 
 Now the witch showed her power ; Pho Lone
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 217 
 
 sat ten paces from the fire, and she could not have 
 read one letter or figure on the sadah ; but she 
 replied at once that Boh Tah's wisdom spoke the 
 truth, for the sadah he held was indeed hers. 
 
 " Take it, then," said the Boh, stepping to his 
 follower's side ; and the witch took it with Pho 
 Lone's hand, blessing the might, glory, wisdom and 
 justice of the Boh through Pho Lone's mouth, 
 which was very wonderful to see and hear. 
 
 "Well," said the chief, "because my follower 
 has done you injury he shall make reparation with 
 offerings. It is not convenient to me that he 
 should return to your village to lay them outside 
 your house ; you must accept his offering here in 
 the jungle." 
 
 To this the witch made answer that she was 
 only anxious to please her master in every way ; 
 whereupon the Boh spoke these words. 
 
 " Witch ! This patient is my friend and fol- 
 lower. Therefore, under pain of death, molest 
 him no more ! " 
 
 He loosed the yellow thread from Pho Lone's 
 arms, and the witch, having received permission 
 to go, went as mysteriously as she had come, 
 Shway Dway, it is true, said he saw a fruit-bat 
 pass above the fire, but Moung Toke was certain 
 it had been about since rice-time. 
 
 "You are now freed from the spell," said the 
 chief; and Pho Lone lay back on his mat and 
 was very sick indeed.
 
 218 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " You are freed now," repeated the Boh, when 
 he sat up looking red and watery about the eyes. 
 
 Pho Lone replied that owing to his lordship's 
 great might, wisdom, and control over evil things, 
 he was quite well again. If it was his lordship's 
 order he would at once go and make his offering, 
 placing the sadah with it that the witch might 
 come and recover it. 
 
 " Make the best offering you can and quickly," 
 said the Boh, as he stalked away to his mat in the 
 dark shadows across the glade. 
 
 " You should offer cheroots, betel, a very little 
 pickled tea, because we have not much, and the 
 jack fruit we have left," said Moung Toke, eager 
 as usual to display his knowledge. 
 
 After leaving Ladaw they had passed through a 
 grove of jack trees and had filled the elephant 
 basket with great green fruits twice the size of a 
 man's head. Even when quite ripe jacks are not 
 very wholesome ; but the men had eaten them 
 greedily at evening rice. 
 
 "It is a pity to offer the only two we have 
 left," said Pho Lone, eyeing them wistfully, 
 " they would be nice to-morrow morning." 
 
 " You found them nice last night, judging by 
 the quantity you ate," retorted Moung Toke. 
 " Do as you please, but remember that it must be 
 the best offering you can make." 
 
 Pho Lone said no more, but he sighed as he 
 lifted the great spiny fruit on to the tray.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 219 
 
 "Don't put the offering on the ground, you 
 know," said Moung Toke, as Pho Lone balanced 
 the heavily-loaded tray on his head. " A fallen 
 tree would be a good place, or a large stone." 
 
 "Yes," replied Pho Lone meekly. He knew 
 how to make an offering quite as well as Moung 
 Toke or any one else, but felt too weak to resent 
 being treated like a young child. 
 
 He stole into the jungle, and found a fallen 
 tree by nearly tumbling over it. He balanced 
 the tray gingerly on this, prayed the witch to 
 accept his offering in reparation, and ran back as 
 fast as he could, for it is never good to be in the 
 jungle alone at night, and one feels it the more 
 gloomy and bad just after having been be- 
 witched. 
 
 The ease with which Boh Tah had relieved 
 him from the witch's spell made Pho Lone his 
 slave ; the chief, in the young man's eyes, was 
 the greatest and most powerful sorcerer in the 
 land, and Pho Lone could not help shikoing 
 whenever the Boh glanced in his direction. As 
 they marched, hour after hour, through the 
 jungle shades, his mind was always busy with 
 thoughts of pleasing the chief, and showing his 
 devotion. In view of his lordship's wondrous 
 magical powers, Pho Lone thought it a little 
 strange that they were not led direct against 
 Kyouksay ; for the season was drawing on, and 
 another two weeks at most must bring the rains.
 
 220 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 But the Boh, for some reason which in his 
 wisdom he did not make known, had announced 
 his intention of leading the band first to Nyoun- 
 glay, where Shway Dway was sure more men 
 would join. It was hearing what the old man 
 said to the chief on this point one evening, while 
 the bags of rupees were being taken from the 
 kneeling elephant, that gave Pho Lone a good 
 thought. Two or three of the men whom he 
 honoured by asking their opinion were much 
 struck with it ; and strengthened by their praise, 
 Pho Lone begged leave to speak when they 
 halted for the night half a day's march from 
 Nyounglay. The Boh graciously consented to 
 hear him, and Pho Lone explained. His lordship 
 went to Nyounglay to enrol more followers ; well ? 
 his very humble slave urged that his lordship 
 receive the respects of the village folk seated 
 upon the money taken at Ladaw, which should 
 be strewn on the floor as a mat. Thus, the 
 Nyounglay men, seeing his lordship regard money 
 so lightly as to rest the body upon it, should be 
 very greatly dazzled, and pray leave to follow. 
 
 The Boh smiled, and said that this was indeed 
 a very good thought ; what did Shway Dway 
 think? 
 
 Shway Dway was quite of opinion that the 
 wisdom of a leader shone in Pho Lone's mouth ; 
 but at the same time he spoke without know- 
 ledge of the men who lived at Nyounglay.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 221 
 
 Those men were friends of his own ; wherefore it 
 was his advice that the money be buried here, 
 and committed to the care of the demons of the 
 forest. 
 
 "What do you think?" said the Boh to 
 Moung Toke. 
 
 Moung Toke begged leave to think with his 
 lordship. 
 
 " I think both ways," said the Boh. 
 
 Moung Toke shiko'd, clasped his knees, and 
 fixed his eyes on the stars. It would be well to 
 wait until his lordship had made up his mind. 
 
 The chief drank smoke and thought over the 
 counsel given by his followers. Pho Lone's plan 
 had taken his fancy, but he could not deny that 
 Shway Dway's might be the wiser. He sat, 
 puffing his cheroot, and turned the matter over 
 in his mind, while he idly watched the move- 
 ments of his men about the fire. The drone of 
 their voices was nearly drowned by the screaming 
 crickets and the night wind whispering in the 
 trees, like the sea on shingle. From the black- 
 ness of the jungle came the leathery flap of the 
 elephant's ears, and the clink of his chain as he 
 foraged for tender branches. 
 
 " Your advice, friend, is very good," said the 
 Boh, at last to Pho Lone, " but yours," to Shway 
 Dway, "is better." 
 
 " Much better," put in Moung Toke. 
 
 "It is my order, therefore," continued the
 
 222 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 chief, " that the money and jewels taken at 
 Ladaw, except thirty rupees, be buried in this 
 place." 
 
 Moung Toke was understood to say that the 
 wisdom of his lordship was as the wisdom of a 
 Bhudd ; and that such might, glory, and majesty 
 as his needed not displays of gold and silver for 
 their enhancement. 
 
 " Fortunately," said the Boh, taking no notice 
 of Moung Toke, " this is Saturday, which is a 
 lucky day for my purpose, in this month of 
 Kasone. You two friends, carrying tools to dig, 
 will follow while I seek a spot proper for the 
 burying of the money." 
 
 A suitable place, at the root of a great oil tree, 
 was found, and with beating hearts for this is a 
 fearsome task at night Pho Lone and Shway 
 Dway dug the hole while Moung Toke toiled to 
 and fro, carrying the bags. When the treasure 
 was buried, and the earth tramped down, the 
 Boh dismissed them, saying he must be alone 
 while he spoke the invocations, and worked the 
 spells which should compel the forest demons to 
 his service. They were glad to go, and hurried 
 stealthily back to their comrades, marvelling at 
 this fresh evidence of the courage and power of 
 the Boh. Pho Lone felt that this was yet 
 another bond in his allegiance to the chief. The 
 spirits of the jungle own for master only him 
 who is brave enough thus to enslave them, and
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 223 
 
 will tear in pieces any man who dares approach 
 treasure given into their charge, unless their 
 master, by the exercise of magic, restrain them. 
 He, though far away, can bring them to receive 
 his orders, and they must obey ; by this means, 
 very simple to one so gifted, Boh Tah retained 
 control over all the treasure. 
 
 It was well they were within half a day of 
 Nyounglay village, for that night, while they 
 were asleep, the elephant came very quietly and 
 ate all the rice. Bah Chet woke at dawn, in 
 time to see him shaking the empty sack, and 
 having hobbled him, pricked his trunk hard with 
 a spear ; whereat the elephant groaned and 
 screamed so loudly that he woke the whole 
 camp, and Moung Toke bade Bah Chet desist. 
 
 " He has eaten our rice, and there is an end 
 of it. You needn't make him call the police 
 now." 
 
 The rest laughed, but not heartily, for they were 
 hungry. Bah Chet dropped his spear, and after 
 calling the elephant all the bad names he could 
 think of, promised him a pair of leathern anklets 
 with spikes inside to wear every night for a 
 month. 
 
 The sun caught the tree tops and the birds 
 awoke. Boh Tah, who looked haggard after 
 spending many hours of the night working charms, 
 gave the order to march as soon as he was told 
 there was no food, and the elephant suffered again
 
 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 when Bah Chet took the driving rod in hand. 
 It is ill marching on an empty belly, and all were 
 glad when the jungle gave place to rolling grass 
 land, and Shway Dway could point to the site of 
 Nyounglay village. They could not see the place 
 itself, and never a curl of smoke rose to tell that 
 there was a village on the low hill which 
 shouldered out from the forest clad range behind ; 
 only when they came very near and saw the 
 crows fluttering over the trees, did they see that 
 men lived there. 
 
 The flanks of the hill were grown over with 
 thorn bush as high as a man's breast, and so close 
 that a pariah could not find a way through. 
 There was no sign of a path on the dusty grass, 
 and the men were beginning to ask how they 
 were to get up to the village when Shway Dway, 
 laughing, turned sharp to the left, and led the 
 way to an outcrop of rock at the bottom of the 
 hill, and pointed out the track, smooth and narrow 
 across its steepest face. 
 
 "I thought I would see if any one could find 
 the path," laughed the old man, as he led the 
 way up. 
 
 " Go forward and tell your friends I come with 
 my followers to eat rice at their village," called 
 Boh Tah from the elephant ; and Shway Dway 
 stepped out, the perspiration trickling down his 
 back as he climbed the steep in the glare. 
 
 The men were tired and their pasohs drenched
 
 BOH TAH'S VISIT TO NYOUNGLAY
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 225 
 
 with sweat when they reached the crown of the 
 hill, and across the bald top saw the village a bow 
 shot off. It clustered against the forest line as 
 though shrinking from notice, and was, Pho Lone 
 thought, the dirtiest and poorest village he had 
 ever seen. It was very small ; there was neither 
 kyoung nor pagoda, and half the houses were in 
 ruins, mere skeletons of mat and rafter, from 
 which hung shreds of ragged thatch. Several 
 men were squatting round Shway Dway in the 
 shade of a tree, when Boh Tah's band arrived, 
 but these gave no greeting such as new-comers 
 expect ; they looked over their shoulders in the 
 surly fashion of dogs disturbed at food, and did 
 riot move even when Moung Toke sang with many 
 honorific phrases that his lordship was come to 
 Nyounglay. There were other men and women 
 certainly, who sat on their verandahs, and came 
 out shyly to greet the Boh ; but these did not 
 seem more pleased than the others to see the 
 party, and gave no invitation to enter their 
 houses. The Boh took no notice of their rudeness ; 
 he slid from the kneeling elephant, shook out his 
 pasoh, threw a glance over the villagers as a cul- 
 tivator looks at plough cattle, and stepped up the 
 ladder of the nearest house, unasked but un- 
 hindered. Pho Lone, though faint with hunger 
 and heat, stood nursing the chiefs gun, rubbing 
 one foot against the other, uncertain what to do. 
 " Go, little chief," said Shway Dway, stepping-
 
 226 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 out from the group which surrounded him. 
 "Enter this house. The order is given and rice 
 is cooking. Drink ! " 
 
 Pho Lone sat down on the verandah, drank the 
 cocoa-nut shell of water which Shway Dway 
 handed him, and felt better. He laid down the 
 gun, and coiled up his hair which hung in draggled 
 wisps down his back. 
 
 " Are these men your friends ? " he asked ; and 
 his tone was not that of a little chief. 
 
 " Prison friends," replied Shway Dway. 
 
 Pho Lone went to the corner of the verandah 
 to see them more closely, and liked their looks no 
 better. Two or three wore head-kerchiefs with a 
 corner drooping, as if carelessly, to hide the 
 shortness of their hair ; the rest were bare-headed, 
 and while some had hair of a finger's length, 
 others had enough to fasten on false tails, which 
 allowed short locks to betray themselves. One 
 man, whose back was turned, had curious straight 
 scars half hidden by his pasoh. 
 
 " Perhaps he was once bewitched and his 
 friends beat the witch who possessed him," said 
 Shway Dway, with a twinkle in his eye, when 
 Pho Lone asked whence those marks came. 
 
 " Or perhaps he was flogged in gaol," retorted 
 Pho Lone, who knew that prisoners were some- 
 times beaten. " What are those marks each man 
 has on his ancles ? " 
 
 "If one gets a bad leg, they take off the iron
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 227 
 
 till it heals," replied Shway Dway, covering his 
 own right foot with his pasoh as he spoke, " hence 
 those marks." 
 
 He did not speak loudly, but one of the men 
 looked round and said : " My son, put a little 
 wet sand often on your ancle-ring, when you 
 want it taken off." 
 
 The others laughed so much at this that Pho 
 Lone thought it wise to laugh also ; but as he 
 laughed, he shrank from these people, and forget- 
 ting his devotion to Boh Tah, wished with all his 
 heart he were at home with his mother. He felt 
 the stiff weals on his own back, and the thought 
 that these men might think he had been in gaol 
 and beaten, stung him with shame till he remem- 
 bered that his long hair proved him. Half uncon- 
 sciously he shook out his hair that it might be seen. 
 
 " Go, let us eat," said Shway Dway, " they call 
 that rice is ready." 
 
 Pho Lone went with him gladly ; the old man 
 had spent years in gaol but he had not the 
 prison taint like the others ; his jungle life had 
 purged it. 
 
 " I hope very much his lordship will not allow 
 any of these dogs to follow," he remarked as 
 Shway Dway showed him the house where the 
 men were gathering, " I think they are bad men." 
 
 " They have been caught," said Shway Dway ; 
 and Pho Lone had nothing more to say. 
 
 After eating, they slept until the shadows grew
 
 228 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 long, when Moung Toke sent men round to 
 announce that there was leave for all who would 
 to come and pay their respects to the Boh. All 
 the band went as a matter of course and sat round 
 to receive visitors. The village men seemed in 
 no haste to come, but after Shway Dway had 
 slipped quietly out for a few minutes and come in 
 again, seven men slouched in and sat on their 
 heels in the attitude of respect. 
 
 " These fine fellows pray for leave to follow 
 your lordship," said Shway Dway, speaking very 
 distinctly. 
 
 " His lordship orders me to say that he has 
 plenty of good men already," said Moung Toke. 
 
 The seven laughed, and sat still. 
 
 " They are very fine fellows," said Shway Dway, 
 " and friends of mine. I pray your lordship's 
 favour for them." 
 
 " What arms do they possess ? " the Boh asked 
 Moung Toke. 
 
 " Your lordship, each has a dah, very good and 
 sharp," said Shway Dway. 
 
 Boh Tah looked the seven over, one by one, 
 as they sat. 
 
 " Let them follow then," he said at last ; and 
 the band forthwith welcomed them as brothers. 
 
 " Does that fine young man also wish to follow ? " 
 asked Moung Toke, seeing somebody hanging 
 about outside. " Ho, neighbour ! do you desire 
 leave to follow ? "
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 229 
 
 For answer the man turned his back and pulling 
 down his pasoh from the waist, shouted, " I have 
 had enough." 
 
 " His lordship has a charm which will prevent 
 the worst flogging from giving pain," said Moung 
 Toke. " But none who follow so great a chief 
 will ever be in danger from mere police dogs." 
 
 " His lordship's followers can never be caught 
 or killed," cried all ; but the man outside laughed, 
 and strolled away, deaf to the jeers hurled after 
 him. 
 
 " Don't you try to escape from prison, neigh- 
 bour," grinned one of the new men to Pho Lone. 
 ." That man was flogged because he tried it." 
 
 " Friend ! " said Shway Dway dropping behind 
 the speaker. " You must treat this young man 
 with respect. He is the little chief." 
 
 " I did not know it," said the man anxiously, 
 as he shiko'd. "I beg your lordship's favour. 
 Will your lordship honour my poor house by 
 deigning to eat rice there when the sky shuts? 
 And will your lordship spread his sleeping mat on 
 the raised place ? " 
 
 The man spoke so respectfully that Pho Lone, 
 who had shrunk from him at first, smiled gra- 
 ciously and replied that he would eat and sleep in 
 his house ; whereat the man said the honour done 
 him was the very highest ; and he edged away 
 muttering that he must go and seek food proper 
 to place before a Boh.
 
 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " This young fellow also prays for your honour's 
 favour," said Shway Dway, indicating a man with 
 very short hair who crept forward and shiko'd. 
 Pho Lone recognised him as the one who had 
 offered advice about ancle rings, and looked him 
 down haughtily. 
 
 "The prayer of your lordship's servant is that 
 your honour will condescend to accept a small gift 
 at unworthy hands," whined the short-haired man. 
 " A silk kerchief to cover the head that is 
 sheltered by nine golden umbrellas." 
 
 " Bring it," said Pho Lone without looking at 
 him ; and the man crawled away, saying the 
 honour done him was far greater than he deserved. 
 
 " Little chief," said Shway Dway that night 
 as they lay down to sleep, " you will one day be 
 a great leader ; you know how to treat these dogs' 
 children."
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 
 BOH TAH had never concealed from his lieutenants 
 that he viewed with dislike the custom of dis- 
 persing at the approach of the rains, when it is no 
 longer possible to live in the jungles. The system, 
 in his judgment, was a bad one ; in the first place, 
 men were likely to be questioned concerning their 
 long absence by those prying dogs the patrol 
 policemen ; then there was the danger that men 
 might grow lazy and resume their old occupation 
 as cultivator or carpenter, or what not, and refuse 
 to follow again ; and, in any case, there was 
 always the delay in assembling them when the 
 fine weather returned, a delay which he had 
 known extend to several precious weeks. His 
 trouble hitherto had been the want of a place 
 where the band could dwell during the rainy 
 season ; but the discovery of Nyounglay dispelled 
 that difficulty in the happiest manner. Hence no 
 one was surprised when, on the morning after the 
 new followers had been enrolled, Moung Toke 
 came round and announced in each house where 
 men lay, that his lordship had bidden him make
 
 232 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 known that he should look with favour upon those 
 who, after the visit to Kyouksay, decided to con- 
 tinue with him during the rains at Nyounglay. 
 It might have been Moung Toke's own opinion 
 merely ; but he added that he understood it was 
 his lordship's intention not to divide the spoil 
 taken at Ladaw and what they expected at 
 Kyouksay until the rainy season was over, four 
 or five months hence. Anyhow, Moung Toke was 
 able to return to his lordship with the news that 
 all his followers begged leave to remain with 
 him. 
 
 " I am sorry," said Pho Lone to Moung Chaik 
 afterwards, " because I want to go home to my 
 old mother, and also to show the neighbours the 
 money and other property which falls to my 
 share. I know my mother wants very much to 
 see me." 
 
 " A Boh, little or great," said Shway Dway, 
 who squatted near, rolling a chew, " has neither 
 mother nor father nor relations." 
 
 "It is no use going to one's village empty- 
 handed," said Moung Chaik, " but I want to go 
 to mine because a very clever doctor lives there." 
 For Moung Chaik 's wound did not heal, and he 
 was growing thinner each day. 
 
 Pho Lone's disappointment was forgotten that 
 evening, for his lordship sent for him to receive a 
 loon pasoh, the uniform of a Boh. It was a very 
 line cloth of woven silk, and on Pho Lone's fine
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 233 
 
 figure showed well ; he walked up and down the 
 village wearing it till the sky shut. 
 
 The Boh did not give his men time to fret over 
 the arrangement : the next day, as it happened, 
 was a lucky one on which to begin a new enter- 
 prise, and orders were given to put the village 
 into a state of defence. Even those who most 
 wished to go home to their villages had to admit 
 that if they were to spend the rains with the chief 
 it would be hard to find a better place than 
 Nyounglay. No stockade was required, as the 
 dense thickets which clothed the hillsides were far 
 better protection from assault ; the path through 
 the jungle at the back wound up hill and down 
 through forest which grew darker and deeper as it 
 rolled away up to the hill-tops ; but whither it led, 
 after crossing the rill where the women drew 
 water, only the sambhur and leopard could tell. 
 All that had to be done to defend the village was 
 to block the path by which they had come, and 
 this Shway Dway undertook to do in half a day ; 
 he of all the band, save Moung Toke, was really 
 glad to stay at the Boh's bidding, for he was more 
 at home in Nyounglay than in any other village. 
 
 " How will you block the path so quickly ? " 
 asked Pho Lone. 
 
 " Is there not a cart over there under that house, 
 little chief? Yes, it is very old, and broken as to 
 the sides, but the wheels are sound ; we only want 
 those wheels and a few bamboos."
 
 234 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Pho Lone had not thought of the wheels : they 
 were great heavy, solid things, more like mill- 
 stones than wheels, with two holes shaped like 
 new moons in the centre to receive the split axle. 
 Now Shway Dway mentioned it, he remembered 
 having heard how dacoits had held the police at 
 bay for days on a narrow path blocked by a cart- 
 wheel, and scarcely required Shway Dway's ex- 
 planation, which he gave, when one wheel had 
 been rolled halfway down the hill, and braced 
 with bamboos across the path. 
 
 " See, now, little chief, two men can sit behind 
 it thus ; and being unseen themselves keep watch 
 through the axle holes. Then, if an enemy comes 
 you wait till he is quite close, and putting your 
 gun through the hole shoot him, poung ! " 
 
 " No policeman would come near when he saw 
 the gun muzzle peeping through," said Pho Lone, 
 levelling the Boh's gun and aiming through an 
 axle hole. " How could he, I being able to shoot 
 him dead ? " 
 
 Shway Dway got up, laughing a little. 
 
 " Last time I was taken no, the last time but 
 one, I sat behind a wheel on the jungle path 
 waiting to fight police. When I had fired one 
 shot the black dogs would not come on ; but the 
 little officer, finding the jungle too thick, came all 
 alone, jumping like a deer as he ran, and though 
 I fired again, jumped right over the wheel upon 
 my back. Thus I was made prisoner." And
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 235 
 
 Shway Dway added, as if to himself, " That time, 
 five years." 
 
 Pho Lone stood up and looked over the wheel 
 down the steep path ending in bushes a bow- 
 shot below. " No white officer could run up here 
 if I sat behind with the gun," he said. " He must 
 be shot." 
 
 " We have chosen a very good place, little 
 chief ; but go ! there is yet another wheel to be 
 set in a place not yet chosen, and much more to do 
 besides." 
 
 The sun was high when the second wheel had 
 been fixed, and they returned to the village. 
 Many of the band sat in the verandahs working 
 with dahs at bamboo stakes. Pho Lone disdained 
 to ask questions before the new followers, but 
 Moung Toke seized such a chance of giving him 
 instruction, and Pho Lone lay down with his eyes 
 shut pretending not to listen, though what Moung 
 Toke had to tell was very interesting. 
 
 " Learn to make foot-traps, my son," said Moung 
 Toke, " they are very good to defend a path, 
 particularly at night when the policemen cannot 
 see where they tread. You take a bamboo, 
 thicker than one's thumb, and about one cubit 
 long ; one end you make very sharp, like a pen, 
 thus. Then you dig a hole in the path and plant 
 the bamboo very firmly with the point a fingers' 
 breadth below the level of the ground, and fill up 
 the hole lightly with earth. You see ? "
 
 236 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " It would go through the foot that trod upon 
 the point," said Pho Lone, sitting up and pressing 
 the sharpened end on his hand. 
 
 " Yes ; I, lying hid in the jungle close by, have 
 seen a policeman fall with his foot pierced 
 through," said Moung Toke, as he delicately 
 finished off another stake. 
 
 " Would it go through the boots an officer 
 wears ? " asked one of the new men. 
 
 " It will pierce the boot a white man wears 
 when he wishes to move very silently," said 
 Moung Toke. " I have heard of one officer who 
 was thus lamed for many months." 
 
 " I know what kind of boot that is," struck in 
 Pho Lone. " I have seen the merchants wear 
 them when they played a running-about game 
 with a ball over a little net." 
 
 " I daresay they use them for that purpose too," 
 said Moung Toke, " but I think their proper use is 
 to wear when in the jungles shooting deer." 
 
 " Or men," said Shway Dway in a tone which 
 made the rest laugh. 
 
 It seemed as though Boh Tah expected the 
 police to hunt him, for besides arranging defences 
 on the village path he commanded that thorn 
 balls should be prepared in readiness for the 
 retreat from Kyouksay. 
 
 " Why does his lordship give this order ? " asked 
 Shway Dway; "is there a bad omen for the 
 attack ? "
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 237 
 
 Moung Toke had not heard so ; but his lordship 
 was unlucky enough this afternoon to forget that 
 the day was Wednesday and attended to his 
 finger nails, which needed cutting. It was a pity ; 
 but the mischief was done now. 
 
 Shway Dway really would not have believed so 
 good a chief could do such a foolish thing. Every 
 child knew that to trim the nails on Wednesday 
 would bring trouble upon him either through his 
 own fault or that of some one else. It was the 
 very worst day of the week to choose for this 
 purpose. 
 
 " His lordship's nails were very long," said 
 Moung Toke, " but " 
 
 " Then why could he not have cut them yester- 
 day," interrupted Shway Dway ; " what more 
 propitious day for nail-cutting than Tuesday ? " 
 
 " Yes, that is true," said Moung Toke ; " Cut 
 the nails on Tuesday and live happily a hundred 
 years. It was very unlucky," he added, tossing his 
 cheroot butt out on the road. " His lordship says 
 nothing, but I think he is sorry, and fears lest 
 trouble follow : upon that account he gives the 
 order to prepare thorn balls ; we had best send 
 people at once to the jungle to bring a great 
 quantity of thorn-threads, it being the order that 
 we march to-morrow." 
 
 One finds in the jungle, very plentifully in some 
 places, a climbing plant which drops from the 
 trees long tough tendrils like thin string set at
 
 238 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 . every finger's length with strong thorns in groups 
 of three ; these are very troublesome, for they 
 catch one's arm or neck and whip round, tearing 
 the skin ; but they are useful to make balls to 
 lame the police. 
 
 At Moung Toke's request Pho Lone went out 
 into the village and ordered women and boys to 
 go and bring in thorn threads, threatening them 
 with the Boh's displeasure if they failed to bring 
 enough ; and as the displeasure of a Boh usually 
 takes a very painful shape, all hastened to obey. 
 Afterwards they wished they had refused ; for 
 when they brought in the tendrils gathered at the 
 cost of many scratches, Moung Toke ordered them 
 to set to work at once and twist the thorn threads 
 into balls the size of a hen's egg ; whence were 
 many sore fingers among the Nyounglay women 
 that niofht. However it was done, and soon after 
 
 o 
 
 evening rice, an old woman, with blood dripping 
 from every finger, brought to the house where 
 Moung Toke slept a large kerchief full of 
 thorn balls, which she laid before him praying 
 in her heart that he might tread upon them 
 himself. 
 
 It was only two days march to Kyouksay by the 
 direct path, but it was impossible to go straight 
 there, because Kyouksay lies due south of Nyoun- 
 glay, and it is not at all advisable to march due 
 south in the month of May, the dragon's head 
 being on the west of the Meroo mountain and
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 239 
 
 therefore pointing north.* Boh Tah, therefore, 
 when he reached the foot of Nyounglay Hill, 
 skirted round it and bade a son of the village 
 show a path through the jungle towards the 
 
 * Burmese mythology is entangled in a peculiar and slightly 
 inconvenient way with geography as taught by Burmese science. 
 The scheme of the universe is charmingly simple in its sym- 
 metry ; this world consists of four large circular islands grouped 
 round the Meroo Mountain which rises from the sea in the 
 shape of a sugar-loaf. There are also one thousand more small 
 islands, five oceans, five large, and five hundred small rivers, 
 whose positions have not, I believe, been fixed with any preci- 
 sion, but which are not involved in the important matter under 
 notice. Which is this : In the sea at the base of Mount Meroo 
 lies a great dragon whose length is three-fourths the circum- 
 ference of the mountain. This dragon's influence on the in- 
 habitants of the four islands is mysterious and powerful, so 
 that if you wish to enjoy good health and freedom from acci- 
 dent, disease and other ills, you must never journey towards 
 the dragon's mouth. Fortunately his movements are as regular 
 as those of the sun and very much better understood, so there 
 is no excuse for your marching towards his mouth by mistake. 
 During the first three months of the Burmese year March to 
 May inclusive his head is on the west of the mountain, point- 
 ing north ; and as he moves (in the direction of the hands of n 
 watch) one quarter round the mountain every three months, 
 so completing the circuit in a year, one always knows in what 
 direction it is bad to travel ; and if you happen to be a native 
 of the Western Island which contains Europe, where these im- 
 portant matters are not properly understood, you may be sure 
 that when you travel in Burma, which lies in the South Island, 
 the better-informed people of that country will not let you go 
 wrong if they have to accompany you. In the circumstances, 
 Boh Tab's choice of route, forty miles along one side of a tri- 
 angle and forty along the other to avoid going fifty miles on
 
 240 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 south-east. It was broad day when they started, 
 and by the time they reached the shade every 
 man was wet as though he had swum the creek, 
 though none carried more than his dah or spear ; 
 rice, sleeping mats, and other things being packed 
 on the elephant. Moung Sin,* one of the Nyoun- 
 glay sons, said he was the follower of his good 
 namesake, who carried the poor man's food, and 
 not of the Boh, who shouted " Go, go ! " when- 
 ever a fellow sat down to rest ; for the Nyoun- 
 glay men had not been in the jungle before this 
 year, and the soul of Moung Toke was vexed 
 within him that he must spare the spear shaft on 
 those who lagged, and drive only with his tongue. 
 He was tired out with running back to urge up 
 stragglers who only laughed when he spoke of his 
 lordship's anger. 
 
 " Why walk so fast ? " the dawdler would ask. 
 " Does his lordship eat rice in the police thannah 
 on a certain day ? " 
 
 " His lordship desires haste, that we may 
 return before the rains come," Moung Toke re- 
 plied patiently, though his fingers tingled to strike. 
 
 " Surely so great a sayah will bid the rains hold 
 off for a day or two. I follow, friend, when I have 
 drunk yet a little more smoke." 
 
 a base line due south, was therefore as natural as would be an 
 Englishman's preference for a ford a hundred yards out of his 
 way to wading a torrent up to his saddle bow. 
 * Moung Sin = Mr. Elephant.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 241 
 
 The Boh had ordered patience with the new 
 followers, but he also was angry when the doves' 
 cooing told it was time to halt for the night, and 
 they had come but half a day's march. 
 
 " I think it would be very good if your lordship 
 commanded that I hang one of them by the feet 
 for the night," said Moung Toke. " The youth 
 Pho Let is weak and rather ill with fever, and 
 upon that account is not much use to us. Shall 
 we punish him ? " 
 
 " If we journeyed in a boat so that it were more 
 dim cult to escape," said the Boh, " I would give 
 order, ' take the weakly youth and cut him slowly 
 in pieces from the feet up.' But these Nyounglay 
 sons have but lately come out of prison and having 
 done nothing since need not fear the police. 
 Were we to beat one, all would run away and 
 perhaps might lay information against us." 
 
 Moung Toke said his lordship's wisdom gave 
 light even as the sun by day and the moon and 
 stars by night. 
 
 " Nevertheless we cannot march again as we 
 have done to-day," continued Boh Tah, " is there 
 none among my own followers who may be 
 punished for the others to see ? There is that 
 wounded man ; he grows weaker each day and I 
 think will die very soon. Also he fell behind 
 often to-day. Beat him very severely because he 
 did this." 
 
 Moung Chaik ate no rice that evening ; when
 
 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 they untied his hands and legs from the tree, they 
 had to drag him to his mat, where he lay on his 
 face, while the blood dried on the ground about 
 him and the great red ants swarmed on his back. 
 Many times he cried for water but none dared 
 give it while Moung Toke was by. The Nyoun- 
 glay men spoke very little after eating, and slept 
 early, unrolling their mats as far from Moung 
 Chaik as they could. Moung Toke and the Boh 
 sat apart talking in low tones till the moon was 
 high ; nobody spoke much till they parted and lay 
 down to sleep. 
 
 " I have never seen a man so beaten," Pho 
 Lone whispered to Shway Dway, " I think he 
 will die." 
 
 " Having bled a great deal he will certainly 
 die, being ill with fever before," replied Shway 
 Dway. " Moung Toke's arms must be tired I 
 think." 
 
 Shway Dway yawned, and presently slept ; but 
 Pho Lone lay watching the bright moon and 
 listening to Moung Chaik's moans. When the 
 beaten man cried for water again, Pho Lone sat 
 up, and having made sure that the Boh and 
 Moung Toke were asleep, rose and filled a cocoa- 
 nut shell for him. 
 
 " You are going to die, neighbour," he said, as 
 he held the shell to Moung Chaik's mouth. 
 
 " Yes, I shall die very soon," replied Moung 
 Chaik. " Give more water."
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 243 
 
 Pho Lone brought it, and squatting, tried to 
 brush the swarming ants from Moung Chaik's 
 stiffening wounds ; but he groaned so much with 
 the pain that the men about began to stir. 
 
 " I will make the Offering for you," said Pho 
 Lone, in a hurried whisper. " If you die before 
 we march I will perform the offices." 
 
 " It is good of you, neighbour. I shall certainly 
 die before the second crowing of the cock. Sooner, 
 because the ants eat into my inside." 
 
 There was a little movement in the darkness 
 where Moung Toke lay ; the mosquitoes sang 
 loud in the still hot night, perhaps they had dis- 
 turbed him. 
 
 " I go," said Pho Lone, when all was quiet 
 again ; and he stole warily across the glade to his 
 own mat, to pick the ants from his toes before he 
 lay down again. 
 
 Moung Chaik cried once more for water, and 
 this time the answer came from Moung Toke, 
 " Silence, dog ! or I kill you in the morning." 
 
 But when morning came the vultures were 
 already wheeling overhead, so low you might 
 count the wing feathers ; and the flies buzzed, a 
 shining swarm, over Moung Chaik's body, as he 
 lay, on his back now, his teeth bared in a grin of 
 pain. 
 
 " Hasten now," cried Moung Toke, " we march 
 before eating." 
 
 " The man is dead," said Moung Sin, from the
 
 244 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 group squatting round Moung Chaik. " Mother ! 
 how much blood ! " 
 
 " What of that ? Do not all men die ? Go ! 
 He died of being too slow, friends. Leave him to 
 the birds and dogs to bury, and help load the 
 elephant." 
 
 They got up and obeyed, working as usual with 
 talk and laughter ; but Boh Tah noticed that they 
 moved quickly and told Moung Toke he had done 
 well. In a betel chew all was ready and Bah Chet 
 led the way on the elephant. 
 
 " March forward, little chief," said Moung Toke, 
 seeing that Pho Lone lingered. " See, all are 
 now on the path." 
 
 " I follow quickly, friend ; I have forgotten 
 something." 
 
 Moung Toke, in good humour, though his arms 
 were stiff, turned and followed the last man, while 
 Pho Lone ran back to the camping-place and 
 squatting by Moung Chaik' s body, drew out his 
 betel box, and pressed a nut carefully over the 
 swollen tongue into the dead mouth. 
 
 " For the Ferry, for the Ferry," he muttered. 
 Then he rose and drew off the silk head-kerchief 
 which the new follower had given him at 
 Nyounglay, looking round for a convenient 
 bough. 
 
 " That will do," he said to himself, and hastily 
 tied the bright kerchief by the corner. " Great 
 Lord, Great Lord ! " he whispered, shikoing at each
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 245 
 
 word ; and turning, he sped like a deer after the 
 band. 
 
 " I know why you went back," said Shway 
 Dway, when the Boh ordered them to halt for 
 rice near mid-day. " You went to make an offer- 
 ing to the spirits of the jungle." 
 
 " Yes, yes ; but say nothing ; his lordship might 
 be very angry." 
 
 " It will be reckoned to you for Merit," said 
 Shway Dway, thoughtfully. " May I find a 
 friend to do it for me should I die like a dog 
 in the forest." 
 
 " Have these fellows been marching better ? 
 asked Pho Lone in a loud voice, for Moung Toke 
 had come up, and sat by them. 
 
 " The last came in a bamboo's length from the 
 first," replied Shway Dway, " they learned some- 
 thing last night ; did they not, neighbour ? " 
 
 " I taught them," said Moung Toke ; " we shall 
 reach Kyouksay in five days after all, I think." 
 
 The shade was so deep that they could march 
 all day, and the Boh did not allow much time for 
 eating rice. Indeed the men had hardly time to 
 get water to drink before he called to Moung Toke 
 to make ready for the start again. 
 
 " Give me a chew," said Moung Toke, rising and 
 holding out his hand to Pho Lone, " my box is 
 empty." 
 
 " So is mine," sighed Pho Lone. " Nothing left 
 but a leaf or two and the cutter."
 
 CHAPTER XIV 
 
 " No," said the Boh, "it is not good to attack with 
 shouting." 
 
 Pho Lone shiko'd and drew back into his place 
 among those who sat in respectful silence near 
 his lordship's mat. The Boh had given audience 
 to such of his men who knew Kyouksay village 
 and could say how much money might be expected 
 there ; and when Pho Lone and Moung Sin of 
 Nyounglay had spoken he had been gracious 
 enough to say that if any follower wished to offer 
 council, concerning the best mode of attack, his 
 ears were open to hear. Moung Toke and the 
 others merely expressed their confidence in the 
 wisdom and magical powers of his lordship, and 
 were a little surprised at Pho Lone's boldness 
 when, receiving leave to speak, he urged the same 
 tactics as his lordship had ordered at Ladaw. 
 The Boh was not angry with the young man ; 
 on the contrary, he accepted his words as a 
 tribute to the wisdom of the commands 
 which had brought success at Ladaw ; but his 
 tone proved that his mind was quite mnde up,
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 247 
 
 and the men of any experience at all agreed with 
 him. 
 
 Moung Sin, indeed, had said, "that place 
 cannot be rushed by day," the moment the band 
 came out of the jungle into the sun glare, and saw 
 the Kyouksay paddy land stretching far on either 
 hand to the river on whose bank the village stood. 
 There were trees about the houses of course ; but 
 for a gun-shot all round neither clump nor bush 
 gave cover. Any but a very young dacoit, like 
 Pho Lone, could see at once that the Kyouk- 
 say head-man with his gun would shoot every 
 man of the band while they were crossing the 
 open. They eyed the village hungrily as from 
 noon to sunset they skirted the paddy plain, 
 keeping just within the jungle for shade and con- 
 cealment ; for, as Shway Dway said, " So much 
 good land means plenty of rupees for us." 
 
 The moon was high now ; sitting there round 
 the Boh's mat they could hear the village dogs 
 baying, and through the trees see the faint glow 
 of house lamps to remind them that they must 
 light no fire. The tide was running up, and many 
 paddy boats were creaking by, some near the 
 bank, others far out to get the strength of the 
 flood. The song of the rowers rang clear across 
 the dark water, and loudest the voices of Karens, 
 who could be known by the tunes they sang. 
 Shway Dway, who knew a great deal, said the 
 Karens sang English prayer-songs.
 
 248 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " These Karen dogs sing thus because they 
 receive Government guns on the word of their 
 sayahs," said the Boh, hearing his follower's 
 words. 
 
 " Lord ! " said everybody, shikoing. 
 
 " Would the sons of jungle-dogs be Klistan if 
 they got no reward ? " demanded the Boh, as 
 though somebody had contradicted him ; and all 
 made answer, " Lord, never ! " Shway Dway 
 joined in the reply as a matter of form. He knew 
 many Karen people, and did not like them ; but 
 he did not believe that they turned Christians 
 merely to get Government guns ; more likely they 
 wanted Government appointments. His lordship 
 now said that his followers had permission to go ; 
 so all shiko'd, and returned along the bank over- 
 hanging the water to the spot where they lay 
 smoking and chewing. It was good to lie there 
 in the moonlight, enjoying the soft night wind 
 from the river, for they had marched far that day 
 and were tired. The Nyounglay men had needed 
 no driving since they saw Moung Chaik beaten to 
 death, and the Boh had been pleased to tell 
 Moung Sin that the new followers should receive 
 a full share of the goods taken at Kyouksay and 
 at any other villages they might visit before the 
 rains brought the season's work to a close. 
 
 They were telling stories of the great deeds 
 they had done in the past and meant to do again 
 to-morrow, when his lordship was heard calling
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 249 
 
 from the darkness of the jungle, where he sat 
 alone ; and Moung Toke presently came to sum- 
 mon Pho Lone to the Presence. 
 
 " My order is this," said the Boh, " the gun 
 belonging to the head-man of this village must be 
 taken before I order the attack, or how shall my 
 followers escape being shot ? The Myothit son, 
 being a friend of the head-man, shall go and 
 demand the un." 
 
 o 
 
 " Good," murmured Moung Toke, " very good. 
 What wisdom ! " 
 
 But Pho Lone did not think the plan a good one. 
 
 " Lord ! " he said, "I do your lordship's com- 
 mands. But Moung Hla will certainly shoot me." 
 
 " Why should he shoot you, his friend ? " de- 
 manded Moung Toke. 
 
 " I think," said Pho Lone, drawing on the 
 ground with his finger, "if I came from my father's 
 boat, saying, ' Lend me your gun, neighbour.' 
 Moung Hla would refuse, saying, 'It is against the 
 order of Government.' Moreover, all the country 
 side knows by this time that I am the follower of 
 his lordship, wherefore Moung Hla would laugh 
 at me demanding the gun." 
 
 " True," said the Boh, half aloud. " Of course 
 all the world knows he is my follower." 
 
 There was silence for a few breaths, and then 
 Moung Toke begged leave to suggest that the 
 Myothit son should take his lordship's gun and 
 shoot Moung Hla to-night as he lay asleep.
 
 250 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " I wish the gun to be taken to-night, but it 
 must be done quietly," said the Boh, " otherwise 
 the people, being frightened, will gather their 
 property and run away to hide. Also, many 
 boats are passing on the river ; some, as we hear 
 by their songs, being Karens, who may have guns." 
 
 " Such wisdom ! " exclaimed Moung Toke. 
 
 There was another silence while the Boh drank 
 smoke, and thought. Presently a plan came to 
 him. 
 
 " Listen, O Myothit son ! you shall take a spear, 
 very long and sharp, and go quietly to the village 
 to-night : the head-man will be lying asleep in his 
 house, and you shall kill him with a thrust through 
 the bamboos of the floor. Then, when much blood 
 falls, you will know he is killed and can go in and 
 carry away his gun." 
 
 "Your lordship's words are commands," said 
 Pho Lone, "but I cannot do this." 
 
 The Boh was too astonished to speak. He took 
 his cheroot from his mouth and stared, first at the 
 rebel, then at Moung Toke, and back at Pho Lone 
 again. 
 
 " Why can you not do this ? " demanded Moung 
 Toke. " You know the man's house." 
 
 " Yes, I have eaten rice 3 with him many times, 
 
 i " 
 
 but 
 
 " You know where the man spreads his mat." 
 " My father and I have slept many times in 
 the room, but "
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 251 
 
 " Then you know exactly where to thrust 
 through the floor." 
 
 " You do not let me speak," whined Pho Lone, 
 for the Boh's brow was growing darker and darker. 
 " I cannot do this because the floor of Moung 
 Hla's sleeping-room is made of jungle wood boards, 
 and not of bamboos. No spear could kill through 
 thick boards." 
 
 " Well, that is unfortunate," said Moung Toke ; 
 "I never thought that the floor might be of 
 boards. Nor did his lordship, who graciously 
 proposed this plan for your guidance." 
 
 " I am sorry to hear what you say," said the 
 Boh. " I think you must go into the room and 
 kill the head-man." 
 
 Pho Lone would certainly try and do this ; but 
 to his certain knowledge Moung Hla had very 
 excellent charms against death in all shapes ; he 
 had seen him try to stab his own arm and leg 
 with an English knife bought in the bazaar, and 
 the point turned on the flesh as on a stone. Many 
 men were present to see that wonderful thing. 
 He feared lest Moung Hla should awaken and 
 shoot him before he could be killed, when the 
 poung ! would cause that very noise which his 
 lordship's wisdom wished to avoid. Besides, 
 Moung Hla made a practice of wadding his 
 gun with shreds of his wife's old tamein, 
 and the very best charms against gunshot 
 Pho Lone stopped suddenly, for the moonlight
 
 252 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 showed that in his lordship's face which dried 
 up speech. 
 
 " Shall such means destroy the virtue of charms 
 given by the hand of his lordship ? " inquired 
 Moung Toke, after an awful silence. 
 
 The Boh said nothing ; but his terrible stare 
 made Pho Lone gather himself into an attitude of 
 the profoundest respect. 
 
 " By his lordship's gracious leave," he began, 
 but his lips trembled so that he could hardly 
 speak the words. " What I would have said was 
 this : that the dog's son, Moung Hla, is a strong 
 man, and so rash that he will certainly shoot 
 when he is attacked. If he will shoot at his 
 lordship, upon whose skin bullets flatten like 
 water-drops and whose hands catch bullets like 
 falling leaves, who shall venture to take him 
 alone ? If it be his lordship's command, his 
 lordship's slave awaits his order to go and kill 
 Moung Hla." 
 
 The Boh spoke in a low tone to Moung Toke, 
 and it was from his mouth that Pho Lone received 
 orders, showing that his lordship had withdrawn 
 his favour. 
 
 " It is commanded that you go now, and, seeking 
 out a very safe place, cause a very deep hiding- 
 hole to be dug." 
 
 " An arm's depth," said the Boh. 
 
 " A long arm's depth," said Moung Toke. 
 
 " Behind a tree," added the Boh.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 253 
 
 " Behind a great tree," continued Moung Toke. 
 
 All slept very lightly that night, for when the 
 tide ebbed it brought down many empty boats, 
 whose rowers sang loudly, and often swept so 
 close by the bank that the more cautious followers 
 braved the mosquitoes and still heat of the jungle, 
 preferring to hide under the bushes than lie out 
 in the open where the cool breeze fanned their 
 weary bodies, but where the boat people might 
 see them and tell the police. The men on whom 
 was conferred the honour of digging the hiding 
 hole did not lie down till the moon was sinking, 
 for each passing boat bade them cease work lest the 
 strokes of their tools should be heard. Whether 
 digging or resting they looked round often and 
 fearfully ; for all his lordship's magic, the gloom 
 might hide offended ghouls and goblins which 
 would pounce suddenly from above to tear them 
 limb from limb. 
 
 Hence, when Moung Toke awoke a little before 
 the dawn he found the whole band sitting up, 
 scratching their mosquito bites and yawning. 
 
 " Bring rope from the elephant gear," he said, 
 " and listen. Bah Chet will carry the rope and 
 march behind me, Shway Dway will take the 
 bag of thorn balls, and all will follow with closed 
 mouths. The order is to enter the village silently, 
 as jungle dogs track deer, that we may find the 
 head-man sleeping. We shall bind him and bring 
 him away as a hostage until the followers have
 
 254 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 taken all they can find and have brought the booty 
 here to place upon the elephant." 
 
 " I think the omens are bad," said Pho Lone to 
 Shway Dway. 
 
 ShwayDway thought so himself, but it did not 
 seem good to admit it. So he merely answered 
 that it would be wise of the little chief to lead 
 swiftly to the head-man's house and get the 
 business over. 
 
 After dwelling so long in the jungle Pho Lone 
 shivered when he found himself out on the open 
 kwins far from shelter, and at every step he 
 stared round fearful of being seen. It seemed a 
 great way to the village, and indeed the dawn 
 light was in the eastern sky when the houses 
 gave back the echo of their feet. How the dogs 
 howled as they rushed down the street ! Pho 
 Lone's heart beat his ribs as he ran. 
 
 " The house ! " he gasped, pointing ; and Moung 
 Toke, calling " Follow ! " jumped on the low 
 verandah. The house, of course, was open, the 
 nights being so hot, and as the men sprang in a 
 figure lurched up from a mat spread on the lower 
 floor, asking sleepily, who came. For answer a 
 dozen men threw themselves upon Moung Hla 
 and held him to be bound, threatening death and 
 torture if he resisted. 
 
 Moung Hla was rash, and also very strong. 
 He fought hard and so fiercely that Pho Lone, 
 who had remained outside lest he should be
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 255 
 
 recognised, thought what excellent charms he 
 must have. But one man cannot fight twelve, 
 and presently the struggling throng stood round 
 to jeer at their prisoner lying with arms and legs 
 tied. 
 
 " Well, then ? " panted Moung Hla, glaring at 
 them, " well, then ? " 
 
 " Give up your gun, dog's son," said Moung 
 Toke. " Where shall I find it ? " 
 
 Moung Hla raised his head and stared at him. 
 The day was brightening, and it was light enough 
 now to learn a face. 
 
 "Answer quickly," shouted Moung Toke, jabbing 
 the tied arms with his spear. 
 
 " In the sleeping-room," said Moung Hla, jerking 
 his head. 
 
 Seeing that men stood all round the prisoner, 
 Pho Lone stepped into the house and stole quietly 
 across the floor to the ladder. He wanted to get 
 the business over as quickly as possible, and was 
 also anxious to draw the charge from Moung Hla's 
 gun. He was particularly afraid of Moung Hla's 
 gun, for the scraps of his wife's old tamein, which 
 he used for wadding, were quite enough to destroy 
 the best charm against gun-shot. 
 
 He glided up the steps, followed by Moung 
 Toke and others, and pushed the creaking mat- 
 door back. There was one small window on the 
 floor level, but Mah Hlaing, the headman's wife, 
 spread her mat there for the air, and the dingy
 
 256 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 old cotton mosquito net, hanging tent-wise over 
 her, shut out what light there was. Mah Hlaing 
 sat up and screamed as the men came in. 
 
 "We have faggots and kerosene oil for scream- 
 ing women/' said Moung Toke, turning on her 
 fiercely. The threat did its work ; Mah Hlaing 
 had heard of women being burned alive by 
 dacoits ; she stopped screaming, and wept. 
 
 But the men were turning the room upside 
 down as they groped about for the gun, and 
 presently the splintering crash told Mah Hlaing 
 that they were breaking open the big teak box 
 where the money was. She screamed again. Pho 
 Lone saw the light glint on the spear as Moung 
 Toke made his thrust, and Mah Hlaing's scream 
 died in a choking groan, as the blood spurted 
 from her neck, and splattered on the floor. 
 
 The sun broke pale over the far horizon across 
 the river, and looked in at the window ; the fan 
 leaf of a young toddy palm trembled as it threw 
 shade to hide the heap below the bloody mosquito 
 net ; but the sun rose higher, and played brightly 
 on the mat wall, flooding the room with light. 
 
 " Here it is ! " cried Moung Toke in triumph, as 
 he snatched up the gun, and shook it over his 
 head. "Go quickly now." 
 
 The crows were beginning to flutter and croak 
 as the men poured down the ladder. Moung Hla 
 lay where they had left him, and smiled as they 
 came. Moung Toke saw it, and stopped short.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 257 
 
 " Listen ! " he said. " What is that noise ? " 
 
 All held their breath. The crows chattered, 
 and the pariahs growled over something they 
 lapped below the sleeping-room. Moung Hla lay 
 still, and smiled. 
 
 "It is like the sound of a mill when one is far 
 away," said Pho Lone. 
 
 Moung Toke pushed him aside, and stepped 
 down into the street, to peer between the houses 
 over the river. 
 
 In the silence, the drip from the sleeping-room 
 floor and the lapping of dogs' tongues was loud. 
 Moung Hla heard it and laughed, but his laugh 
 was not good to hear. The hum seemed drawing 
 nearer, and the men strained their ears to listen, 
 hardly daring to meet each other's eyes. Moung 
 Hla, with his arms bound so tightly that the 
 flesh swelled purple between the ropes, listened 
 also. 
 
 " The little police fire-ship comes down the 
 river from the town," he said. 
 
 Moung Toke, crouching outside to peer between 
 the houses, heard his words, and dashed off down 
 the street, while the rest fell over each other in 
 their haste to get away. 
 
 Pho Lone led, his eyes staring in sheer terror. 
 He heard only the scuffling whisper of feet and 
 laboured breathing behind him, but soon he felt 
 that the hum was growing louder ; and as the 
 band faced the open kwins, Shway Dway cried
 
 258 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 that the launch came up the river, not down, and 
 cursed Moung Hla for a liar. 
 
 " What shall we do ? " asked Pho Lone, crying. 
 " See ! the village people wait over there to kill 
 us, and we cannot hide in the houses." 
 
 Shway Dway glanced to the right, and saw 
 that the coming of the launch had given the 
 village men courage ; to the left, and saw the 
 launch cutting the brown water into fans from 
 its bow. He said no word, but started to run 
 straight for the jungle, whence they had come at 
 dawn, while the village men shouted, and the 
 launch swooped round in a swirling froth, to run 
 in under the bank. Pho Lone dropped the Boh's 
 gun, and ran for his life, jumping the bunds, 
 which cut the plain at every stone's throw, like 
 a stag. A splashing, the rustle of withered grass, 
 and a bow-shot on the left rifle-barrels glittered, 
 and policemen rose over the crest of the bank. 
 Pho Lone felt his knees weak, but he flew on, 
 sobbing. He heard an English voice say one 
 word, and there was the clack of breech-blocks ; 
 one more word, and his back-bone turned to 
 water, for a ragged volley burst, and bullets 
 whizzed by, the hard earth spitting dust at his 
 feet. Behind, he heard a fall and a scream, and 
 a smothered curse as another stumbled. Pho 
 Lone's eyes started from his head as he ran, for 
 more bullets came, kicking up dirt about his legs. 
 But the jungle was near now, and he could see
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 259 
 
 the path like a slit in the trees. Only one more 
 bund to jump. He gathered himself, and sprang 
 clear over into a mud hole that took him nearly 
 to the waist. It was a buffalo-wallow ; and his 
 heart-strings cracked as the band sped by. He 
 was out now, and flying again, for the fire was 
 hot, and he knew the police were shooting at 
 him ; each poung ! went through him, but he was 
 not touched. The men in front were closing on 
 the path, and struggling, as they wedged their 
 way in ; he heard a crack, as though a dog bit 
 bone, and saw Moung Toke fall against the 
 bushes, while the police shouted. Moung Toke 
 yelled, and clutched at the men, so that he was 
 carried on a little by the rush ; but his leg was 
 smashed below the knee, and he fell again, 
 screaming, for the bullets came ripping through 
 the trees, bringing down leaves like raindrops 
 from a rope. 
 
 " Throw him aside ! " called Shway Dway, for 
 Moung Toke's struggles blocked the path. 
 " Throw him aside, and run." 
 
 Moung Toke shrieked that he would kill the 
 man who touched him, but the hustling carried 
 him off his one foot, and he fell again, howling. 
 
 Shway Dway backed into the bushes off the 
 path, and squatted to open his bag of thorn- 
 balls. 
 
 " Pass on," he cried, " go quickly ! Who follows 
 me needs iron feet."
 
 260 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 The path was clear now ; the men strung out, 
 and soon the patter of feet told how they raced 
 along its windings. 
 
 " Stop, little chief," said Shway Dway, as Pho 
 Lone hurried by. " Stop ! the police dogs will 
 not come quickly into this jungle." 
 
 He opened his bag, gingerly drew out thorn- 
 balls, and shook them from his fingers on the 
 path as he walked. Moung Toke, lying hid a 
 few steps on, groaned. Shway Dway looked up, 
 set his bag carefully on the ground, and let the 
 dah-loop on his shoulder run down his arm. 
 Moung Toke, watching him, ceased groaning and 
 his face, drawn with pain, grew grey as Shway 
 Dway gripped his weapon. Neither spoke. Moung 
 Toke pressed his hands together, and made as if 
 to rise, but Shway Dway, leaning over, reached 
 for his long hair, and drew him out on the path. 
 Moung Toke's arms went up, but the flat of the 
 dah pressed them down, as Shway Dway squatted. 
 A feint for aim, a stroke with all the strength of 
 Shway Dway's arm, and there was that between 
 Moung Toke's quivering shoulders which hurt the 
 eyes to see. 
 
 " Carry that with you, my son," said Shway 
 Dway, bowling the head in a whirl of hair 
 and blood, " and now run, for the police dogs 
 come." 
 
 Pho Lone snatched it up by the hair and ran, 
 the blood whisking as it spun against his legs.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 261 
 
 Shway Dway came behind, scattering thorn-balls, 
 and chuckled when he heard the police calling 
 that the wounded man was of no more use to 
 give information than the dead one out on the 
 fields.
 
 CHAPTER XV 
 
 THE shadows were drawing out, and one by one 
 the men who had spent the day helping to build 
 Mah Hehn's new kyoung dropped off and sat 
 down in the shade, until Moung Maw was left 
 alone measuring and sawing planks. The air was 
 so still that never a leaf stirred ; the cheroot 
 smoke floated up in blue wisps to melt away in 
 the foliage overhead, and the screeching of the 
 carpenter's saw was the only sound to be heard in 
 all the village ; for in these last and hottest days 
 of the hot season most people slept till sunset. 
 
 " Soon the rain will come," said Moung Byoo. 
 " It will be good to have the rains." 
 
 Somebody made this remark every evening, 
 and, as usual, every one said slowly, " Yes, it will 
 be good." 
 
 They sat there nursing their knees until Moung 
 Maw, having sawn the last board, stretched his 
 back and threw down his tool with a grunt of 
 content. He had been working hard all day. 
 
 " Do you think we shall finish to-morrow, 
 neighbour ? " asked Moung Byoo, as Moung Maw
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 263 
 
 stepped over the litter of wood scraps and joined 
 the rest. 
 
 " Without doubt," replied the carpenter, survey- 
 ing his work with pride. " I said the monastery 
 should be finished before the monsoon came, and 
 it is done all but a few hours work." 
 
 " There is not another carpenter on the creek 
 who could make such a kyoung," said Ko Moung 
 Galay, rising. 
 
 " Where do you go, neighbour ? " 
 
 The head-man nodded at the old kyoung close 
 by, in the darkness of which one might see a still 
 figure sitting cross-legged against the wall. 
 
 " Go," said Moung Byoo, getting on his feet ; 
 and the men rose and lounged into the kyoung- 
 to pay their respects, as was customary of an 
 evening. 
 
 The hpoongyee did not move or acknowledge 
 the respectful shikos of his visitors. He remained 
 with his eyes cast down, clasping his beads in 
 his shrivelled hand. He was very strict in his 
 observance of the Law. Moung Byoo raised his 
 voice and spoke. 
 
 " The work of the Lord Huler's supporters is 
 nearly finished. Save for the boards of one side 
 the new kyoung is ready for his honoured pre- 
 sence." 
 
 The old monk took no more notice than if a 
 lizard had chirped. He had only to raise his head 
 to see the new monastery, which in a few weeks had
 
 264 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 grown up under the great tree ten paces distant. 
 The faint, sweet smell of fresh-cut wood had been 
 in his nostrils day and night, and sometimes the 
 shouting and laughter of men and women, happy 
 in sharing the good work, must have disturbed 
 his meditations. But as is becoming in one who 
 has withdrawn from the world, he knew nothing. 
 Moung Byoo reported progress each evening, but 
 the hpoongyee heard what he had to say without 
 even looking up. He had never referred to the 
 new kyoung since Moung Byoo first told him they 
 were about to begin building. This evening, 
 however, he relaxed a little as the offering was 
 so nearly completed. 
 
 " My woman," said Moung Byoo. clearing his 
 throat to speak well, "my woman feels great 
 happiness in giving this monastery to be the 
 dwelling of the Lord Ruler." 
 
 " The disciple who, having means to acquire 
 Merit, employs it thus is fortunate," said the 
 hpoongyee, speaking as one whose thoughts are 
 of other things. " But let her be humble ; for 
 the respect of many gives a proud heart, and 
 pride is a sin." 
 
 " She shall hear the Lord B/uler's wise words," 
 said Moung Byoo, and he meant it. His reverence 
 spoke well ; Mah Hehn had grown much too 
 proud of late between her white son-in-law and 
 the sweet words of her neighbours concerning the 
 new kyoung.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 265 
 
 " By consenting to dwell in this monastery," said 
 the hpoongyee, rousing himself a little, " I shall 
 be the instrument whereby much Merit is earned." 
 
 " We are most grateful," murmured all, mindful 
 of the part they had borne in the building. 
 
 " It is a very beautiful monastery," said Moung 
 Let. He spoke wishing to please Moung Byoo, 
 who had often renewed his promise to speak for 
 Pho Lone ; but the hpoongyee caught him up 
 quite sharply. Any hut, any hole in rocks, was 
 meet dwelling for a monk, he said. What need 
 had yahan of beautiful houses, of fine clothing, of 
 rich food 1 A shelter of leaves or a cave, a few 
 rags, and a little food given in charity that he 
 should not starve in his meditations on the Three 
 Precious Things : this was the portion of a yahan. 
 
 Moung Let listened very respectfully while his 
 reverence addressed them thus ; but as he strolled 
 home in the starlight it would come to his mind 
 that before the new kyoung was built or even 
 spoken of the hpoongyee would often say to his 
 supporters : " This roof is broken, and the rain 
 falls on old bones which have much pain. Great 
 Merit is gained by him who supplies the wants of 
 a servant of the Lord Bhudda ; " or, " This yellow 
 robe is so tattered a stranger would think the 
 wearer had no supporters." But since the new 
 monastery had been commenced he had grown 
 much more strict in his views concerning the 
 wants of a monk.
 
 266 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Mah Tsay had watched the growth of the new 
 kyoung very anxiously. She had earned Merit 
 herself by handing nails or tools, which was all 
 her weakness allowed ; but what she so greatly 
 desired was that Pho Lone should come back in 
 time to do a little, if only a day's, work so as to 
 gain Merit like everybody else in the village. 
 But the building and the hot season were drawing 
 to an end together and no word had been heard 
 of Pho Lone, save the meagre news given by 
 some Ladaw men who stopped at Myothit on 
 their way to Ngatheing to buy salt, and told 
 how Boh Tah's men had stolen all the money and 
 goods in their village ; and these had not seen 
 Pho Lone. True, Oo Boo Nah, whom Moung Let 
 had, of course, consulted a day or two after his 
 son's disappearance, had examined Pho Lone's 
 sadah, and had calculated by astrology that he 
 would return soon after the monsoon burst and 
 bring with him rupees enough to build a great 
 pagoda, and cover it with gold leaf to boot. This 
 was very reassuring, for Oo Boo Nah's predictions 
 always came right unless some error crept into 
 his calculations, as had been known to happen ; 
 or, what he could control still less, the person 
 prophesied about upset the natural course of 
 things by doing some particularly good or par- 
 ticularly bad action. Moung Let had been, four 
 times altogether to see Oo Boo Nah, and had 
 done him honour to the extent of two rupees
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 267 
 
 each time ; but it was well spent money, for on 
 each visit the old sayah made fresh calculations 
 which produced the same result. Pho Lone was 
 alive and well, was conquering towns and villages, 
 and gaining great wealth. 
 
 " It is due to the care we take to do nothing 
 unlucky," said Mah Tsay. 
 
 " Yes, good wife. We have never slept with 
 our heads to the north or the west." 
 
 " Never, Ko Moung Let. Always we lie with 
 our heads to the east. And you never eat rice 
 facing the north. Nor do I." 
 
 Oo Boo Nah had proved with such certainty 
 that Pho Lone would not return till his birth- 
 planet entered the same house with Saturn, which 
 would happen soon after the monsoon burst, that 
 when early the next morning a murmur of excite- 
 ment passed sleepily through the village, bringing 
 the neighbours out in the glare, Mah Tsay scarcely 
 looked up from her fire-making under the lee of 
 the house. 
 
 " They say Pho Lone comes. Ho, neighbour 
 Mah Tsay, they say Pho Lone is come ! " called a 
 girl from over the way. 
 
 Mah Tsay dropped her fire-fan, grasped her 
 staff, and hobbled out into the street. A crowd 
 was coming slowly along, swelling as it came, for 
 every one was running to see. Mah Tsay called 
 out, but her thin old voice was not heard, and she 
 made what haste she could to join the throng.
 
 268 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 "Here is your son, mother!" shouted fifty 
 voices. " A dacoit chief. See ! he wears the 
 loon pasoh ! " 
 
 It was Pho Lone. He looked hungry and tired, 
 but he bore himself proudly, and received the 
 greetings of his friends with an air. The pasoh 
 Boh Tah had given him at Nyounglay was stained 
 with mud and flapped raggedly about his calves, 
 but the wavy pattern in the once brilliant silk 
 was plain to see. 
 
 "Yes," called Shway Toon to Moung Yeik, who 
 could not force his way through the crowd, "it is 
 he, and he wears the loon pasoh ! " 
 
 " Mother ! Pho Lone a chief ! " exclaimed Moung 
 Yeik in awe. 
 
 " Do you not want to speak to him ? " Moung 
 Let asked Ko Moung Galay, for something is due 
 to the head-man of the village. 
 
 " Presently I will speak," said Ko Moung Galay. 
 
 " The head-man looks a little gravely on you," 
 said Moung Let in a low tone to his son. 
 
 " He has nothing to fear," replied Pho Lone 
 kindly. " Let him come and speak if he will," 
 and he smoothed out his pasoh. 
 
 " My son ! " cried Mali Tsay, standing in his 
 path as the people made way for her, " my dear 
 
 son! 
 
 She waved her shrunken old arms and moved 
 her knees as if she would dance with joy. She 
 had forgotten the wealth Pho Lone was to bring ;
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 269 
 
 she saw he was thin and ragged and carried only 
 a staff in his hand, but he had come home at last 
 and she wanted nothing more. Pho Lone smiled 
 upon her, and she stood aside to be carried on by 
 the crowd. They moved slowly, and Mah Tsay 
 hobbled along, unable to take her eyes off the 
 fine young man who threw out his chest and 
 swaggered like the hero in a play. 
 
 " I am hungry ; let rice be brought," he said, 
 as he stepped upon the verandah of Moung Let's 
 house and squatted on the mat Shway Toon 
 crouched to spread for him. " I have travelled 
 far since the last fight when we killed the police." 
 
 The sun scorched their bare backs, but the 
 people, close packed on the road outside, sank on 
 their heels to hear what he would tell. 
 
 " Was it a great fight ? " Shway Toon respect- 
 fully inquired of Moung Let, who sat on the edge 
 of his son's mat. 
 
 " Hardly a great fight," said Pho Lone. " The 
 dogs ran away too soon ; but we killed many. I 
 myself always led the attack, carrying his lord- 
 ship's own gun. I killed a man the very first 
 time I fired it." 
 
 " Mother ! Always led ! that is why he wears 
 the dress of a chief; and he used the Boh's own 
 gun ! killed a man with it ! " 
 
 Pho Lone listened to the ripple of admiring 
 talk with the smile of one who has just given a 
 taste of what is to come.
 
 270 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " I suppose he has a great deal of money buried 
 in the jungle," Mah Hehn said to Moung Yeik, 
 who put the question through Moung Let. 
 
 " An elephant's load of rupees, gold and diamond 
 ornaments and fine silk is committed to the care 
 of the demons," said Pho Lone. " His lordship, 
 by the power of his magic, vanished from our 
 sight when we dispersed, or I had brought my 
 share a chiefs share with me." 
 
 Mah Tsay laughed aloud ; it was the first time 
 she had been heard to laugh for many weeks. 
 
 "I bring rice, good son," she said, beaming on 
 him, " thou art hungry." 
 
 " I will eat also young bamboo shoots, curry, 
 and a little ngapee," said Pho Lone. Mah Tsay 
 looked aghast, for she had no dainties in the 
 house ; but several young men crept forward and 
 begged leave to bring what was required. 
 
 " Will the Boh come again to this village ? " 
 inquired Moung Byoo. 
 
 " I cannot tell what his lordship's pleasure will 
 be," replied Pho Lone, " though he always desired 
 my advice." 
 
 Moung Maw who had twice addressed Pho 
 Lone mouth to mouth without getting an answer, 
 cried, " Did he ever take it ? " but was scowled 
 down by his neighbours, and Pho Lone took no 
 notice. 
 
 " You will perhaps speak to his lordship in 
 favour of our village," said several, very respect-
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 271 
 
 fully ; and Pho Lone said, Yes, he would do this, 
 and did not doubt but that Boh Tah would extend 
 his protection to their village on payment of the 
 usual tribute. At these words Ko Moung Galay 
 was seen to rise on the outskirts of the crowd and 
 walk away to his house, followed by Elders Oo 
 Ket Kay and Oo Shway. Moung Let remarked 
 it and twiddled his cheroot uneasily ; for he knew 
 what was in the head-man's mind, and began to 
 be afraid lest he should wish to perform his duty. 
 He was about to whisper Pho Lone not to speak 
 more of Boh Tah but that young chief stopped 
 him by calling again very fiercely for food ; and 
 as the curry and other things were at this moment 
 passed up to the verandah, the crowd remembered 
 that it was long past rice-time and melted away. 
 In the head-man's house, the elders sat chewing 
 betel and discussing the matter. Ko Moung 
 Galay, fearing the displeasure of the Deputy 
 Commissioner, said he thought it was proper to 
 report to the patrol constable when he next called 
 at the village, and Oo Ket Kay was of the same 
 opinion though fearful lest this measure should 
 give offence to Boh Tah. Oo Shway, however, 
 thought otherwise ; he reminded Ko Moung Galay 
 that fully half the people in Myothit were blood 
 relations of Moung Let or of Mah Tsay and that 
 all these would be strongly opposed to giving up 
 Pho Lone to the police. He himself as the 
 brother-in-law of Moung Let's second cousin, Oo
 
 272 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Yan, should not feel justified in advising the 
 young man's arrest, and he was quite sure all Pho 
 Lone's relations would be equally against it. 
 
 Ko Moung Galay fully recognised Oo Shway's 
 point of view and should be very sorry to do any- 
 thing that would breed dissension in the village, 
 but Oo Shway would remember Mah Kin Lay 
 thekin's visit ? Well, they had all heard what 
 he had said ; and since then, he must remind his 
 friend that Moung Paw Thin, the patrol constable, 
 had brought news that it was the intention of 
 Government to impose fines on villages which 
 were successfully attacked by dacoits, and to 
 punish with great severity all persons who were 
 found harbouring dacoits. Was it wise to run 
 these risks ? Oo Shway confessed he was rather 
 surprised that so sensible a man as Ko Moung 
 Galay did not see that his own arguments pointed 
 to the wisdom of ignoring Pho Lone's adventure ; 
 in the first place Boh Tah would never again 
 attack Myothit, a son of the village having followed 
 him, so there was no chance of being fined on that 
 ground. Then Pho Lone was now no longer a 
 dacoit, but a youth of good character living with 
 his mother ; if nothing was said, nobody would be 
 any the wiser. 
 
 " Certainly, the young man did not follow the 
 Boh of his own accord," said Oo Ket Kay 
 thoughtfully. He was not related to Pho Lone's 
 family, but as he had a grand-daughter, and
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 273 
 
 therefore might become so, he did not wish to see 
 bad blood. 
 
 " I will think it over," said Ko Moung Galay. 
 " I wish the youth no ill, but such talk as his is 
 not good." 
 
 " True, neighbour ; but who shall stop a young 
 cock's crowing ? " asked Oo Shway, rising to 
 leave. 
 
 No work was done on the new kyoung that 
 morning. Until the sun declined, the people 
 were gathered in and about Moung Let's house, 
 which was not big enough to hold one quarter 
 of those who wished to hear about Pho Lone's 
 doings since he followed the Boh. Ko Moung 
 Galay was the only man in the village who 
 stayed away, and he lost nothing, because the 
 neighbours, sorry for a man who always used his 
 authority mildly, dropped in from time to time 
 to tell him Pho Lone's tales. Ko Moung Galay 
 listened, but when he looked down the street, 
 and saw how the young bloods bore themselves, 
 howling and pretending to fight as they left 
 Moung Let's house, his face grew more and more 
 grave. If only half the young man's stories were 
 true, the position was much more serious than he 
 had supposed. Moung Hla was not the man to 
 see his people killed and their houses robbed, and 
 the whole village burned, without reporting to 
 the Government as quickly as he could. Ko 
 Moung Galay did not believe that all the police
 
 274 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 had been killed in the fight after the sacking of 
 Kyouksay, but he saw no reason to doubt that 
 Ko Moung Hla had appealed for mercy to Pho 
 Lone ; and this was what troubled him most, for 
 Ko Moung Hla would assuredly denounce Pho 
 Lone to the police. The patrol constable was 
 due to make his usual visit to Myothit in a day 
 or two at farthest, and he was sure to have heard 
 about the Kyouksay dacoity ; indeed it was quite 
 likely that he would arrest Pho Lone on sus- 
 picion, for on the two occasions he had lately 
 visited the village, he had inquired about the 
 young man, and last time had pressed Moung Let 
 to explain his son's absence, until Moung Let, 
 being greatly confused, lent him twenty rupees. 
 
 Ko Moung Galay thought over the matter 
 until the sun was low, without being able to 
 make up his mind ; and at last he got up, and 
 went away down the street to talk it over with 
 
 00 Yan ; for Oo Yan, being the oldest man in the 
 village, had had much experience, and could give 
 good advice. 
 
 " I think Ko Moung Galay is not very glad that 
 
 1 have come back," said Pho Lone as he saw the 
 head-man pass without even turning his head. 
 
 "Never mind him," shrilled Mah Tsay, "how 
 good it is to see the neighbours sit and listen 
 to thy speech ! But thou wilt not follow again, 
 good son." 
 
 When Pho Lone entered the village that morn-
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 27/> 
 
 ing he was so glad to be back, having eaten 
 nothing but wild fruits for three days, that he had 
 had no thought of following Boh Tah or any other 
 chief again. But having eaten, and being drunk 
 with the admiration of the neighbours, he could 
 not say he would never "follow" anymore; so 
 he smiled upon his mother, and said no man might 
 dwell in the jungles during the rainy season and 
 live ; time enough to think about jungle life when 
 the cold weather came round. 
 
 " This has been the day of my life," said Mah 
 Tsay, thinking of the silence which held the 
 neighbours while Pho Lone told of his marches 
 and battles, and of the magical powers of the Boh- 
 " But, my son, the say ah foretold that you should 
 bring money ; much money, enough to build a 
 great pagoda." 
 
 " I have enough to build two pagodas, each with 
 rest-houses all round," said Pho Lone, boastfully. 
 " I must see his lordship and arrange to get this 
 money." 
 
 "My dear son, the Builder of a Pagoda," 
 murmured Mah Tsay, looking up the street 
 where she could see Mah Helm's Work of Merit, 
 its newness gleaming in the setting sun, " that 
 woman is a kyoung-tagama. How much better 
 is a payah-taga." 
 
 " The Ladaw men said you took everything," 
 said Moung Let, rolling a chew. " Ladaw is a rich 
 village, is it not ? "
 
 276 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " It was," replied Pho Lone, grinning, and 
 Moung Let laughed. 
 
 " I wonder where his lordship went when he 
 vanished out of sight," remarked Moung Let 
 thoughtfully, " you said he took the elephants with 
 him ? " 
 
 " I did not say those words. I said that when 
 his lordship by means of his sorcery vanished, we 
 no longer could see the elephants." 
 
 " Truly a great say ah," said Moung Let. " It 
 is good for the village that we shall henceforward 
 enjoy his favour." 
 
 " Speak no more on these matters," said Mah 
 Tsay, " the head-man with Oo Yan comes and I 
 think to our house." 
 
 Pho Lone frowned darkly, but his look of high 
 displeasure gave way to one of anxiety as Ko 
 Moung Galay stepped on to the verandah and sat 
 down without taking the least notice of him. The 
 manner of the old men hurt him after the beha- 
 viour of the neighbours, and he wished he had 
 gone upstairs to his room before they entered. It 
 would not be polite to do so now, so he sat wait- 
 ing for them to speak. 
 
 " We are very glad, neighbour," began Ko 
 Moung Galay, a little awkwardly, " we are all re- 
 joiced that your good son has escaped unhurt from 
 the bad men who compelled him to follow them." 
 
 " It has been a happy day, indeed," said Mah 
 Tsay.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 277 
 
 " You would grieve much if you should lose him 
 again," said Oo Yan to Moung Let, for one does 
 not address a woman in such matters, " yet, 
 neighbour, there is: that danger. Without doubt 
 it is in your mind how constable Paw Thin asked 
 many searching questions when he was last here." 
 
 Moung Let said it was ; he added that in his 
 opinion Moung Paw Thin was a great thief. Pho 
 Lone listened while his seniors talked, and began 
 to feel very uncomfortable. 
 
 " Our fear is," said Ko Moung Galay, after a 
 little silence, " that Moung Hla of Kyouksay, 
 having recognised Pho Lone in the company of 
 the dacoits who robbed his village and burned it, 
 killing many people also, will tell his name to the 
 police." 
 
 " But the dacoits did not rob Kyouksay, nor 
 burn the houses, and only one woman was killed 
 by mistake," put in Pho Lone, much frightened. 
 
 " The youth was there with the dacoits and 
 Moung Hla saw him," said Ko Moung Galay ; 
 " he will therefore certainly be arrested by the 
 police." 
 
 " They made me follow ; I had been killed else," 
 moaned Pho Lone, looking from one to the other. 
 
 " We are anxious to save your son," said Ko 
 Moung Galay, "it is not good that a son of the 
 village should be sent over the sea with chains on 
 his legs [Mah Tsay howled], we wish to save him 
 from this."
 
 278 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " What do you advise ? " asked Moung Let, 
 " Peace, woman ! " 
 
 Ko Moung Galay nodded to Oo Yan, and Oo 
 Yan clearing his throat, spoke : 
 
 "We have talked much of this thing and we 
 are of one mind. The young man shall go to 
 Bassein, taking with him a letter from Ko Moung 
 Galay in which shall be written : ' Pho Lone, the 
 son of Moung Let, of Myothit, on the Ngatheing 
 creek, is a young man of very good character. 
 He has lived with his mother. He does not drink 
 berrandy and he does not eat opium/ these 
 being evil things and much disapproved by the 
 Government," explained Oo Yan. " And the letter 
 shall also say : ' The young man desires to serve 
 on the Government-side as a policeman, and begs 
 for this letter recommending him to the kindness 
 of Moung Wah Gyee, Head Constable of Police ; 
 for whose long life and freedom from all the 
 Accidents, Diseases, and Misfortunes he will ever 
 pray.' ' 
 
 Oo Yan rolled out the last words and looked 
 round for approval. 
 
 " Very good words," said Ko Moung Galay. 
 
 The sky had shut now and the house was dark. 
 The silence was broken by Mah Tsay's sobs and a 
 muffled sniffle from where Pho Lone sat. 
 
 " I will write this letter to-night," said Ko 
 Moung Galay. " The youth must go very quickly 
 lest the police arrest him on Moung Hla's report."
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 279 
 
 " But the police will put him in prison," cried 
 Mah Tsay. 
 
 " No," said Oo Yan, " there is but one tongue 
 in the thannah. Should Moung Hla come, saying, 
 * I have seen this young man with dacoits,' the 
 sergeant will reply, ' Your words are lies, he is 
 one of Us ; be careful how you speak against him 
 lest you incur the displeasure of Government,' 
 when Moung Hla will be silent, fearing to make 
 enemies of the police." 
 
 " Ko Moung Galay, I beg you to write the 
 letter to night that I may go on the next tide," 
 cried Pho Lone. "It is my great desire to be a 
 policeman." 
 
 " I go to write it in my house," said Ko Moung 
 Galay rising. 
 
 " This village is happy in the wisdom of its 
 head-man," said Moung Let a little sadly. 
 
 " His wisdom is as the wisdom of a Bhudd," 
 said Pho Lone. 
 
 But Ko Moung Galay had yet one more word 
 to say, and he was not sorry to see many neigh- 
 bours standing round to hear. 
 
 " I do this because your father is my friend. 
 Go, fool ! take off that pasoh, wrap it about a 
 stone, and throw it in the creek." 
 
 Pho Lone went.
 
 CHAPTER XVI 
 
 "A CHEW," said Constable Moung Eik. 
 
 Pho Lone pushed his betel box along the floor, 
 and when his comrade had helped himself, reached 
 for it again : he did not want the box, but he liked 
 to hear his new police-belt creak. The noise of the 
 rain was deafening ; now and again Pho Lone bent 
 forward to look at the sky, but there was never a 
 gleam of light in the misty grey above : the spout 
 at the roof corner shot a torrent clear over the 
 gutter to eat a hole knee-deep in the metal of the 
 roadway, and the muddy water sheeted sullenly 
 into the brick-lined drain at the verandah edge. 
 
 " We ought to go on beat," said Pho Lone. 
 
 " I was eager to go out and be seen in my 
 uniform when I first joined," grinned Moung Eik. 
 " Who shall see you in this rain ? " 
 
 Pho Lone laughed and fingered the baton he 
 was so proud of; he had worn the blue serge coat 
 and red pasoh for only two days, but Sergeant 
 Moung Nee had taught him his business, and he 
 was now fitted for duty. 
 
 " I have taught you to stand tensin and sah-
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 281 
 
 loo' when a gentleman passes," said the sergeant 
 when dismissing his pupil, " and also I have taught 
 the duty of a constable on beat. If you find cattle 
 or goats straying on the road you bring them to 
 the pound ; if you see a house take fire you come 
 to the thannah and report ; if you see a thief 
 running away what will you do ? " 
 
 " Come and make report," replied Pho Lone. 
 
 " Quite right," said the sergeant, " to-morrow 
 you go on beat." 
 
 Pho Lone was to have taken his first turn of 
 duty at eight o'clock this morning ; but the rain 
 being very heavy, and Constable Moung Eik, who 
 had been directed to show him the limits of his 
 beat, having no umbrella, they decided to wait 
 under shelter until the sun came out. It was 
 early in the monsoon when the rain falls for days 
 and nights together, so they spent the hours in the 
 back verandah where the inspector would not see 
 them, smoking and chewing, sleeping and talking 
 by turns. 
 
 It was late in the afternoon before the rain 
 ceased and the sun pushed his way out below the 
 leaden clouds ; and when the road began to steam 
 and glisten Pho Lone suggested that they should 
 go ; he was eager to enjoy the respect of the 
 townspeople. Moung Eik said Pho Lone could go 
 if he chose ; for his own part he hated sitting about 
 in the wet, and should let the world dry up before 
 he went on duty.
 
 282 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 "You know your beat perhaps," he said, "on 
 the riverside road from Thaw' thekin's mill to the 
 Chinese pig-dealer's quarter." 
 
 " That road ! Yes, I know it well ; also I know 
 Thaw' thekin and his wife ; Mah Pan is the 
 daughter of Moung Byoo of my village." 
 
 " Ah," said Moung Eik, " I know her too. She 
 called me in one day to arrest a kullah servant for 
 stealing. How angry she was ! I remember that 
 his honour let the man off. She is a very pretty 
 woman." 
 
 " Yes, she is," assented Pho Lone, squirting 
 betel juice: he laughed lightly, "she was my 
 madah* once." 
 
 " Was she now ? " asked Moung Eik, growing 
 interested. " She is pretty ; but not very sweet, 
 I think, and very proud." 
 
 " It is so long since I saw her that I forget," 
 said Pho Lone carelessly. " But I ought to go on 
 beat.' 7 
 
 " There is leave," laughed Moung Eik ; " come 
 back at eight o'clock and report everything all 
 right." 
 
 Pho Lone shook out his pasoh and strolled off 
 past the Court-house down to the road which runs 
 along the river bank, straightening his back a little 
 as some coolies drew aside to let him pass. Moung 
 Eik's words had brought Mah Pan and his court- 
 
 * Madah ; Burmese slang, equivalent to 'Arry's " My 
 girl."
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 283 
 
 ship back to his mind again, and he debated 
 whether he should go now and visit her. He ha,d 
 been four weeks in Bassein, but until yesterday 
 had not wished to seek out any of his town friends. 
 When he presented Ko Moung Galay's letter to 
 Head Constable Moung Wah Gyee, that officer had 
 said : " There is now no vacancy in the force, and 
 I must know something about you before I can 
 recommend you for enrolment. I will take you as 
 my servant till a vacancy occurs, so that you may 
 learn something of police duty." Had Pho Lone 
 not been afraid to go home he would have made 
 answer that he was no man's servant to cut wood 
 and run errands ; but as the village elders had 
 hinted that they should report him to Moung 
 Paw Thin if he did return, he could only shiko the 
 head constable and pray for his favour. He felt 
 very humble being a servant, after having been 
 shiko'd himself as a dacoit leader, though Moung 
 Wah Gyee was very kind, and treated him as a 
 son. He had been a servant for two weeks, and 
 had gained his master's favour, when Moung Maw 
 came to see him. Pho Lone was home-sick and 
 glad to see any one from Myothit, but Moung 
 Maw was the more welcome because he brought 
 the very thing of all others a man in bad case 
 desires : this was nothing less than the potent 
 peeyahthadee* charm which compels the granting 
 
 * " Peeyah thadee," Pali for " Completed Love." The charm 
 consists of a few red-stained cotton threads passed through two
 
 284 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 of any request the owner may prefer. Mah Tsay 
 had been to see Go Boo Nah, and had honoured 
 him with many rupees for it. Pho Lone treated 
 the charm with jealous respect. He kept it in the 
 breast pocket of his linen jacket, never carrying it 
 near his waist, much less below it ; he set it in a 
 high place at night and scented it with frangi- 
 panni till his room reeked ; these precautions 
 being necessary to preserve and excite its virtue. 
 Then, on a lucky day, he begged the head constable 
 to appoint him a policeman soon. 
 
 Moung Wah Gyee yielded to the influence of the 
 charm at once, saying : "If your good father 
 wishes it I will make a vacancy." When Moung 
 Let received this message from Moung Maw's 
 mouth he tied thirty rupees in a cloth and came 
 to tell the Head Constable that he wished very 
 much his son should be " on the Government- side," 
 but being a wise man he added that he would take 
 leave to pay his respects again after Pho Lone had 
 been enrolled. When he had seen the young man 
 in his uniform he said : "It has been a great 
 expense, but we are proud that you are a Govern- 
 ment officer : when leave is given, come to the 
 village to gladden the eyes of your mother." 
 
 Pho Lone rejoiced in his release from house 
 
 tiny gold cylinders. The one in my possession has always been 
 well treated, but has never produced any effect upon publishers 
 and others on whom it has been tried. Probably they owned 
 more potent talismans.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 285 
 
 service, and he was also glad to wear his uniform 
 and enjoy the people's respect. It had, moreover, 
 come to him that the officer who had caught him 
 that day after the jungle fire near Ladaw, might 
 recognise him when they met again face to face, 
 as they must do sooner or later in the course of 
 police duty. He had misdirected the officer, and 
 had thereby proved himself, if not a dacoit, at least 
 in league with dacoits ; and if the officer knew his 
 face Pho Lone knew that nothing could save him 
 from chains and a shaven head. When Moung Let 
 first saw him in uniform, he said : " Now who 
 would know that smart officer for my son ? " and 
 thus Pho Lone was in hopes that the gentleman 
 who had seen him with hair disordered, and only 
 a ragged old pasoh about his thighs, would not 
 recognise him again. 
 
 It was very reassuring when, on the road above 
 the Strand where the Chittagong men draw up 
 their boats, he met one who had known him so 
 well as Thaw' thekin, and that gentleman did not 
 know him, though he looked at the uncouth con- 
 stable, who forgot to salute when he passed. Pho 
 Lone was so busy wondering if the gentleman 
 would know him that the sergeant's teaching was 
 forgotten. He watched Thaw' thekin ride by and 
 went on his way with a lighter heart. Surely if 
 Thaw' thekin, who had seen him so often, and 
 had once given him a beating, did not recognise 
 him in his new uniform, the officer would not.
 
 286 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 It was good to feel that one was once more 
 above other men, for a proud man does not like to 
 be a servant even though his master address him 
 " younger brother," or "nephew," and expects to 
 be called " uncle." It had been very easy and 
 pleasant to do the bidding of Moung Wah Gyee ; 
 but Mah Gway his wife was not like him. Pho 
 Lone's gorge rose as he remembered her cross 
 voice, " He, Pho Lone ! He, lazy one ! Go quickly 
 to bring water ! " that all the street might hear. 
 He clutched his baton and stalked over the road 
 to threaten the driver of a bullock cart with in- 
 stant arrest if he let his gharry stand blocking the 
 way. The coolie salaamed, praying for indulgence, 
 and Pho Lone relented ; the salaam did him good 
 though it was only a black kullah's. 
 
 There was nothing to do on beat, and Pho Lone 
 squatted on the low culvert wall just outside Thaw' 
 thekin's garden gate, to rest and roll a chew. 
 He wanted Mah Pan to see him that he might 
 enjoy the respect she would naturally pay to an 
 official ; but he was doubtful about going to the 
 house which he could see a stone's throw distant 
 through the red flowering trees. She would pro- 
 bably be in the great verandah over the porch, and 
 when she begged him to honour her by coming up 
 he should have to pass under her feet to reach the 
 stairs, a humiliation he was not inclined to risk. 
 Besides, would it accord with the dignity of a 
 Government officer to go out of his way to visit a
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 287 
 
 woman, fellow villager and friend though she 
 were \ 
 
 " He* ! do not sit there ; you will frighten my 
 lord's pony when he comes." 
 
 Pho Lone looked over his shoulder; he had 
 heard the dragging clatter of a woman's sandals on 
 the path within, but it had not occurred to him 
 that the wearer might be Mali Pan. Mah Pan it 
 was, nevertheless ; prettier than ever, and richly 
 dressed in silk tamein and white silk jacket ; she 
 wore diamond nadoungs in her ears, and a gold 
 necklet. She held a small Burmese umbrella over 
 her shoulder to shade her head from the sinking 
 sun, and it formed a background which showed off 
 her face. Pho Lone did not get off the wall ; he 
 turned a little and faced her as she stopped a few 
 steps from him. 
 
 "Moiing Pho Lone ! " exclaimed Mah Pan, her 
 tone changing from sharp command to gracious 
 condescension ; " Why, the last news was that you 
 followed Boh Tah. You are in good health ? " 
 
 " I am of the police," said Pho Lone haughtily ; 
 he was glad to see Mah Pan, but she must be 
 taught that " He* ! " was not the way to address a 
 Government officer. She must show respect before 
 he could hold converse with her. 
 
 " And what do you do here ? " 
 
 " I have charge of this part of the town at pre- 
 sent," replied Pho Lone, with a responsible air. 
 He looked up the road and down for somebody on
 
 288 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 whom to vent his authority ; but there was nothing, 
 not even a stray goat. 
 
 " I hope you will arrest any one who steals 
 flowers from the garden, then," said Mali Pan, " or 
 my lord will complain to the superintendent again. 
 How long have you been of the police ? " 
 
 " Two days," replied Pho Lone, digging at the 
 cracked cement with his baton to hide his confu- 
 sion. " And are you going to buy rice in the 
 bazaar ? " he inquired, making a sudden effort to 
 put her down in the woman's place. 
 
 Mali Pan laughed. " I send my servants to buy 
 rice. I go now to visit my friend Mah Pyin who 
 lives in that large fine house at the corner." She 
 raised her hand to point and the sparkle of dia- 
 mond rings angered Pho Lone ; she, to wear many 
 precious stones on her fingers, who three months 
 ago treasured a silver ring worth two rupees ! 
 
 "Mah Pyin? That is Thaw' thekin's old 
 broker's wife ? " 
 
 " No," corrected Mah Pan, smiling, " she is the 
 wife of Ko Moung Loo, the junior magistrate." 
 
 Pho Lone had seen Ko Moung Loo in court ; 
 policemen crouched on their heels when he spoke 
 and always said " Lord." 
 
 " The Wheel has turned for you, neighbour Mah 
 Pan." 
 
 " I am still your friend," smiled Mah Pan. 
 " Should you like promotion ? Shall I bespeak 
 Ko Moung Loo's favour for you ? "
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 289 
 
 " It would be very good," mumbled Pho Lone, 
 digging viciously at the cement again. Mah Pan 
 was such a great lady, she had no respect for a 
 policeman now ; and how humble she used to be 
 to Moung Paw Thin ! 
 
 " Come and see me in my house,'' said Mah Pan. 
 " It will please me to hear of Myothit people. I 
 shall tell Mah Pyin of you, that she may speak in 
 the ear of Ko Moung Loo." 
 
 Pho Lone could endure her airs no longer. 
 
 " I'm going," he said, and swinging his feet off 
 the wall he turned his back and inarched down 
 the road. 
 
 " Yes, the inspector will no doubt punish you if 
 he finds you sitting to gossip," said Mah Pan. 
 
 He pretended not to hear. If only he could 
 arrest and walk her through the town in hand- 
 cuffs ! If only she had seen his entry into Myo- 
 thit that morning when all the neighbours ran out 
 to see him and pray for his favour ! The big 
 Coringa coolies who strolled along singing through 
 their noses and throwing their mushroom spools as 
 they wound cotton, hustled one another out of the 
 way, for they saw a very fierce young policeman 
 who might bring a false charge if offended. Pho 
 Lone liked to see them make way, and by the time 
 he reached the end of the fence which enclosed 
 the now silent mill and its grounds, his anger had 
 passed, and he began to think it would be pleasant 
 to see some of the old friends whose -houses backed
 
 290 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 against the palisade in this far corner ; so after a 
 glance townwards, lest the inspector of whom Mah 
 Pan had spoken might be about, he crossed the 
 plank over the flooded ditch and entered by the 
 narrow slit which served as gateway. 
 
 The only man to be seen about was white 
 haired Moung Woon the broker, whose wife Pho 
 Lone had supposed Mah Pan was on her way to 
 visit. Moung Woon squatted on his verandah 
 smoking, and called " Ho, neighbour ! " for he was 
 rather blind with age and saw only a constable. 
 
 " You do not know me," said Pho Lone, 
 approaching and speaking with the respect due 
 to one so old. 
 
 " I know your voice, my son," said Moung 
 Woon. " Your good father came only two days 
 since and told how you were now in the Govern- 
 ment service. That was very good news. Enter 
 and talk with me." 
 
 Pho Lone took a drink from the water chatty 
 and sat down, remarking that he had just seen 
 Mah Pan. 
 
 Moung Woon's face became a little grave at 
 mention of Mah Pan's name. " Yes," he said, " of 
 course you know her ; she is a Myothit daughter." 
 
 " She is grown proud, I think," said Pho Lone, 
 who saw that the old man did not think very- 
 well of Mah Pan. " I suppose she is proud having 
 married his honour, who gives her so many beau- 
 tiful jewels."
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 291 
 
 Moung Woon's face relaxed. 
 
 "They are my wife's jewels," he said, chuckling. 
 " Mah Pyin is fond of the foolish girl ; and when 
 Mali Pan comes, saying, 'Lend me jewellery, that 
 I may do my lord honour,' she laughs and lends. 
 Thaw' thekin give her diamonds ! One day there 
 will be Missi' Thorpe, for whom Thaw' thekin 
 will no doubt buy diamonds, also rubies and other 
 precious stones." 
 
 " I thought the gentleman would not give such 
 things to a jungle woman, "said Pho Lone; and he 
 told how Mah Pan had affected to laugh at the 
 idea of visiting Moung Woon's wife. 
 
 " I shall tell Mah Pyin," said the old man, with 
 a chuckle. He rolled his cheroot in his mouth 
 and went on, "Often have I sat in this place hear- 
 ing their women's talk. The jungle girl would be 
 ruler in that house, and indeed it is in my mind 
 that his honour is too easy tempered. But three 
 of his old kullah servants remain, the others 
 having refused to obey the orders of Mah Pan. 
 The cooking man remains because he makes much 
 money buying in the bazaar ; also his honour's body 
 servant, a big man of the fighting race whom Mah 
 Pan fears, and the groom, who is not at her order." 
 
 " And his honour allows this ! " said Pho Lone. 
 He had never thought white men permitted 
 women to rule in their houses thus. 
 
 " What is it to him ? " said Moung Woon. " He 
 is all day working in his office below "
 
 292 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " Her feet over his head !" 
 
 " Englishmen think it no shame ; how often 
 have I seen it ! Well then, he has much busi- 
 ness, and leaves the household to the woman's 
 care. Servants come and go, and what is it to 
 him ? " 
 
 " Is he kind to her ? " asked Pho Lone, half 
 hoping to hear that Thaw' thekin was not kind. 
 
 " Yes, yes. His honour is not like the engineer 
 who married that Henzada girl and beat her. He 
 is very kind, and gives her presents. Once she 
 brought much paddy to us by smiling upon the 
 Chinaman who had stored it ; his honour gave her 
 the brokerage and a silk tamein." 
 
 Moung Woon paused and laughed to himself. 
 
 " Why do you laugh ? " inquired Pho Lone. 
 
 " I sat in the office doorway when his honour 
 gave her the tamein. I heard his honour say to 
 her, ' Here is a gift, because you brought that ten 
 thousand baskets to rne. I give you this tamein 
 which cost fifty rupees.' ' 
 
 Moung Woon paused to chuckle again, until Pho 
 Lone said, "And then ?" 
 
 " Then Mah Pan, handling the silk as women 
 do, said, ' Has my lord paid fifty rupees for this ? ' 
 and Thaw' thekin saying, ' I shall pay all that 
 money,' Mah Pan made answer, c My lord has been 
 cheated, for it is worth but twenty. Let my lord 
 pay fifty rupees into my hand, and I will buy 
 value for the money, returning this to the cheat
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 293 
 
 who asks fifty.' So his honour had to give her 
 the fifty rupees ; the price of the tamein being 
 but twenty-four, as he well knew, having bidden 
 the clerk, Hpo Youk, pay not over twenty-five for 
 the rag. It is fool's work teaching women the 
 price of finery." 
 
 Pho Lone laughed at the way Thaw' thekin had 
 blundered, saying he was well served for saying 
 the tamein was worth more than the real price. 
 
 " I think Mah Pan must make a great deal of 
 money," he added. 
 
 " No," said Moung Woon, " Mah Pan no doubt 
 would dig for turtle eggs going to the pagoda,* 
 but it is not good. She cannot be his honour's 
 broker and also his wife. It was her pretty face 
 that brought the Chinaman to us ; just a chance ; 
 so we brokers did not complain, having tried to 
 buy his grain and failed." 
 
 " She seems very happy," remarked Pho Lone. 
 
 " Why not ? His honour allows her to invite 
 friends to the house ; she goes whither she pleases 
 and does as she likes. The girl who was married 
 to the gentleman who was here many years ago 
 was a good girl ; she learned to mend his clothes 
 and socks, as I am told Englishwomen do for their 
 lords. Mah Pan never does that ; she prefers to 
 amuse herself." 
 
 " She worked at the loom at home," said Pho 
 
 * " Combine business with religion," or, " Kill two birds 
 with one stone."
 
 294 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Lone ; " if English ladies do such work why does 
 not she, wishing to be like them ? " 
 
 " She knows nothing of English ladies," said 
 Moung Woon, " save what she would rather not 
 know." 
 
 " And that ? " 
 
 " They come to play the ball game with his 
 honour. Then Mah Pan stays in the house 
 watching from a window, very jealous." Moung 
 Woon stopped to laugh. " Some day there will be 
 trouble, I think. But we have spoken too much 
 of the girl ; tell me of yourself. They say you 
 were carried off by the dacoit Boh Tah ? " 
 
 " I was," replied Pho Lone, " and I saw many 
 terrible things in the jungle ; as soon as I could I 
 escaped and returned home, joining the police lest 
 I should be caught as a dacoit." For Moung 
 Woon was a good man and much respected in the 
 town. He often told how the Deputy Commis- 
 sioner sent for him and explained what Govern- 
 ment were doing that he might tell the people in 
 his quarter. Pho Lone knew this of old and was not 
 going to boast of his dacoit doings to Moung Woon. 
 
 " When they catch Boh Tah they will hang him 
 for killing Moung Hla's wife at Kyouksay," said 
 Moung Woon. 
 
 " The police will never catch him," said Pho 
 Lone, " how can we catch one whose magical 
 power is so great." It was on his lips to say that 
 it was not the Boh but Moung Toke who had
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 295 
 
 speared Mah Hlaing, but reflected that the less he 
 spoke of such doings now the better. 
 
 Moung Woon lighted a fresh cheroot and stared 
 out across the rank jungle which choked the yard. 
 Presently he asked Pho Lone if he knew where 
 the Boh would lie up during the rains. 
 
 " Nyounglay village, I think," said Pho Lone. 
 
 "Then you may be a sergeant when you choose," 
 said Moung Woon. " If you guide police to that 
 place and they catch the Boh the Government will 
 assuredly give honour and promotion." 
 
 " I am too much afraid," said Pho Lone ; " the 
 Boh would certainly kill us all.'" 
 
 " He didn't kill many police at Kyouksay, the 
 only time he met them," said Moung Woon drily. 
 
 " I will tell the head constable, Moung Wah 
 Gyee where the Boh may be found, and thus gain 
 his favour." 
 
 " A wise young man would wait till report of 
 the Boh came to the thannah ; then he would go 
 to Bay Lee thekin and tell what he knew offering 
 to guide the police," said Moung Woon ; " think of 
 your good father's happiness, you being made a 
 sergeant so soon ! Besides, if you do not offer to 
 go you may be sent." 
 
 " I will think about it/' said Pho Lone ; and as 
 the sky had long since shut and the gong at the 
 mill gate had rung seven o'clock some time ago, he 
 got up to return to the thannah. 
 
 Moung Woon's words touching Boh Tah were
 
 296 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 not very good, to his thinking, and he would have 
 forgotten them but for a piece of duty he had to 
 do a day or two later, when orders came for ten 
 policemen to be at the wharf and meet the creek 
 steamer to escort some dacoits to the lock-up. 
 Pho Lone marched down with the rest in fear and 
 trembling ; but when he saw the dacoits, men 
 whose chests were covered with charms, tied up 
 with cords and cowering before the kullahs who 
 had brought them, Moung Woon's words came 
 back to him, and he began to think that the 
 Government must have some very potent spell to 
 be able to control dacoits like this. Why, every 
 one knew that Boh Tah's charms would enable 
 him to break iron rods with his fingers ; yet these 
 men followed every movement of the police with 
 their eyes, and scarcely dared wriggle their bound 
 hands. It was, however, when they were cutting 
 off the cords and putting the prisoners into the 
 cells that Pho Lone discovered he himself was 
 endowed with the mysterious power which tamed 
 dacoits and made them helpless. A man refused 
 to enter the cell saying one of those inside was his 
 enemy and would kill him. Pho Lone said fiercely 
 " Go! son of a she-dog," raising his baton, and the 
 man ran in praying for mercy ! Next morning he 
 helped to escort the prisoners to the Court-house, 
 and tried his power over them again on the way ; 
 the men shiko'd him and obeyed ; then Pho Lone 
 resolved to follow Moung Woon's advice.
 
 CHAPTER XVII 
 
 THE rainy season was nearly over. When the 
 sun shone the still air was thick in the throat, so 
 that one felt the veins swell and the head tight, 
 while sweat ran as in the hot weather. Myothit 
 was half buried in the rank jungle which had 
 sprung up, round and between the houses, till one 
 needed a dah to cut the way through : round the 
 boats, drawn high on the creek bank, the jungle 
 had grown up as though their day were done. 
 Thorns and hairy-leaved creepers smothered the 
 paths outside the village, but this did not matter 
 as planting out was long since finished, and the 
 young paddy rolled a green sea to the distant 
 hills. The people rose at dawn to eat and smoke 
 and sleep by turns, till night came again. 
 
 " It is very dull," yawned Pho Lone to his 
 mother as they sat on the verandah watching the 
 sun-drawn steam roll along the wet street like 
 smoke from burning stubble, " so dull that I do 
 not wish to live here any more." 
 
 Pho Lone had received a few days leave to visit 
 his mother, who had sent messages that her eyes
 
 298 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 ached to see him again. She continually praised 
 his appearance in uniform, only sorrowing that he 
 had not brought the rifle and gun -spear he had 
 described ; the neighbours, too, showed much 
 respect, but nevertheless the village was a poor 
 place after the town. One reason perhaps was 
 that so many people were ill. Moung Maw lay in 
 his house with fever, Moung Yeik was also sick, 
 and several other young men who might otherwise 
 have made up parties for play in these long days, 
 for it was cool enough when the rain fell. Every 
 body who was not ill was listless, and Pho Lone, 
 glad as he was to see his father and mother again, 
 was cheered by thinking that in four days more 
 he must go back to duty. 
 
 " There is much sickness," said Mali Tsay, who, 
 never having lived anywhere else, did not know 
 what her son meant when he said it was dull. 
 " Many of the neighbours have fever or other sick- 
 ness and Oo Yan will die I think. Mah Khin 
 thinks he will die." 
 
 " Doctors have seen him ? " asked Pho Lone, 
 for there were no doctors in Myothit. 
 
 " Sayah Moung Byan, the drug doctor, came 
 from Ngatheing village, and gave him medicine," 
 said Mah Tsay, who loved to talk of medical 
 matters, " but when Oo Yan had taken what 
 Sayah Moung Byan gave for half a month and 
 was no better, Mah Khin said to the say ah, ' I 
 fear it is not your excellent medicine that my man
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 299 
 
 requires or he must have recovered his health by 
 now. It is the wish of his friends to call in Sayah 
 Bah Pay, the diet doctor.' So Sayah Moung 
 Byan received four rupees for fee, and we sent for 
 Sayah Bah Pay who comes one day in each week 
 to see Oo Yan ; he will come to-morrow, I think, 
 unless much rain falls." 
 
 " Oo Yan is an old man," said Moung Let, "if 
 dieting does not cure it will kill." 
 
 " Sayah Bah Pay is the best diet doctor on the 
 creek," said Mah Tsay ; "he knows more Pali 
 rhymes than Sayah Moung Byan, and he knows 
 more about the stars than Oo Boo Nah himself." 
 
 "The woman thinks much of doctors," said 
 Moung Let soothingly, for his wife's tone was 
 angry. 
 
 " Theirs is an honourable profession, and one 
 respects the doctor nearly as much as the official," 
 said Mah Tsay, " doctors are more respected than 
 rich merchants and such people ; do they not earn 
 Merit each time they prescribe ? " 
 
 " Of course they do," said Pho Lone, " but tell 
 me, did Oo Yan fall ill suddenly ? " 
 
 "At first he was only a little ill. I helped 
 Mah Khin to examine the cocoa-nut. It had hung 
 in the house for only one year but we found it 
 rotten.* She got a new one and made obeisance 
 
 * In every Burmese house hangs a cocoa-nut dedicated to the 
 guardian spirit of the dwelling. This serves the purpose of a 
 health preserver. When any one falls ill, the first thing_.done
 
 300 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 to the house nat ; but Oo Yan getting no better, 
 we sent for Say ah Moung By an." 
 
 " Many people have been ill this rainy season," 
 said Moung Let, twisting off a long green shoot 
 which had pushed through a crack in the wall 
 planks. ' I myself believe that Ko Moung Galay 
 is right when he says evil spirits have caused the 
 sickness. Old people and young besides have had 
 much fever and other diseases." 
 
 " I expect he is right," said Pho Lone. 
 
 He had hardly spoken the words when Mah 
 Tsay said, " the goung comes," and they saw him 
 walking carefully along the pathway whose loose 
 bricks squelched and bubbled to the tread. He 
 looked very grave as he stepped upon the verandah 
 and scraped the dirt off his feet. 
 
 " I have spoken with the elders," he said, un- 
 rolling a paper he carried in his hand, "and they 
 think with me that it will be very good to post 
 this notice on a tree at the end of the village. I 
 will write another in the same words, and post it 
 on a tree at the other end also. Shall I read what 
 I have written ? " 
 
 Moung Let begged him to do so, and the head- 
 man squatting, held up the paper and read these 
 words in the sing-song voice : 
 
 is to examine the cocoa-nut, and if it be either rotting or sprout- 
 ing it must at once be replaced by a new one. The sick person 
 will get well then ; if he does not, you know the old cocoa-nut 
 was not to blame, and had better send for the drug doctor.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 301 
 
 ORDER OF THE VILLAGE GOUNG. 
 
 " The Village Goung, who is the Builder of a 
 Rest-house, gives this order :* 
 
 " Some of my people are afflicted with head- 
 aches, vomiting, coughs and other diseases, caused 
 by wicked beeloos, ghosts and nats. I pray to 
 the Yahans that the people who live within my 
 jurisdiction may be free from all dangers, and I 
 command you wicked beeloos, ghosts and nats to 
 quit my jurisdiction and to betake yourselves to 
 forests, oceans and other distant places. I also 
 order the good nats to drive you away, and to 
 watch over and protect my village." 
 
 " Very good," said Moung Let, as Ko Moung 
 Gal ay ceased reading and looked at him for 
 approval, "but it is in my mind that such an 
 order will not be obeyed unless it be issued by the 
 Great Glory himself." 
 
 "It is said in the town that he is no longer 
 king in Mandalay," said Ko Moung Galay. " If 
 this is so, none can command the nats and demons." 
 
 " The Ingalay Mahgyee,t might," said Moung 
 Let dubiously. " They certainly will not obey 
 your order, friend." 
 
 * An " Order " in these terms was found posted on trees on 
 the outskirts of one of the most nourishing towns in Lower 
 Burma two or three years ago. The official responsible for this 
 sanitary measure was a Magistrate of the First Class, and not 
 a mere jungle village head-man. 
 
 f " Great English Lady " = The Queen.
 
 302 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " I cannot think of anything else to do," sighed 
 the goung. 
 
 "Put it up," said Moung Let recklessly, " only 
 do not let the neighbours see it, lest they laugh 
 saying, ' Ko Moung Galay is become the Great 
 Glory, with a palace in Myothit.' ' 
 
 Sayah Bah Pay arrived on the tide next morning 
 in a boat with two rowers, and a third to steer, for 
 a doctor with any practice at all must travel in 
 some style. The day was sunless, and there was 
 a breath of air stirring, so all the village turned 
 out to pay respect to the sayah and follow him to 
 Oo Yan's house. Pho Lone strolled down the 
 street and sat on the verandah while the doctor 
 examined his patient. Sayah Bah Pay was clever 
 beyond doubt ; even Pho Lone, whose town ex- 
 perience made him inclined to look disdainfully on 
 jungle village sayahs, was obliged to admit that. 
 He felt Oo Yan's pulse and looked at his tongue 
 just as one sees the English doctor do in the 
 Bassein hospital ; when he had done this he asked 
 a few questions in a low tone, and shook his head 
 very gravely at Oo Yan's replies. 
 
 " I will see if I made any mistake in my cal- 
 culations," he said; "let me see; you are sure 
 you told me the date and hour of your birth 
 correctly ? That is very important." 
 
 Oo Yan was quite sure he had told the exact 
 date and hour; it was written in his sadah so 
 there could be no mistake. The sayah went over
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 303 
 
 his calculations carefully, drew a few cabalistic 
 squares, and said he had made no error. 
 
 " The moon was at the full two nights ago," he 
 said to Mah Khin, " you remembered the change 
 of diet?" 
 
 Mah Khin had given her man exactly the foods 
 the sayah had prescribed : dried fish, eggs and 
 bamboo shoots while the moon was waxing ; and 
 the day after the full moon she changed at once 
 to pumpkins, cocoa-nuts and plantains ; he always 
 had as much rice as he wanted, but ate very 
 little. 
 
 The sayah looked graver than ever as he cleared 
 his throat, and began to repeat the Pali rhymes 
 proper for such sickness. He did not understand 
 them himself, and the people knew it, but he 
 rolled them out in a solemn voice, glancing now 
 and again at Oo Yan, who listened with half shut 
 eyes, but never once said he felt better. He must 
 have been very ill indeed. For nearly half a betel 
 chew the doctor repeated rhymes, and then shut 
 his mouth with a snap and sat staring out over 
 the heads of the people who squatted in the street. 
 Mah Khin left her husband's side and went up- 
 stairs to fetch one rupee which she laid before the 
 sayah who took it without a word. 
 
 " You are going to die very soon," he said, as he 
 stood up to leave. " You are beyond the skill even 
 of the famous Sayah Ko Tha Bwin under whom I 
 studied. I shall not come any more.
 
 304 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Oo Yan said yes, he should certainly die very 
 soon, and Mah Khin said the same. As the say ah 
 was stepping out upon the verandah Oo Yan called 
 in his feeble voice : 
 
 " Will you, honoured sir, kindly make a calcula- 
 tion and tell us in what hour I shall die ? " 
 
 The sayah was in haste to go and see Moung 
 Maw and other patients, but being a man of 
 courtly manners he at once sat down and drew 
 out his palm leaf almanack again. He ascertained 
 that Oo Yan would die next morning when the 
 red light was in the sky, and then went up the 
 street, followed by some of the people, to visit 
 Moung Maw, who had seen Sayah Moung Byan, 
 the drug doctor, and said he felt^worse after his 
 physic. 
 
 Ko Moung Galay, Moung Let and all who were 
 related to Oo Yan, remained to talk with him and 
 hear his wishes concerning his funeral ; he seemed 
 to have gained a little strength, for when Mah 
 Khin at his bidding put a pillow under his head, 
 he spoke in the clear voice of health. 
 
 " It is my wish to make offerings at the pagoda. 
 Let three large cocoa-nuts, a bunch of plantains, 
 and much rice, with one jar of oil be offered ; also 
 let candles be lighted and placed in the niches at 
 my day corner and with them a praying flag having 
 written upon it the day of my birth." 
 
 Ko Moung Galay and Moung Let, being Oo 
 Yan's cousins, rose and set about collecting the
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 305 
 
 offering, Pho Lone and others helping. The head- 
 man brought paper, and cutting a slip one finger's 
 length by two fingers' breadth, wrote upon it 
 " Yahu," * that being the day on which Oo Yan 
 was born ; then he mounted it on a slip of bamboo 
 and stuck it among the plantains on the tray. 
 Oo Yan raised himself and said a prayer, after 
 which he sank back and signed that the offering 
 should be taken to the pagoda. 
 
 " I think you will not live till morning, neigh- 
 bour," said Ko Moung Galay, as with Moung Let's 
 aid he set the tray upon his shoulder. "You fail 
 very fast and I think the sayah has made a little 
 mistake in the calculation." 
 
 " He was much hurried," said Mah Khin who 
 was busy preparing candles ; and every one said : 
 " Yes, certainly the learned and honourable man 
 was in a hurry." 
 
 "It is fortunate that the Wednesday corners 
 are the most sheltered of all," said the head-man 
 as he walked up the street with Moung Let who 
 carried the candles and matches. " Were our 
 relation's day Sunday, we could hardly light the 
 candles." 
 
 Ko Moung Galay spoke truth ; the light air of 
 the dawn had grown into a gale which lashed the 
 creek into froth-tipped waves, and kept the 
 bamboos groaning as their feathery crests whipped 
 and swayed. Banks of black cloud were racing 
 
 * Half Wednesday : noon to midnight. 
 
 u
 
 306 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 up too, warning the men to make haste in their 
 pious duty. The wind screamed round the pagoda, 
 laying flat the rank grass which the rains had 
 brought up through its brick paving ; but the 
 Wednesday corners were the most sheltered of the 
 eight,* and after a few failures Moung Let 
 succeeded in lighting the candles he set in the 
 niches. 
 
 As they turned their faces to the village again, 
 they saw the rain-storm advancing over the paddy 
 fields, blotting out the world as it came, with a 
 hissing roar that grew louder until great drops 
 striking the earth bade them run for shelter. The 
 
 O 
 
 kyoung was the nearest roof and thither they ran, 
 Moung Let shouting that it was their duty to tell 
 the Lord Ruler how neighbour Oo Yan was sick 
 unto death. They reached the kyoung just as 
 the storm swept upon the village, and found the 
 hpoongyee rousing himself from meditation. He 
 had already heard the news, but at Ko Moung 
 Galay's request he promised to lend his presence 
 in the house after Oo Yan was dead. It is very 
 good that a hpoongyee sit in the house where any 
 one lies dead, because his sanctity is the best 
 protection against the evil spirits which come 
 about at such a time. Then as the rain still fell 
 very heavily, he threw his yellow robe from his 
 
 * The base of every pagoda is either heptagonal or octagonal, 
 Wednesday being divided into two days in the Burmese calen- 
 dar, thus making eight clays in the week.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 307 
 
 shoulders and gave a short exhortation on the 
 vanity, emptiness, and sorrow of human life. The 
 lightning played white and blue and the thunder 
 crashed and rolled in the very street; but the 
 two supporters sat hearing the priest's solemn 
 words. When he ceased speaking the storm 
 had passed and the sun came to warm the chilled 
 air. 
 
 Oo Yan was lying very still when they returned 
 to the house to eat rice. Pho Lone told them 
 that since they left he had spoken once to say he 
 wished rupees to the number of the years of his 
 life to be spent in alms for the hpoongyees of 
 Myothit, Ngatheing and Ladaw and for the poor 
 of those villages. 
 
 "Seventy-one rupees," said Ko Moung Galay. 
 "Well, our friend has money enough for that. We 
 must invite his friends from up the creek and 
 down to come to his funeral. It is your wish that 
 friends from Ngatheing and Ladaw attend the 
 funeral feasts, is it not, neighbour ? " he added, 
 addressing Oo Yan. The sick man understood 
 when Mah Khin repeated the question, and whis- 
 pered that Ko Moung Galay spoke his desire. 
 
 All that afternoon the old man lay on the low 
 wooden bedstead, seeming to watch the wall where 
 the sunlight played from the dancing water of the 
 creek, while the neighbours sat round talking in 
 low tones of his virtues and good deeds ; for Oo 
 Yan had passed his whole life in the village, and
 
 308 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 all held him in respect as a just and charitable 
 man. 
 
 They had eaten the evening rice and were be- 
 ginning to grow weary of the watch ; the sky had 
 shut and the night was still, save for the shrilling 
 of the crickets and the slow hoot of an owl across 
 the creek. The moon rose, and the dog below 
 the house whimpered as he plashed out into the 
 open street. Oo Yan moved a little, and those of 
 the neighbours who were talking in low tones 
 stopped, and drew nearer round the bedstead ; for 
 the sick man began to speak as one in pain : 
 
 " Lord, Lord, the All Merciful ! May the sum 
 of Merits outweigh " 
 
 The pariah outside gave tongue in a swelling 
 howl, taken up by a hundred dogs along the 
 street. For a few breaths the watchers sat still 
 listening to Mah Khin's sobs ; then Ko Moung 
 Galay rose and said : " Let us light the lamps and 
 place candles on the bed-posts. Moung Pho Lone 
 go to the kyoung and pray the Lord Ruler to 
 grant his sacred presence in the house of death. " 
 
 It was past midnight when the ceremonies were 
 finished. The house being made light with lamps 
 and candles, they drew the bedstead to the front 
 between the house-posts, and washed the dead 
 man before they swathed him in clean white cotton 
 cloth. Then they put on him his Mandalay silk 
 pasoh and a clean white jacket, and Ko Moung 
 Galay placed in the mouth a new rupee for Ferry
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 309 
 
 hire across that river which the dead cross but 
 which flows none can tell whence nor whither. 
 They set his great toes together and tied them 
 with a strip of cloth, his thumbs also. Then, the 
 body being made ready, most of the friends went 
 home to sleep, leaving Mah Khin with the women 
 who had come to sorrow with her, and Moung Let 
 with a few more listening to the pious words of the 
 hpoongyee. 
 
 The funeral band arrived from Ngatheing next 
 day and, the weather being fine, sat playing dirges 
 in the road outside the house where Oo Yan's body, 
 dressed for the grave, lay in sight of passers by. 
 Many people came from Ngatheing and Ladaw for 
 the funeral, and brought their share of food for 
 the feast, which went on from dawn to midnight. 
 All who could rise from their mats followed in the 
 procession to the burial ground, and Mah Tsay 
 assured Mah Khin that so great a funeral had 
 never been seen on the creek before ; and Mah 
 Khin, though the rupees her man had left in the 
 box were few after the alms had been given, spared 
 nothing to do honour to his memory in making the 
 feast afterwards. 
 
 While the people sat eating in the house on the 
 day after Oo Yan's burial, Pho Lone, who in virtue 
 of his office and relationship to the deceased had 
 had much to do, was drawn aside in an idle moment 
 by a Ladaw son who said he had a message to 
 give.
 
 310 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " Boh Tab, whom you followed, has sent word 
 to our village that he will be our friend if we say 
 to you, ' the Boh waits at Nyounglay for his men.' 
 Those were his words," said the young man. 
 
 " Then the band scattered before the rains 
 came ? " asked Pho Lone. 
 
 " We cannot tell. How should we know ? I 
 tell you the words that he sent by the mouth of 
 a woman who stayed only to eat rice, and returned 
 the way she came." 
 
 Pho Lone squatted and drew lines on the earth. 
 It made his heart beat to hear that the Boh had 
 him in mind, and wished him to follow again ; it 
 brought back the old feeling of Boh Tab's power, 
 which was not good now he wore the police uni- 
 form. He had done duty in the gaol also, and the 
 clank of leg-irons was louder in his ear now than 
 the yell of attack. His hand shook as the Ladaw 
 man repeated : 
 
 " The Boh will be our friend if you go, we having 
 given his message." 
 
 " Does he know I am now of the police ? " asked 
 Pho Lone, for a thought had come to him which 
 made his heart leap at its daring. 
 
 " We could find means to let him know." 
 
 "Then tell him these words from me: ''Pho Lone, 
 the little chief, being now of the police, will come 
 to your lordship at Nyounglay, bringing many 
 constables with rifles and ammunition, to follow 
 and eat the country."
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 311 
 
 " We will send that message," said the Ladaw 
 man, rising and laughing with pleasure ; "but will 
 your comrades go ? " 
 
 " Why not ? all the world knows that police- 
 men have often turned dacoits before now. They 
 tell in the thannah how, but a few seasons gone, 
 a sergeant and six men robbed the treasure-chest 
 placed in their keeping, killed the myooke and 
 such of the village men as refused to follow or 
 did not run away, and went to the jungles, the 
 sergeant himself being their chief." 
 
 "I have heard of it," said the Ladaw man ; "but 
 look ! the Boh seeing many armed police approach, 
 may think them enemies, and kill them by his 
 magic. Shall we tell him you will come alone 
 first ? " 
 
 " No," replied Pho Lone, with decision. " Tell 
 him these words : ' Your lordship shall know that 
 the constables are your followers because their 
 leader will carry a white paper in his hand and 
 wave it when within sight of the village." 
 
 " That is very good." The Ladaw son repeated 
 the words, and said again, " We shall now be no 
 longer afraid of the Boh, who robbed our houses 
 last season, having gained his favour by this 
 service." 
 
 " Stop ! " said Pho Lone, as the man turned 
 towards the house where the neighbours sat eating 
 and enjoying themselves, evidently bent on telling 
 his friends the good news. " Stop ! I forbid you to
 
 312 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 speak of what I Lave said till you are back in your 
 village ; if you tell about it now, you must send 
 no word of mine to the Boh." 
 
 The man's face fell ; but in a breath he saw 
 the wisdom of the order. " I will say no word, 
 neighbour ; of course, if people got talking, you 
 would be in danger of arrest." He smiled wisely 
 and went slowly back to his friends. 
 
 When Pho Lone took leave of his mother next 
 morning, before taking boat for Bassein, he told 
 her to be of good heart, for ere next harvest 
 were reaped he should certainly be promoted 
 sergeant.
 
 CHAPTER XVIII 
 
 " LOOK here, bearer ! I told you to take these 
 clothes out and dry them once a week over the 
 basket : you didn't do it." 
 
 "Sahib, the order was obeyed." 
 
 " Bearer ! it was not. See ! the finger goes 
 through the cloth become rotten with damp." 
 Mr. Thorpe spread his lingers and thrust them 
 severally through the back of a tweed coat. 
 " What shaU I say to you ? " 
 
 " Protector of the Poor, it is by reason of the 
 much rain that falls in this country." 
 
 "It is by reason of the disobedience of the bearer 
 who obeys not orders, and whose pay is therefore 
 cut five rupees." 
 
 The bearer represented that he was a very poor 
 man, but without the fervour he would have im- 
 ported into protest against a fine of four annas ; he 
 made the representation merely as a matter of 
 dastour and principle, knowing well that the 
 master had prickly heat, and that prickly heat 
 is a magnifying medium, whose effects are not 
 likely to continue until pay-day. If master had
 
 314 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 meant business he would have cut eight annas at 
 most. 
 
 The bearer, laden with garments smelling of 
 mould, disappeared in the back verandah to hang 
 them over the gigantic skeleton beehive, which 
 covered a pan of glowing charcoal : the master 
 found the book he had been seeking, tossed aside 
 the damp-released binding, and strolled out to lie 
 in a long arm-chair under the punkah in the front 
 verandah, where he smoked and read, and wriggled 
 after the manner of those afflicted with the most 
 irritating of harmless skin affections ; battling 
 with mosquitoes at intervals by way of a change. 
 
 " I wish Mah Pan were in to give me tanakhet," 
 he growled, rubbing his shoulders against the 
 chair, " it's the only thing on earth that's any good 
 for prickly heat." 
 
 But Mah Pan had gone out to visit a friend, and 
 the fragrant powder she smeared upon her cheeks 
 was concealed in some hiding-place, and further 
 secured by one of the twelve or fourteen keys she 
 loved to display, tied to her neck -kerchief. 
 
 " Hang me," said Thorpe, with another desperate 
 writhe, " hang me, if I go out again, though all the 
 snipe in Asia are reported across the road. It's 
 
 fagging after them in the sun that has brought 
 
 i 
 it on. 
 
 Mention of snipe reminded him of a duty for- 
 gotten, for he laid down his book and called the 
 bearer, whom he ordered to send six birds to the
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 315 
 
 house of the padre, with salaams to the memsahib. 
 Then he shouted to the punkah coolie to pull 
 harder, and strove to forget his sorrows in the 
 schemes of Becky Sharp. The perspiration trickled 
 down his brow and hung upon his eyelashes, and 
 the Burmese pasoh he wore settled in clinging 
 folds about his legs : the thermometer marked only 
 ninety degrees in the verandah, but earth was a 
 cauldron over the pit of hell. 
 
 The pitiless sun glare wavered, and suddenly 
 faded in a twilight so gloomy that Thorpe was 
 roused from his book : a hundred and four inches 
 of rain had fallen since May, but the monsoon keeps 
 its most violent outbursts for its parting, and now 
 the skies wept till the spouts shot clear of the holes 
 they had burrowed in the path below during the 
 last few months. 
 
 " Bearer ! put clothes to dry for the gentleman 
 who comes to breakfast. Stop, punkah ! " for the 
 thermometer was falling like mine shares in scare 
 time. 
 
 The storm was at its worst, an occasional splutter 
 drumming ponderously on an exposed corner of the 
 verandah floor, when Thorpe's ear caught the mash 
 of footsteps on the path, and then the squelch of 
 water-logged shoes on the stairs. " Come up," 
 he shouted, wondering who it might be, for only a 
 white man would enter shod, and the visitor was 
 on foot. 
 
 " Oh Thorpe, excuse me," said a voice trained in
 
 316 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 elocution. " I shall make your house in a terrible 
 mess. I was caught in it." 
 
 " Come along up and get into dry clothes, my 
 dear padre. By good luck I told the bearer five 
 minutes ago to air them for Bailey, who is coming 
 down to breakfast. You will stay, of course." 
 
 The Rev. Mr. Melling reached the top of the 
 stairs and paused there to pull off the soaked pith 
 hat which had settled over his ears, and wring the 
 weight of water from the sleeves of his black coat. 
 He was a well-built man, over middle height, who 
 looked as though he might once have been an 
 athlete ; but there was a careworn, anxious look 
 in his face, which suggested that the grey in his 
 hair was premature. 
 
 " My wife expects me back to tiffin at one," he 
 said doubtfully, as he plashed across the verandah 
 to the bedroom, flinging a shower at every step. 
 " Could you let her know ? " 
 
 " I'll send a man up at once. Were you walking, 
 padre ? " 
 
 Mr. Melling confessed that he had been walk- 
 ing, with an air of guilt as though exercise of that 
 kind were at least a social offence. 
 
 " Why on earth couldn't you tell me you'd like 
 a pony ; the two of 'em are eating their heads off 
 in the stable, as you know." 
 
 "Well, you see, Thorpe, I don't ride often now. 
 I never was much of a horseman, and last time you 
 lent me a pony it bolted, and I had to walk home
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 317 
 
 five miles in the dark." Mr. Melling let the bearer 
 pull off his wet flannel shirt, and looked round for a 
 towel. " I say, just tell your man not to put my 
 shoes too near the fire," he added anxiously, as the 
 bearer pounced upon them. Thorpe's eyes rested 
 on the shoes as he gave the order : whole and 
 respectable clothing in this country is something 
 in the nature of a luxury, particularly in an out- 
 station during the wet season ; but sound foot gear 
 is a necessity, and the condition of Mr. Melling's 
 shoes told their tale plainly as any bank account. 
 Leaving his guest to enjoy a rub down in the bath- 
 room with a charcoal-smelling rough towel, Thorpe 
 went out into the verandah to meet Mr. Bailey, the 
 District Superintendent of Police, whose gharry 
 had just rattled under the porch ; the rain was 
 passing off, but a grey fog of waters still hid the 
 town half a mile up the river. 
 
 " Hullo, Bailey ! what's happened to you ? " 
 
 " I was clawed by a Chinese gambler this morn- 
 ing. I only hope his infernal nails were clean," 
 he felt his lacerated cheek tenderly. " I'd rather 
 have a clout from a leopard than a Chinaman ; 
 dirty savage ! " 
 
 " But what is the chief of the police doing 
 arresting gamblers with his own right hand ? " 
 
 " Thank you, Thorpe, yes, sherry and bitters, I 
 think you said." He spread himself luxuriously 
 on a cane lounge as Thorpe called for the drink. 
 " Now," twirling his glass, " I'll tell you. I've
 
 318 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 had my eye on Mr. Boon Sing for months past. 
 I knew his house was nothing but a gambling den, 
 but my brilliant bobbies couldn't get evidence to 
 convict. So, when that Norwegian barque came 
 up to-day, I went on board and came ashore dis- 
 guised. I caught Boon Sing with two pals red- 
 handed, and we had a rare set-to before my false 
 beard came off. Lord ! you would have laughed 
 to see them collapse when they recognised me. 
 How are you, padre ? " to Mr. Melling who now 
 emerged from the curtained door of the bedroom, 
 in a shapeless suit of white drill, clean but crying 
 loud for scissors at the frayed cuffs, collar, and 
 seams. 
 
 " Do my shoes fit you ? " inquired Thorpe. 
 
 The shoes fitted as if made to measure. Mr. 
 Melling said it with a sigh, and glanced round the 
 verandah. 
 
 "Your house has been done up since I was 
 here last," he said. 
 
 "You haven't been near me for about five 
 months ; I have had things put to rights to some 
 extent." 
 
 " New matting in the front room ; ceiling re- 
 strained and whitewashed. Thorpe, I believe 
 you're going to be married ! " 
 
 " Come on in to breakfast," said Thorpe, colour- 
 ing slightly. " You don't catch me marrying on 
 four hundred dibs a month, padre." 
 
 " I'd be sorry for you if you did," said Mr.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 319 
 
 Melling, and the lines on his forehead grew deeper. 
 He drew three hundred and fifty rupees a month 
 himself, and had a wife and family to support 
 therewith ; " and what with these whining Eura- 
 sian loafers, and no Easter offering to speak of," 
 Mrs. Melling was wont to say in unguarded 
 moments of confidence, " I don't know how we 
 get along at all." 
 
 " Snipe ! " exclaimed the padre with a brighten- 
 ing eye as the khitmagar presented the dish. 
 " Now I haven't seen a snipe this year." He 
 raised the knife and fork, but hesitated. His face 
 fell ; for to-day was Monday and probably, most 
 probably 
 
 " I got seven couple this morning in an hour 
 and a half/' said Thorpe, who was blessed with 
 that mental ability to be in two places at once, 
 which men call tact ; and the fork went home in 
 a plump breast followed by a sigh of relief. Mr. 
 Melling had denounced Sunday shooting, Sunday 
 tennis, and other Eastern irregularities from the 
 pulpit and privately, till he recognised that persis- 
 tence in attack on recognised institutions would 
 only impair his power for good, when he wisely 
 refrained, but made the rules for his own conduct 
 the more rigid to atone. 
 
 " I'm glad it wasn't yesterday," he said frankly, 
 " Your cook knows how to do snipe, Thorpe." 
 
 " You haven't been up at the tennis court 
 lately," remarked Bailey, who shared the universal
 
 820 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 liking for Mr. Melling, though, as he often said, 
 he couldn't quite understand him. 
 
 " I have not played of late." An explanation 
 seemed about to follow, but did not : the padre 
 did not care to say it was because his tennis-shoes 
 were worn out, and he could not spare ten rupees 
 to buy another pair ; and he was too simple- 
 minded and honest to frame an excuse. 
 
 " I think of taking up the study of Burmese," 
 he said, by way of turning the subject. " I have 
 so much time on my hands, and I often feel that 
 residence out here would be more tolerable if I 
 knew something of the people." 
 
 " Now there I'm with you," said Bailey, who 
 spoke the language like a native, and understood 
 the Burmari and his ways of thought much better 
 than he did Mr. Melling and his views. " Once 
 you break the back of the language it's all plain 
 sailing, isn't it Thorpe ? You must have learned a 
 lot lately." 
 
 " Yes ; I always make a point of talking with 
 the brokers and people during the rainy season 
 when we're all idle," replied his host, accompany- 
 ing the words with a warning kick under the 
 table. 
 
 " It seems strange to have lived out here so 
 long and to know as little of the people as I did 
 on the day we landed," said the padre. 
 
 " They don't come in your way ; you would 
 soon pick up the language if they did," said
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 321 
 
 Thorpe, " come outside and have a rubber if you 
 don't mind dummy." 
 
 "Well, Thorpe " 
 
 "All right, old fellow, we play for love 
 here." 
 
 " What? " demanded the suppressor of gamblers, 
 pausing in his choice of cheroots from the hot- 
 water plate. 
 
 " We'll have a private chick on the rub if you 
 like, Bailey, or a gold mohur if that's your form, 
 but no points." 
 
 " Done as to the gold mohur," said Bailey, 
 drawing in his chair at the whist table. "Hooray! 
 dummy and I. Well ! " for the khitmagar was 
 standing at his elbow. " A policeman begs leave 
 to speak-? What a nuisance these fellows are ; he 
 may come up here, Thorpe ? Thanks." 
 
 The constable was accordingly called up, and 
 squatted on his heels four yards away till bidden 
 come nearer. 
 
 " Tell me what it's all about if there is no 
 secret," said Mr. Melling to Thorpe. 
 
 There was nothing of a private nature in Pho 
 Lone's errand. He begged his lordship's leave to 
 bring important news ; by his lordship's favour he 
 had been to see his friends at his village, and had 
 there received information concerning the dacoit 
 Boh Tah. 
 
 " O-ho ! " Bailey dropped the cards he had been 
 " making" while the man spoke and faced round.
 
 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " You heard news of Boh Tah, did you \ Now 
 what did you hear ? " 
 
 " A Ladaw son came to my village, and said : 
 ' The Boh is at Nyounglay village; ' he said those 
 words to me." 
 
 " Oh, and why did he say those words to you ? " 
 inquired Bailey, who knew by long and sad ex- 
 perience that the police were not usually the con- 
 fidants of village men in such matters. 
 
 Pho Lone supposed it was because he, by his lord- 
 ships' favour, was a policeman ; no, the Ladaw son 
 was not his friend ; he had never seen him before 
 that he remembered. Having received this news he 
 thought it proper to report at once to his lordship. 
 
 "I confess I don't quite understand it," said 
 Bailey in English, "but we'll come to that after- 
 wards. Now see here, my man, did the Ladaw son 
 say what the Boh was doing at Nyounglay ? " 
 
 Pho Lone thought it very likely he was collecting 
 men. 
 
 "Your views are no doubt of value, but I don't 
 want them : did the Ladaw son say, ' The Boh is 
 collecting men ' ? " 
 
 Pho Lone fenced with the question, but finally 
 driven into a corner gave in and answered : " Yes, 
 he did say so." 
 
 " Bailey," struck in Thorpe> " pardon the inter- 
 ruption, but perhaps I can throw a little light on 
 the mystery. Ask him his name and village. I 
 thought I knew him," as Pho Lone gave his name and
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 
 
 that of his father. " Moung Let is a most respect- 
 able old chap ; his hopeful son here was carried off 
 by the Boh last hot weather. Moung Let came and 
 begged me to get him a pardon in advance. I 
 thought I mentioned it one night at the club when 
 Boh Tah was a good deal talked about, but perhaps 
 you weren't there." 
 
 "I've forgotten if you did," said Bailey. He 
 pulled thoughtfully at his cheroot, and thought for 
 a minute before addressing Pho Lone again. 
 
 " Well then, my man, as you know Nyounglay 
 village, and also the face of the Boh now don't 
 be a fool : this gentleman has just told me how 
 you were made to follow, so you needn't take the 
 trouble to tell lies." 
 
 Pho Lone laughed shamefacedly, saying he ran 
 away from the Boh as soon as he could. 
 
 " You can show the path to this village and can 
 swear to the Boh ? Yes ; very good. Therefore 
 you will guide me there : we shall start in one hour; 
 you will take a note to the sergeant in charge of 
 the thannah at once." 
 
 Thorpe called for writing materials, and Mr. 
 Melling looked on with respectful admiration 
 while Bailey wrote a note in Burmese as fast as he 
 could have done it in English. 
 
 " There it is," tossing the paper to Pho Lone. 
 " What is that you say about promotion 1 Wait 
 till we have got the Boh, my man ; time enough to 
 talk of promotion then."
 
 324 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Pho Lone shiko'd and crept away downstairs. 
 Bailey sat still for a few minutes ruminating. 
 
 " You said that young man's father is respect- 
 able, Thorpe ; have you known him long ? " 
 
 " I've only known him myself for six seasons ; 
 but he has been on our books for the last twenty 
 years. I remember that I licked the son for cheat- 
 ing in the godown once ; but that doesn't affect 
 my belief that it's quite a true bill about his being 
 carried off against his will. I don't believe he has 
 the pluck to go dacoiting of his own accord. " 
 
 " I'U forgive him his dacoity, if he puts me in 
 the way of laying Boh Tah by the heels. Mackin- 
 lay, my assistant, nearly killed himself last hot 
 season, hunting the rascal through the jungles ; 
 he very nearly collared the whole gang after the 
 Kyouksay affair." 
 
 There was no whist that afternoon. Bailey had 
 no thought for anything but the news Pho Lone 
 had brought, and chafed impatiently till a pony 
 was brought round, when he threw his farewells 
 over his shoulder, and cantered off in the sweltering 
 heat. 
 
 Left alone with Thorpe, Mr. Melling reverted to 
 his idea of learning Burmese ; and from that found 
 his way to the care which lay so heavily upon him 
 the education of his two boys, aged respectively 
 six and seven. Without private means, interest, 
 or hope of advancement, the educational outlook 
 was a blank one indeed : meantime the two
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 
 
 children ran wild under the bare bungalow, happy 
 in their freedom from clothes worthy the name, 
 and living in a world of their own, created from a 
 blend of English, of Tamil picked up from the 
 Madrasee chokra, and of Burmese acquired heaven 
 knows how. 
 
 " There are schools in the Hills of course," re- 
 marked the padre, "but I don't even see my way 
 to them, much less to an education at home. 
 It's hard enough to scrape up the few pounds 
 we send to the wife's mother to dress the 
 girl we left with her eight years ago. It's no 
 country for a poor man with a family," he 
 continued, thoughtfully. " I was thirty-three 
 when we left Smallwood-under-Barton, and I 
 thought I was doing well in the worldly sense 
 to exchange the hundred and fifty pounds I got 
 there for three hundred and fifty out here. It was 
 a mistake. My rector urged me to come out ; I 
 remember he was great on the idea that there were 
 no poor to tax the parson's pocket in this country. 
 He had never heard of the Eurasian. I cannot 
 put up with those wretched creatures, their vanity 
 and lies." The padre threw away the end of his 
 cheroot with a vicious jerk. " I offered one who 
 came begging the other day a rupee to do half an 
 hour's carpentering in the house ; he said that was 
 native's work, and asked if I thought it a Christian 
 thing to insult a fellow European because he was 
 poor."
 
 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 "I'm afraid your own profession is to blame for 
 a good many of these loafers. The missionaries 
 go about rescuing the youngsters from a pasoh and 
 idle bliss for trousers and idle misery. Rescue! 
 If they were cleaner I should - object to them 
 less ; but dignity in a dirty shirt nauseates me. 
 Going to the root of the evil, it's a matter of 
 money to a great extent. Fellows come out here 
 and slave on pay that won't let them marry till 
 they've burned out their vitality in early old 
 age." 
 
 " Government can't afford to increase expendi- 
 ture nowadays," said the padre, who shrank from 
 discussing the social aspects of the knotty Eurasian 
 question : but Thorpe did not observe his dis- 
 inclination to dig up the " root of the evil." 
 
 " Lots of men I know would rather marry, even 
 in a jungle station, than live alone; but marriage 
 is discouraged by the high-minded people at head- 
 quarters. I know their end idea is reasonable 
 enough ; they must be able to move a man at a 
 few days' notice, and a bachelor is a more mobile 
 item than a married man. Young Wauchope, who 
 married a girl in Maulmain, told me that his chief 
 advised him not to saddle himself with a wife, as 
 the Government wouldn't spare him a single move 
 on that account. And yet Government House 
 has a periodical outbreak of imbecility which it- 
 works off in moral circulars." 
 
 Mr. Melling listened and swung his hand ner-
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 327 
 
 vously ; Thorpe relighted his cheroot and went on 
 again. "And mind you there is another thing 
 to consider. I don't think it's playing fair to go 
 home and marry a girl whose notion of this country 
 is a muddle of palm trees, niggers and elephants, 
 with a sandbank in the background, and then 
 bring her out to some ghastly jungle station where 
 there isn't another petticoat within fifty miles or 
 more. It's all right for us ; we have our work 
 and a bit of sport thrown in now and again to 
 keep us going. I have enough to do and manage 
 to have a good enough time all round ; but if T 
 married to-morrow on four hundred a month what 
 would my wife do with herself all day ? " 
 
 Mr. Melling did not answer at once. His 
 thoughts flew to the naked bungalow near the 
 church, which he got cheap because it had a leaky 
 roof, uneven floors, and doors and fittings uni- 
 formly dilapidated. He looked inside and saw his 
 patient wife under a punkah still for lack of a 
 servant to pull it, stitching at the jacket for little 
 Willy and soothing the sickly three-year-old girl 
 who seemed so likely to follow her two brothers 
 to the station cemetery a place where graves, 
 when you could see them for jungle, were oftener 
 troughs than mounds. Other Englishwomen had 
 a native tailor in to do such work ; but the durzee 
 charged one rupee a day, so his aid was out of the 
 question. 
 
 " I rather think she would find enough to do if
 
 328 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 she had little ones, Thorpe," he said at length, 
 " but you won't be here many seasons more ? " 
 
 " No ; I get a run home the year after next, 
 and they have promised me a move to Rangoon 
 when I come out. I shouldn't mind being married 
 in Rangoon, there's plenty for a girl to do there." 
 
 " Wait till you're a partner in the firm ! Don't 
 make the awful mistake of marrying on inadequate 
 means out here. We've buried two in that 
 horrible place beyond the maidan : both boys ; 
 both of fever ; and a few hundred rupees to send 
 them away would have saved both. And as 
 things are, I sometimes think you know, Thorpe, 
 much as we both felt it 
 
 He broke off abruptly and saying it was time 
 he thought of going home, swung himself on his 
 feet. 
 
 " Why, there's our chokra with a note," he 
 said suddenly. " Be quick, you boy ! " 
 
 " For Thorpe sahib," said the boy quickening 
 his pace. 
 
 " Our little girl is seedy and I get anxious," 
 explained Mr. Melling with a nervous laugh, " I 
 might have guessed that the wife had sent a line 
 of thanks for the birds." 
 
 By some fatality the padre's shoes had met 
 the fate he had dreaded ; they were scorched to 
 cinders and useless when the amazed bearer pro- 
 duced them. 
 
 " Now you needn't say any more, Thorpe," said
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 329 
 
 Mr. Melling in despair of stopping the flood of 
 apology and regret. " I'll just walk off in yours, 
 and if it will keep you quiet I'll keep them." 
 
 "That's a good fellow, I'm so glad they fit." 
 
 " I wonder now," said Thorpe to himself as Mr. 
 Melling picked his way down the path, "I wonder 
 if he has any suspicion how those old wrecks got 
 burned ; hope not." 
 
 It was on the evening of this day that the 
 padre wrote one of those honest letters which did 
 something to impair his prospects of preferment. 
 It was to the Secretary of the An ti- Opium Society 
 who had written begging his services to collect 
 evidence to lay before a famous Commission. 
 
 " I much regret" he wrote, " that I feel unable 
 to lend the assistance you desire. I am of opinion 
 that the evils resulting from the use of opium are 
 insignificant in themselves, and as nothing by 
 comparison with another social irregularity 
 peculiar to the East, and which can only be re- 
 moved by greater liberality on the part of the 
 Imperial Government towards its junior officers 
 in all services ; also by private employers. I am 
 disinclined to do even my little in a movement that 
 seeks a change calculated to produce large de- 
 crease in the revenue ivhich is already unequal to 
 the calls upon it" 
 
 From which it would appear that Thorpe's care 
 to avoid wounding his susceptibilities had been 
 labour wasted.
 
 CHAPTER XIX 
 
 " Go slow, my man, go slow ! His lordship said 
 to you, ' I cannot permit the policemen, your com- 
 rades, to approach my person carrying guns ; ' were 
 those his words ? They were. Well, then, what 
 did you say to that ? " 
 
 " Lord, I made answer, ' I am your lordship's 
 slave.' " 
 
 "And the Boh said?" 
 
 " The dacoit thought a space, and said to me, 
 ' It is my order that the policemen ]eave their 
 guns in the jungle, and come one by one to make 
 obeisance. I shall then lead all my followers to 
 bring the guns in.' Those were the words of the 
 dacoit." 
 
 " Wary old bird is Boh Tah," remarked Mr. 
 Bailey, throwing his leg over his knee. " Really, 
 he displays wonderful acumen. I'm afraid that 
 plan would not suit us," he added in Burmese. 
 
 " Your lordship's servant hoped that the dacoit 
 would be taken in by the plan named to the 
 Ladaw son," said Pho Lone. 
 
 " My servant was a little too trusting, it seems;
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 331 
 
 I never thought myself he would be such a fool, 
 and I don't think I should have cared to risk my 
 reputation by letting you try your plan if the Boh 
 had consented." 
 
 " Lord ! " 
 
 *** To-morrow morning, therefore, when there is 
 light to see the veins in the hand, you will follow 
 me to the village and point out the house in which 
 the Boh sleeps." 
 
 " Your slave is a little lame in the right foot," 
 said Pho Lone, turning yellow ; this plan did not 
 fit in with his ideas at all. 
 
 Mr. Bailey regarded his slave with an air of 
 indulgent scepticism. 
 
 "Your right foot will be well to-morrow morn- 
 ing," he said, slowly ; and Pho Lone shiko'd and 
 crept away. 
 
 Mr. Bailey had brought his force of ten con- 
 stables to within a couple of hours of Nyounglay, 
 which was as near as he thought risk of premature 
 discovery allowed, and had sent Pho Lone on 
 alone to ascertain that Boh Tah still lay there. 
 Now he had been satisfied on this vital point, it 
 remained to decide how he should best set about 
 making the arrest. He wanted to take the man 
 alive, partially as a matter of credit, and also 
 because he had an eye to the moral effect to be 
 wrought by parading through the villages on the 
 march home a notorious dacoit leader in handcuffs 
 like a mere pickpocket. For, despite dishearten-
 
 332 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 ing experience, he still clung to the idea that such 
 exhibitions must shake the mischievous faith of 
 the people in the potency of dacoit magic. He 
 half despised himself for indulging in this notion ; 
 for none knew better than he how easily police 
 successes of this kind were explained away not 
 that the people often required such explanation ; 
 as a general rule, they politely declined to believe 
 that the prisoner was the man the police declared 
 him to be. 
 
 " Really, I don't know that I care much if I do 
 have to drop the brute," thought Bailey, as he 
 stepped off his chair into the high cot he always 
 used for jungle work. " I've only got one witness 
 who can swear to him, and the beggar is as 
 likely as not to get clear off on appeal, if I 
 take him alive. The man / want to shoot is 
 the Judicial Commissioner, with his fantastic 
 notions of evidence," and with this savage re- 
 flection against the legal chief of the province he 
 fell asleep. 
 
 A little conversation with his comrades had 
 induced Pho Lone to reconsider the state of his 
 foot, the sergeant having assured him that the 
 whole force would go ; and though he limped a 
 little for form's sake when summoned next morn- 
 ing, he professed himself able to walk as far as 
 Nyounglay. Mr. Bailey expressed his gratification 
 with an earnestness that made his men laugh, and 
 for Pho Lone's encouragement did a little magic on
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 333 
 
 his own account by the light of the lamp on his 
 folding camp-table. 
 
 " You will observe that I put in this cartridge 
 large shot to the number of nine, that being a 
 sacred number, and therefore very fatal to the 
 virtue of all charms ; and also because the car- 
 tridge won't hold any more." 
 
 Pho Lone, much impressed, said, " Lord ! " and 
 wondered why Sergeant Moung Nee chuckled in 
 that disrespectful way. 
 
 " This machine screwed upon the edge of the 
 table is also a very wonderful magic appliance. 
 You see the shot in the cartridge ? I put the car- 
 tridge in, turn this handle a sacred number of 
 times three, and the shot do not fall out when I 
 toss the cartridge about. Had the Boh any magic 
 things like mine ? " 
 
 Pho Lone could truthfully declare he had none ; 
 and though he began to feel a lurking suspicion 
 that the gentleman who was so stern and unap- 
 proachable in town was not above poking fun in 
 the jungle, he was sufficiently puzzled by the 
 work of the cartridge-turner to forget his limp 
 when they started five minutes later. The moon 
 was low, and they had to feel their way step by 
 step through the darkness that hid the jungle 
 path. Mr. Bailey refused to allow a lantern, not 
 knowing when they might come out upon the open 
 ground in sight of the village ; so the advance 
 was slow enough. It was five o'clock when they
 
 334 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 emerged from the forest and struck across the 
 park land, through knee-deep grass, for the outcrop 
 of rock which marked the path up the hill-side. 
 Arrived here, Bailey halted his men and asked 
 Pho Lone about the track. 
 
 " H'm, the rain has washed away the earth 
 so that what spikes are left stick up a hand's 
 breadth ; also the growth of the bushes has dis- 
 placed the cart-wheels. I'm afraid this shows a 
 lack of attention to detail on the part of Boh 
 Tah ; I had thought better of so judicious a man. 
 The bush grows within a bowshot of the houses ; 
 say, seventy or eighty yards ; and thins out so 
 that men can hide ? Yes, my man, so I supposed ; 
 it would without doubt be very good that you lie 
 down hidden when you call the Boh's name ; but 
 it will be still better for you to obey my order." 
 
 He led the way up the path in the doubtful 
 light of the sinking moon, treading softly in his 
 heavy shooting boots, dodging the twigs which 
 caught and broke away with a noisy rustle ; for 
 the jungle on either hand was shoulder high, 
 denser and thornier than ever since the rains, and 
 bulged over the narrow track in places so that 
 the men had to force a passage. He found a stake 
 or two, uncovered and aslant, and stamped these 
 down as he passed ; he had picked men behind 
 him who understood the business, and they reached 
 the crest of the hill without mishap as a tinge of 
 colour flushed the cold grey horizon.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 335 
 
 It was not yet light enough to make snap 
 shooting desirable with dangerous game ; so Bailey 
 bade his men take cover, and sat himself down to 
 smoke contentedly till dawn should break. The 
 forest-clad hill-tops beyond the village were 
 smothered in white cloud and on the slopes wisps 
 of vapour hung about the trees like dewy spider 
 webs ; the air was chill and damp ; night-birds 
 and crickets were hushed, and the silence was 
 intense. 
 
 " Another twenty minutes," said Bailey, draw- 
 ing his cheroot into a brighter glow to read his 
 watch, " and then." 
 
 Involuntarily his thoughts flew back to his first 
 exploit of this kind ; when the challenged mur- 
 derer, decoyed from his hut, fell dead, shot in 
 the act of stooping to seize his gun. If Boh Tah 
 had the sense to do what Pho Goung did not 
 peep through the matting when he was called, 
 instead of coming out straightway well, the 
 betting was there would be some promotion going. 
 Promotion ! Bailey smiled as he thought of his 
 mother's letter after the Pho Goung incident ; 
 how she wrote praying that the sin of bloodshed 
 might be forgiven him, and hoping the promotion 
 it brought meant higher pay. He looked round 
 eastwards ; the heavy cloud rims were glistening 
 white and the jungle outline struck clear against 
 the sky ; as he looked a cock in the village flapped 
 his wings and crowed ; he jumped up, drew the
 
 336 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 cartridges, saw the barrels clear, and reloading, 
 softly closed the breech. 
 
 " Load quietly," he said, and singling out Pho 
 Lone with his eye, beckoned him to follow. The 
 swish of the grass seemed loud as they crossed the 
 open ground towards the huts, shut and silent, 
 against the jungle. 
 
 " Which house ? " he asked, stopping within 
 twenty yards, and throwing aside his cheroot. 
 
 Pho Lone pointed, but his hand shook till it 
 took in half the row. 
 
 " That won't do, my man. Unknown traps are 
 half the fun at Hurlingham, but with this kind of 
 bird they don't do. Come now," in Burmese, 
 " count. End house ? No. Next one ? No. Is 
 it the next ? It is ; good. Now call. Lie flat if 
 you like. " For Pho Lone had sunk upon his heels, 
 his knees unequal to the strain. 
 
 " What words ? " 
 
 "These words: 'Ho, friend! Is his lordship 
 the chief there ? ' Go on, be sharp, the dogs will 
 wake everybody," as a watchful cur gave tongue. 
 
 Pho Lone drew a long breath and called. Only 
 the echoes and the village dogs replied. Bailey 
 tapped his gun stock impatiently. 
 
 "Call again." 
 
 A muffled voice replied from within the closed 
 house, and Pho Lone cried once more, " Will your 
 lordship deign to speak ? " 
 
 Bailey caught the sound of movement within,
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 337 
 
 and brought his fowling-piece to the "ready." 
 The hanging mat creaked out and a figure swathed 
 in a pasoh slid into sight. 
 
 " Boh!" choked Pho Lone. 
 
 " Will you come into Bassein ? " roared Bailey, 
 feeling the triggers. " Move and I shoot you 
 dead." 
 
 Between the hammers for one eternal second his 
 eye met Boh Tah's. 
 
 " Your servant will come," said Boh Tah, 
 hoarsely. 
 
 " Then lie down ! flat on your face ! " 
 
 " Mother ! " exclaimed Pho Lone ; for the Boh, 
 whose sorcery was great as the sorcery of the 
 Bahmai Sadaw himself, who, had he chosen, could 
 with a word have called down the lightning or 
 brought legions of demons to his aid, made obei- 
 sance to Bay Lee thekin, knelt, and then threw 
 himself on his face crying for mercy. 
 
 " Is there any one else in that house ? " 
 
 A woman, who must have been waiting for the 
 order, pressed her way out and shivered as she 
 faced the levelled gun ; her tamein touched the 
 head of the Boh where he lay. Pho Lone saw the 
 dingy cotton drag on his head as she knelt, and 
 yet the Boh never stirred. Was he a Man ? 
 
 Another call and a man appeared, to crouch 
 with his hands raised in supplication. 
 
 " Are you all ? " 
 
 " Lord, we are all in this house." 
 
 y
 
 338 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " Come up, men ! " shouted Bailey, lowering his 
 gun ; and the police raced forward, Sergeant 
 Moung Nee clinking the handcuffs. They dropped 
 their rifles and, pouncing upon the Boh, dragged 
 him down to the ground and chained his wrists. 
 
 " Sit," said the sergeant fiercely, and the Boh, 
 meekly shikoing, squatted. 
 
 " Here, constables Tha Loo, Pho Lone ! Guard 
 these three people, while we search the houses." 
 
 Mr. Bailey went off with the rest of his posse to 
 seek more dacoits, and Pho Lone and his comrade 
 stood over the little group ; they preferred guard- 
 ing prisoners to peering about in dark houses 
 where men might hide with dahs, but Pho Lone 
 caught the Boh's eye and quailed. " It would be 
 
 better to chain his hands behind " he began, 
 
 when the chained hands flew out and gripped his 
 throat, and he fell under the Boh, whose eyes 
 blazed like a jungle cat's. 
 
 " He kills me ! " he shrieked. 
 
 There was a sound like a blow on rotten wood, 
 and the Boh rolled over stunned by Tha Loo's 
 rifle butt. 
 
 "What is this!" inquired Mr. Bailey, return- 
 ing. 
 
 Pho Lone explained that this dacoit had 
 attempted to kill him ; adding that he thought 
 it would be a very good plan to shoot him dead 
 at once. 
 
 "Tried to kill you, did he? Now, really it
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 339 
 
 does not surprise me ; " and from the way the 
 gentleman looked at him Pho Lone thought that 
 he thought it would not much have mattered if 
 the Boh had succeeded. 
 
 Some of the men wanted must have contrived 
 to escape while the first house was being cleared, 
 for only three whom Pho Lone could recognise as 
 old acquaintances were taken. 
 
 "There is one Shway Dway who told me he 
 lived here," he remarked to the sergeant, as they 
 escorted the prisoners down the path behind Mr. 
 Bailey. " He must have got away." 
 
 " Yes. Shway Dway ; I know him well," said 
 the sergeant. "The quietest man we ever have 
 in the gaol ; no trouble at all with Shway Dway. 
 I am sorry we did not catch him instead of that 
 little tiger who attacked you. We shall have 
 trouble with him, I think." 
 
 " He is very rash," said Pho Lone, " and will 
 run away if he can." 
 
 " We must watch him closely," said the ser- 
 geant ; and being a cautious man, he resolved to 
 chain the Boh by the ankles every night when 
 Bay Lee thekin was not looking ; which he did, 
 sleeping the sleep of the just with the handcuff- 
 key in his pasoh. It was doubtless owing to 
 these precautions that the Boh was unable to 
 work magic that would have killed the whole 
 escort, and that he was safely consigned to the 
 lock-up, very stiff in the arms, five days later.
 
 340 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Pho Lone waited anxiously for several days 
 after they got back to Bassein for news of his 
 promotion, but none coming he took courage to 
 creep into Bay Lee thekin's office and present 
 the petition, which he had drawn up with the 
 aid and advice of all the constables in the 
 thannah. 
 
 " So you want promotion," said the gentleman, 
 turning in his chair, and looking at Pho Lone 
 with his head on one side. " I can't say any- 
 thing about that until you have been tried, you 
 know." 
 
 " Tried ! your lordship ? " 
 
 "Yes. Section 121 of the Indian Penal Code: 
 ' Waging war against the Queen Empress.' ' 
 
 " But I never made war upon the Ingalay 
 Shinboyin Mahgyee," said Pho Lone. 
 
 " Yes, you did ; you confessed it to me in Thaw' 
 thekin's house, and must be tried for it. It won't 
 do you any harm, and if the Lord Judge does not 
 condemn you to be hanged or transported, we 
 shall see about promoting you. There is leave 
 to go." 
 
 Bay Lee thekin's half-caste clerks were laugh- 
 ing, so Pho Lone went out of the office more 
 puzzled than fearful. It was evidently a joke of 
 some kind; but nevertheless he was a little 
 anxious when Sergeant Moung Nee told him he 
 must be in court to-morrow when Boh Tah was 
 tried.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 341 
 
 He became very much afraid when, the Boh 
 and two of his followers having been placed in the 
 dock, he was ordered to enter it also, and stand 
 while the interpreter repeated the charge. As 
 Bay Lee thekin who sat at the pleader's table 
 had said, he, Pho Lone, was charged with 
 waging war against the Queen. 
 
 "Do you plead guilty or not guilty?" asked 
 the interpreter again, having repeated the usual 
 words. 
 
 " Well," said Pho Lone, much distressed, " I do 
 not know. If the Court says to plead guilty, I 
 will plead guilty ; if I am told to plead not 
 guilty, then I will do so. I am the servant of 
 the Lord Judge." 
 
 "Your plea of not guilty is accepted by the 
 Court," said the interpreter, after the Lord Judge 
 and Sayah Wil-ber-for', the Government-side 
 pleader, had spoken a little. 
 
 Pho Lone shiko'd, and resting his hands on the 
 dock-rail, waited uneasily till the two-tongued 
 man should speak again ; for Bay Lee thekin and 
 the Sayah Wil-ber-for' were talking together, 
 and in a few breaths the sayah rose and said 
 something to the judge, who addressed Pho Lone 
 through the interpreter. 
 
 " No evidence is offered against you. The Court 
 gives you leave to go." 
 
 " His Lordship, Bay Lee thekin, said I was to 
 be tried," said Pho Lone, sorely puzzled.
 
 342 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " Well, then, you have been tried, and cannot 
 be tried any more," said the interpreter, after 
 referring to the Court. " Go away a free police- 
 man." 
 
 Pho Lone shiko'd, and crept out of the dock, 
 very glad to have people between the Boh and 
 himself, for each time his late chief moved, he felt 
 his hands about his throat. 
 
 " Do not go away," said Sergeant Moung Nee, 
 " you have to give evidence." 
 
 And almost as the words left his lips, the call 
 for constable Pho Lone came, and he was in the 
 witness-box. Bay Lee thekin rose, and having 
 spoken with the Lord Judge, turned to him, and 
 said these words : 
 
 " You must remember that you have been tried 
 for waging war, dacoity and other crimes, and no 
 evidence being offered against you, the Court finds 
 you not guilty. You cannot be tried again for 
 past offences. Therefore answer all the questions 
 put to you truthfully, fearing nothing." 
 
 Pho Lone took the oath, and in answer to 
 Mr. Wilberforce, told everything. How the Boh 
 had caught him, and had made him follow ; how 
 the gang had looted Ladaw ; how the Boh had 
 buried the money after enlisting more men at 
 Nyounglay village, and fortifying the path, had 
 gone to Kyouksay, where Moung Toke, now dead, 
 had killed Mah Hlaing : and how, being chased 
 by the police, the band had dispersed without
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 343 
 
 waiting orders from the Boh, whom they left as 
 usual in his hiding pit. 
 
 " Where ? " asked the lawyer. 
 
 Pho Lone explained how the chief conducted 
 attacks, and as he did so, saw that Sayah Bair' 
 who also sat at the pleader's table, looked pleased, 
 and began to write with his pen. 
 
 " Now, witness," said Mr. Wilberforce, reaching 
 for something which lay behind the books on the 
 table, " Did you ever see this gun before ? " 
 
 Pho Lone started, for the gentleman held up 
 the Boh's gun which he had been so proud to 
 carry. 
 
 " Well, you recognise it as the prisoner's pro- 
 perty ; when did you last see it in his hand ? " 
 
 " Being his, the prisoner's bodyguard, I was 
 ordered to carry it," replied Pho Lone uneasily, 
 for he saw Sayah Bair' making notes again. 
 
 " But it was the prisoner's property, and he 
 made you carry it ? Yes, very good," and Mr. 
 Wilberforce sat down. 
 
 Pho Lone was very tired of answering questions 
 by the time Mr. Baird had learned all he wished 
 to know. It seemed to him that the gentleman, 
 who was trying to get the Boh off, wished to 
 convict Pho Lone himself of having led the gang- 
 to attack villages ; for he was called upon to swear 
 that Boh Tah always lay hidden in his pit, never 
 fired and never even carried the gun produced, 
 and was not within rifle shot when Mah Hlaing
 
 344 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 was killed. When Mr. Baird sat down, Mr. 
 Wilberforce got up again, and when he had asked 
 about forty questions more Pho Lone had to beg 
 for a drink of water before his tongue could 
 answer those the Lord Judge himself put. How- 
 ever, it was over at last, and he left the witness- 
 box to go out on the verandah and talk with his 
 comrades while Bah Chet, the elephant driver, who 
 had turned Queen's evidence, and Moung Hla of 
 Kyouksay were examined. 
 
 " I have never had to speak so much in all my 
 life," he said ; " my jaw is very tired and my mouth 
 is dry." 
 
 " You have given very good evidence," said an 
 old kullah Jemadar of military police, "very good 
 indeed. I listened." 
 
 " We all listened," said the policemen, " it was 
 good." 
 
 " Well, younger brother," said Sergeant Moung 
 Nee pleasantly, "you have done well." 
 
 " Do you think the Government will give pro- 
 motion ? " asked Pho Lone. 
 
 " You will be a nai-kah * in a very few days, I 
 think," said Moung Nee confidently ; "a great 
 thing for a young officer like you who has been 
 but four or five months in the service. Yes, you 
 will certainly be appointed nai-kah." 
 
 Pho Lone said it was good, but at heart he was 
 a little disappointed. As a constable he drew 
 
 * Burmese corruption of the Hindustani " naique."
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 345 
 
 twelve rupees a month ; as nai-kah he should get 
 twenty and have much power ; but he had hoped 
 to be made outright a sergeant on thirty rupees. 
 It was not so much pay as position he coveted ; 
 why, an inspector who draws sixty-five rupees a 
 month can arrest any one he likes, and consequently 
 can live at the rate of two hundred rupees a month. 
 
 " My old mother will be pleased," said Pho Lone. 
 " She always " 
 
 " The Lord Judge is going to deliver sentence," 
 said a man from one of the many doors which gave 
 upon the verandah, and the policemen crowded in 
 to hear. 
 
 It was long before Pho Lone forgot the speech 
 the Commissioner made to Boh Tah ; he said hard 
 things which showed how little he understood 
 about magic, and in away, moreover, which proved 
 that he did not mind displaying his ignorance in 
 open Court. He said that he had had before him 
 many bad and cowardly men, but never one so 
 cowardly and contemptible as Boh Tah. 
 
 " Imposing upon your foolish followers," said his 
 honour, " with tales of magical powers, you sent 
 them into danger while you hid your worthless 
 body in a hole where no hurt could come to you. 
 Your cowardice and trickery has been so far suc- 
 cessful that I cannot, and I regret it, pass upon 
 you sentence of death. The sentence is that you 
 be transported for life and do forfeit all your 
 property ! "
 
 346 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 As the judge spoke the sentence he seemed to 
 grow larger; he raised his voice and hurled the 
 last words at Boh Tah, who shrank cowering 
 against the back rail of the dock till the policemen 
 closed round and hustled him away. 
 
 Pho Lone thought the Lord Judge might as 
 well have left out the words about forfeiture of 
 property, for all the prisoner possessed in the 
 world was the cotton pasoh he was wearing when 
 they caught him. Perhaps he was thinking of 
 the buried treasure ; but would the demons give 
 it up on a mere order by the Court ? 
 
 If his honour had had the treasure in his mind, 
 he evidently did not intend to make any order at 
 present, for he finished scribbling off his judgment, 
 passed the sheets to his kullah clerk and called 
 on the next case. Pho Lone went out with the 
 crowd and presently found himself beside the 
 court interpreter who recognised him with a 
 smile. 
 
 " I have heard the gentlemen speaking of you," 
 he said. " Bay Lee thekin and the Sayah Baird." 
 
 Pho Lone was naturally anxious to hear what 
 they said, so the interpreter, having ascertained 
 that he was not wanted in the new case, took Pho 
 Lone into a quiet corner and told him. 
 
 " The sayah said, ' That policeman ought to get 
 ten years,' and Bay Lee thekin made answer, ' He 
 will get promotion instead.' The sayah then said, 
 'The thief catches the thief. Your constable is
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 347 
 
 himself a dacoit ; ' to this Bay Lee thekin replied 
 laughing, ' Such thieves are very good in the 
 police ; that constable is a nai-kah.' " 
 
 " Were those his words ? " 
 
 " He said that," replied the interpreter, " I am 
 glad to give you good news." 
 
 " It is indeed very good news," said Pho Lone ; 
 and he forthwith went out to the bazaar to buy a 
 new blanket as a present for his mother ; the price 
 was five rupees, but being in uniform he got it for 
 three and a half.
 
 CHAPTER XX 
 
 " IT is good that my lord is well again ; very 
 often I have feared greatly lest he should die." 
 " A little fever does not kill, my flower." 
 " My lord had great fever ; many times I have 
 known people die of that sickness." 
 
 Thorpe, yellow and wasted from ten days of 
 malaria, lay on a cane lounge in the verandah over 
 the porch, enjoying the comparative cool of the 
 April evening, in his shirt sleeves. Mah Pan sat 
 on the floor by his side, dividing her attention 
 about equally between the baby, squirming on its 
 mat with the purposeless industry of thirty days, 
 and her lord. She had been an attentive nurse, 
 but scarcely a cheering one to European ideas. 
 When one is weak from fever, and the starvation 
 it compels, one's funeral is riot the topic best cal- 
 culated to exhilarate the healthy minded patient, 
 and Mah Pan of course had held that ceremony her 
 sick lord's most legitimate and proper interest. 
 His condition had been such that she had been 
 forbidden to talk with him until the crisis was 
 well over; but the corner turned, the obsequies
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 349 
 
 which might still be his and the ceremonies 
 Mah Pan should perform in event of his demise, 
 were ever uppermost in her thoughts. She had 
 indeed gone so far as to make tentative inquiries 
 concerning a black silk tamein, to the amazement 
 of the bazaar stall keepers, who sold such only to 
 very old women who had renounced the vanities 
 of life. Whether she should have courage to 
 appear in a dress so ugly and unbecoming if 
 occasion unhappily arose, was, she honestly con- 
 fessed to Thorpe, doubtful. Apprehensions on 
 this score, however, had been allayed for the 
 present by her lord's recovery. He had shaken 
 off the fever, but was so pulled down that there 
 was no appeal from the doctor's, " home at once," 
 and he was only waiting for the river steamer, 
 which would land him in Rangoon in time to catch 
 a direct boat home. 
 
 " Ah, the sweet little one ! " cried Mah Pan, 
 catching up her child. " He cries ; he is crying 
 because his father goes so soon away to his 
 country to In-ga-lan." 
 
 " Because an ant is biting him, more likely," 
 remarked his other parent, " Turn him over and 
 look, my flower." 
 
 Mah Pan found the insect and set it care- 
 fully aside to crawl away, repeating that the 
 little Turn cried because his father was about 
 to go. 
 
 "And shall you cry when I go 1 ?" inquired
 
 350 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Thorpe. He asked the question idly ; he had 110 
 fear of " a scene," such as friends of his had ex- 
 perienced on similar occasions ; Mah Pan was a 
 sensible girl. 
 
 "Yes my lord. I shall be very sorry." She 
 put the child down and her gaze wandered wist- 
 fully round the wide verandah and into the cool 
 darkness of the rooms beyond. " But my lord will 
 come again in eight months time, and send for me 
 to my mother's house." 
 
 " You will go to your village ? " 
 
 Mah Pan would go to Myothit. Her mother 
 wanted her, and all the women wanted to see 
 bay bee. " My mother said I should learn my 
 lord's speech," she remarked, when Thorpe cor- 
 rected her. " I have learned very little, I think ; 
 and I have an In-ga-liss son ! " 
 
 " You know many words : say the words I have 
 taught." 
 
 " Many I have forgotten while my lord lay 
 sick ; but some I remember. Looking ga-lass, 
 dee-nah, tea, bah-lek-fass, soo-gah, loo-pee : no my 
 lord I cannot say r-roo pee," concluded Mah Pan, 
 with charming effort. 
 
 "Those are the words you remember best?" 
 said Thorpe with the ghost of a smile. 
 
 " Yes my lord ; also bay bee." 
 
 " You forget some very good words." 
 
 " One, two, tha-ree, sikkis, ten ? " inquired Mah 
 Pan laboriously.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 351 
 
 " No ; but never mind now. When I come 
 back I will teach you more." 
 
 " Why should I learn when my lord speaks like 
 one who has been to the kyoung school all his 
 life I " she inquired. " I can ask for all I want in 
 my own tongue." 
 
 "That is true." The wrinkles came at the 
 corners of Thorpe's eyes again. 
 
 " Turn will speak English," said Mah Pan, 
 catching up the baby and pressing its face against 
 her neck. " He is English, for his skin is white as 
 my lord's under the sleeve." 
 
 Thorpe looked grave. The plaything of to-day 
 was the social excrescence of to-morrow, shunned 
 by his father's race and shunning his mother's. 
 For a time he lay stilJ, listening to the heavy boom 
 of the mill. 
 
 " And when I go away, in two days' time, you 
 will return with the child to Myothit village ? " 
 he remarked presently. 
 
 "Yes, I shall go. Never has woman on our 
 creek borne so fair a son. They call me fair, but, 
 my lord, am I not brown by his whiteness ? " 
 
 " Not very brown, my flower." He could say it 
 truthfully. 
 
 " See, see ! He watches the little dog," cried 
 Mah Pan pointing a linger at the baby's wide eyes 
 which followed Thorpe's fox terrier, " he looked 
 upon the dog." Snap, fresh from his bath, and 
 exhaling carbolic soap, wagged his way to his
 
 252 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 master's side, to be invited up on the lounge. 
 " My lord looks more upon the dog than upon our 
 little Turn." 
 
 " When Tom can walk and speak, I shall notice 
 him much more." 
 
 " The dog does not speak," objected Mah Pan. 
 
 " Yes, he does. He said to me ' May I not kill 
 that big naked rat on Mah Pan's lap ? ' 
 
 For answer Mah Pan laid the child on her lord's 
 chest, and bade him nurse Turn for three betel 
 chews. " By which time you shall know your 
 own son and so teach the dog that he is no rat, 
 but an English baby." 
 
 " He is a little Burman," replied Thorpe, 
 drawing up his knees to make the child comfort- 
 able, "he will go to the kyoung to learn Kahgway, 
 Kahgyee ; * he will be tattooed upon these little 
 fat thighs and wear the pasoh and head-kerchief." 
 
 "No!" 
 
 " Wear the pasoh and head-kerchief, so that all 
 will say, ' there goes a fine young man.' ' 
 
 " No ! " 
 
 " Is it then good that people shall say of him, 
 ' only a Kabya f " asked Thorpe. 
 
 Mah Pan took the child upon her lap again. 
 He had an Englishman's skin, but the sun would 
 brown it dark as hers, ere he went to learn his 
 alphabet at the monastery her mother had built ; 
 and in the dress her lord proposed for him, none 
 
 * The Burmese equivalent for " A B C."
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 358 
 
 should know that he was not a Man. On the 
 other hand, who, seeing a youth with such skin as 
 this in the town school wearing trousers, coat and 
 sun-hat should say " He is only a half-caste ? " 
 
 " I think," said Thorpe, lazily folding his hands 
 behind his head and gazing out over the river, 
 oily in the stillness of the evening flood, "I think 
 when I have been away a few months, my flower 
 will forget her English lord in her own village. 
 What is the name of that fine young bachelor of 
 whom she has spoken Moung Maw ? " 
 
 " Moung Maw ! A jungle village carpenter like 
 the talouk who takes my order for work in this 
 house. I marry him ! No, my lord ; I may marry 
 as I will, for who would not love to call this sweet 
 little Turn his son ? " 
 
 " I think it is not good to call him by an Eng- 
 lish name," said Thorpe gently. He had for months 
 past been haunted by visions of a lantern-jawed 
 half-caste reproachfully pressing on him claims he 
 could not deny ; and yet, as he spoke, he felt a 
 curious twinge at the reminder that her great 
 possession made Mali Pan more desirable in the 
 eyes of her own countrymen. 
 
 " He is English," said Mali Pan, obstinately ; 
 " Turn is his name ; I will have an English son." 
 
 " Poor Turn ! " 
 
 There was much to be done during the next two 
 days ; the work had to be given over to the man 
 who had come round from Rangoon, and who was
 
 354 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 none too pleased at the prospect of spending the 
 rains in this jungle station ; then there was a cer- 
 tain amount of packing, and homes found for the 
 ponies and Snap while their master was away ; 
 and when necessary arrangements had been com- 
 pleted, the onerous task of providing every man 
 in house, mill, and godown with a three-line 
 
 ' * O 
 
 " character," occupied a few hours. Altogether 
 Mah Pan had reason to feel that she and her son 
 were rather neglected in these last days, though 
 she enjoyed, at least, a quiet hour or two in the 
 verandah by his side after dinner. No further 
 reference was made by either to their child's 
 future. Thorpe saw that no good end could be at- 
 tained by discussing it now, and Mah Pan's mind was 
 too full of matters of more immediate importance. 
 She had thought her lord generous when he said 
 she should receive thirty rupees a month during 
 his absence ; but a little conversation with Mah 
 Pyin, the old broker's wife, had given her new ideas 
 on this subject. Mah Pyin had acknowledged the 
 liberality of Thaw' thekin's arrangement, but, re 
 menibering a case in which a gentleman had died 
 while away in England, advised Mah Pan to ask for 
 a sum of money down, instead of a monthly payment. 
 
 " He is ill," said Mah Pyin ; " see how the bones 
 of his face stick out as they never did before. He 
 might die, and if he dies who will pay you the 
 thirty rupees ? " 
 
 These were the words of wisdom, and Mah Pan
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 355 
 
 lost no time in following the old woman's advice. 
 She went to the young clerk in the office, who was 
 always so obliging, and got him to do a little sum 
 for her, and having ascertained from him the 
 amount due, went upstairs and begged Thaw' 
 thekin to sign a chit for two hundred and forty 
 rupees. 
 
 " Myothit village being very distant, no man 
 comes to the town in the rainy season. Upon this 
 account, will my lord pay all the money into my 
 hand?" 
 
 " Pay you the money at once, my flower. I'd 
 do it, and gladly, but I have not got it." 
 
 " Have not got it ! " echoed Mah Pan, thinking 
 of the thousands and thousands of rupees which 
 one might see any day in the clerk's office, " my 
 lord plays with me." 
 
 "Indeed I do not, my garland of flowers. I 
 have already spent the pay of this month and of 
 next." 
 
 Mah Pan looked at him, and seeing he was 
 
 * O 
 
 quite serious began to feel rather uneasy. 
 
 " Only a year ago, or a little less, my lord gave 
 four hundred rupees to my mother." 
 
 "That is true; also, that is why I have no 
 money now." 
 
 Mah Pan sat silent for a time ; her ideas had 
 expanded during her residence in this large beauti- 
 ful house ; two hundred rupees a month passed 
 through her hands in one way or another, and she
 
 356 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 had learned to regard money lightly, measuring 
 her lord's wealth by the piles of rupees she saw 
 handled daily in the busy season. She began to 
 think there was better reason for getting the 
 money now than that Mah Pyin had suggested ; 
 perhaps when her lord had gone away the clerk 
 would say, " His honour left no money in my hand 
 for you, and I cannot pay you one rupee." 
 
 " I should like the money very much if my lord 
 could give it.' 5 
 
 Thorpe stopped in his task of sorting clothes to 
 be given or thrown away and sat on the edge of 
 the bed stroking his chin. 
 
 " I did not intend you to come for the money 
 each month, my flower. I was going to arrange 
 that the little broker should go to your village 
 with it. Do you want it so very much ? " 
 
 " My lord, it is my wish to show the neighbours 
 how generous my lord has been to me." 
 
 " Very well, I will see what can be done." 
 
 " To-day ? It is my desire to go on this even- 
 ing's tide, because a neighbour, Moung Let, returns 
 to-night." 
 
 " I will tell you this afternoon," replied Thorpe, 
 coldly. 
 
 Mah Pan said it was good, and went away to 
 make her own preparations. When she arrived a 
 year ago, a rushwork box, which she could carry 
 easily on her head, contained all she possessed ; 
 but now a teak box, larger than Moung Byoo's
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 357 
 
 own, was too small to hold everything, and Turn's 
 clothes, which he was never required to wear, filled 
 the old pah. 
 
 " I wish I could take the mirror," she said to 
 Mah Pyin, who had stolen in by the bathroom 
 entrance to help her. She stood before the ward- 
 robe and surveyed herself sorrowfully. " My lord 
 gives me all I ask ; I shall beg him to let me take 
 this till he returns." 
 
 " You could not take it to your jungle village," 
 said Mah Pyin, "the people would laugh at you. 
 Now what is this beautiful little brush used for ? " 
 
 Mah Pan forgot the mirror in her eagerness to 
 display her knowledge ; the little brush, she ex- 
 plained, was very good to scratch the back with ; 
 her lord certainly did not use it for that purpose, 
 but rubbed his teeth with it. 
 
 Mah Pyin, much interested, tried the tooth 
 brush on skin and teeth and gave it as her opinion 
 that Mah Pan put it to the proper use ; she should 
 buy one for herself if it were not too expensive. 
 
 How or where Mr. Thorpe obtained the rupees 
 Mah Pan never knew, but when the shadows were 
 creeping across the verandah that afternoon he 
 called her and said the clerk had orders to pay the 
 money into her hand. 
 
 " Shall you be glad to come back to me ? " he 
 asked, an hour after, when the men had carried 
 the boxes down to Moung Let's boat, and Mah Pan 
 with Tom on her hip came to say she was going.
 
 058 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " Yes, I shall be glad, my lord." She looked 
 round the house with regretful eyes, " I shall cer- 
 tainly be very glad." 
 
 " If I am sent to Rangoon we shall have only a 
 little jungle house," said her lord, who must have 
 marked her look round. "Do you think you and 
 Turn could live in a little house after dwelling in 
 this great one ? " 
 
 Mah Pan could live anywhere with her lord : 
 she should be sad until his return, for he had 
 always been kind and good, very kind and good. 
 She prayed that he might quickly become quite 
 well, and enjoy freedom from all the Accidents, 
 Diseases, and Misfortunes. 
 
 In speaking the last words Mah Pan's voice 
 broke, and the tears came. 
 
 " Only a few months, my flower." 
 
 " It is such a long time, my lord," and, hitching 
 Turn higher on her hip, she went swiftly down- 
 stairs, through the great godown to the boat. 
 
 " So little sister, you come back to us," said 
 Moung Let, smiling down on her from his perch in 
 the stern. " Mother ! what a lovely baby. What 
 will the neighbours say of so fair a child ! " 
 
 Mah Pan hugged Turn proudly, and laid him 
 on his ma,t : a little sob rose in her throat, but she 
 kept it back. After all it was a pleasant leaving, 
 for the mill kullahs showed respect, and also 
 her mind was now very full of the sweet words the 
 neighbours would speak when they saw Turn.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 359 
 
 "I have been to the thannah to see my good 
 son, Pho Lone," said Moung Let, shading his eyes 
 to steer clear of the boat crush and out into the 
 current. " He has been nai-kah now for several 
 months, and they say will soon be a sergeant." 
 
 " Yes, I spoke for him," answered Mah Pan at 
 random, for she was busy making the baby safe 
 and comfortable under the dhunny-leaf tunnel 
 which covered in the rear third of the boat. 
 " There, beautiful one ! When I have tied the 
 mosquito curtain above thou shalt sleep. How 
 shall we get on without the kullah servant to wait 
 upon us, my little son ? " 
 
 The mosquito net secured, Mah Pan drew herself 
 out to sit near Moung Let, and glance back at the 
 house, fast disappearing behind the trees, as Shway 
 Toon and Moung Yeik jerked at the oars. " I 
 think our house in Myothit will be very small after 
 that large fine house," she sighed. 
 
 " All will be glad to see you again, little sister," 
 said Moung Let. " Also Pho Lone will soon get 
 leave and come to the village ; then you will see 
 him." 
 
 " I have often seen him on duty in the town," 
 said Mah Pan, "once or twice I stopped to speak 
 to him." 
 
 " That was kind," grinned Shway Toon, stooping 
 to ladle a shell of water over the rattan loop of 
 his oar, " very kind." 
 
 Mah Pan had spoken neither to him nor Moung
 
 360 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Yeik since she stepped into the boat : she had 
 always been proud, and was now prouder than 
 ever, the young men said to each other. 
 
 " I was anxious to be kind to him," said Mah 
 Pan graciously. "At his desire I spoke in his 
 favour to my friend the town magistrate's wife." 
 
 " He was promoted for good service," struck in 
 Moung Let, partly to prevent the quarrel he saw 
 was coming, and partly because he wished Pho 
 Lone to have all the honour that was his due. 
 " All the world knows that it was not by favour of 
 any man, but because he caught the dacoit Boh 
 Tah. I, myself, by favour of the sergeant of the 
 gate guard, who is Pho Lone's friend, was allowed 
 inside the gaol, where I saw the Boh with chains on 
 his legs : they told me he would be sent over the 
 seas to live. All Pho Lone's doing." 
 
 " It is a bad place, the gaol/' said Moung Yeik, 
 who had been with Moung Let. " I was glad to 
 come outside ; were you not glad to come out, 
 good uncle ? " 
 
 " I was," said Moung Let thoughtfully ; it was 
 in his mind that but for Ko Moung Galay's wise 
 advice, Pho Lone might have been among the evil 
 looking prisoners he had seen. 
 
 " It is a bad place," said Moung Yeik again ; he 
 drew a long breath and looked round to enjoy the 
 freedom of space ; " let us not speak of it." 
 
 But Moung Let had still much to say, and talked 
 until, the sky being long shut, Mah Pan lay down
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 361 
 
 to tuck Turn within her arm, and be lulled asleep 
 by the screech of oars and bubbling whisper under 
 the boat's side. 
 
 When she awoke the boat lay at the bank under 
 the houses of Kyouksay, and the men were asleep, 
 for they had rowed till far into the night when the 
 tide turned. This Mah Pan saw from under the 
 mosquito curtain, for there was light in the sky 
 and people were moving in the village : it was very 
 close under the boat roof, so, softly lest she should 
 disturb Turn, she drew herself out to sit on the 
 stern piece, and coil up her hair in the sunrise. It 
 felt strange to wake up thus in a boat once more, 
 after a year in Thaw' thekin's house : her life there 
 seemed a dream as she sat gazing up the river and 
 down, at the endless jungle of the banks ; it did 
 not seem possible that she should ever go back to 
 her lord, so far away was he and all that was his. 
 
 Bustle and laughter on the bank where the shore 
 sloped hard and sandy, made her turn to see 
 several girls coming down to bathe. It was long 
 since Mah Pan had bathed thus with friends in 
 the river : when she sighed to bathe, Mah Pyin, 
 the town magistrate's wife, had said " Bazaar girls 
 and jungle women wash in the river " ; after which, 
 of course, Mah Pan could only look on and envy 
 the godown sewing girls when they climbed down 
 the ballast of an evening to romp and splash. Mah 
 Pyin bathed in her bath-room, so Mah Pan had 
 done the same ever since those words had been
 
 362 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 spoken. Now she sat, thinking how good it would 
 be to join the girls ; it was such a beautiful bathing 
 place, as good as that at Myothit, and clearer 
 water. While she looked and longed in the 
 growing heat, one of the bathers saw her, and 
 whispering to another, called, " Ho friend, come in 
 with us ! " 
 
 " I come ! " replied Mah Pan ; and in three 
 breaths she was letting herself carefully overside 
 into the clear shallow. Mah Pyin's teaching drifted 
 away on the flood back to the town it belonged to 
 as she dipped and splashed among the Kyouksay 
 girls. 
 
 " She is now no longer proud, Thaw' thekin's 
 house being out of sight," said Moung Yeik that 
 night when, having stopped for the tide, they sat 
 smoking on the prow under the stars. " Her 
 speech to-day was neighbourly, and she boiled the 
 evening rice for us." 
 
 " I think Moung Let's words to her this morning 
 were very good," said Shway Toon, "when rice 
 being ready, she said, ' I eat always with my lord, 
 he said to her, ' the little sister forgets the usage 
 of her own people,' upon which she sat apart till 
 we had eaten." 
 
 " With this child, a woman must be a little 
 proud," said Moung Let good naturedly, " its skin 
 is wonderful to see. I wonder if Pho Lone has 
 seen the baby." 
 
 " Does Thaw' thekin come back from his country,
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 363 
 
 can you tell, uncle ? " inquired Shway Toon care- 
 lessly. 
 
 Moung Let did not know. 
 
 " Uncle, when does your good son come on leave 
 to Myothit ? " asked Moung Yeik, yawning. 
 
 Moung Let thought he might come about the 
 end of the rains. 
 
 " She is divorced if she pleases, her husband 
 having left her," said Shway Toon. 
 
 " Yes, certainly, she is free to marry any man," 
 agreed Moung Yeik, " I think she does not like Pho 
 Lone, neighbour? What a pity it is she has so 
 much money. One cannot marry a girl who has a 
 lot of money." 
 
 " Has she much money 1 " asked Shway Toon 
 anxiously. 
 
 " Thaw' thekin is very generous, and her box 
 was extremely heavy to carry/' said Moung Yeik, 
 "therefore I am afraid she has money: it is a 
 pity." 
 
 " Ah friend ! you were thinking' " 
 
 " Not at all but that little Turn is a very 
 beautiful child." 
 
 " He is indeed I think I shall sleep now 
 neighbour."
 
 CHAPTER XXI 
 
 MAH PAN had been glad to return home for some 
 reasons ; life in her father's house was so much 
 more free than in Thaw' thekin's, though the 
 restraints her lord laid upon her were light. It 
 was particularly pleasant to have friends dropping 
 in at all hours ; to sit on the verandah looking on 
 the road, and call in for a smoke and a chat any 
 one who passed. Thaw' thekin had told her she 
 might ask friends to his house, but she must tell 
 him first who they were. Anxious to please, she 
 began by inquiring if his clerks might visit her ; 
 their manners were beautiful and they spoke 
 English, so she thought them just the friends her 
 lord would like her to receive. When she mooted 
 it she was much surprised to be answered : " Ask 
 no man employed in my office or god own ; " and 
 after this mistake concerning his tastes she had 
 always felt a little shy about asking his permission, 
 though it was never again refused. In this respect 
 therefore life at home was pleasanter than in the 
 town. The food of course was very different, and 
 at first she spoke very often about it, but Mah
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 365 
 
 Helm having said once : " Eat or leave your rice," 
 she ceased to compare home dinners with those at 
 the mill-house. 
 
 While the hot season lasted she enjoyed being 
 in her father's house again. Beside the village 
 people, boats were always passing up and down, 
 and very many travellers stopped at Myothit just 
 to walk up to Moung Byoo's and admire his 
 daughter's white baby. This was extremely 
 agreeable ; but, of course, when the monsoon came 
 an end was made of these visitors, and she began 
 to tire of the village, and to think much of the 
 town. At Thaw' thekin's, even when the rain 
 roared its loudest on the roof, she had only to say 
 a word to the servant, and a carriage stood under 
 the porch to take her in her best clothes wherever 
 she wished. Here when it rained her mother 
 and sister said : " We cannot go out," and lay 
 down to sleep ; and as it often rained for days 
 and nights without ceasing, life was very dull. 
 
 When the sun shone out, it was not much 
 better, for the men went off to plough, returning 
 at evening mud-splashed to the neck, and too 
 weary to speak after they had eaten ; and the 
 women picked their way along the glistening 
 street wearing their oldest tarn ems and no 
 sandals. Everybody here looked poor and shabby 
 after the people in Bassein, who came out like 
 butterflies on dry days to buy in the bazaar or 
 worship and talk at the pagoda ; and what made
 
 366 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 matters worse, the neighbours did not seem to 
 understand when Mah Pan said : " It is very dull 
 in Myothit." 
 
 The house too was displeasing to her. Moung 
 Byoo's was one of the best in the village, but the 
 roughness of the plank walls, and the bare floor 
 befouled by muddy feet, hurt her eyes accus- 
 tomed to the neatness of her English lord's house. 
 
 " I think of the pony-house at the back of the 
 garden when I look round," she said. 
 
 " Certainly this is a poor place after his lord- 
 ship's," said Mah Noo, who had seen and envied 
 with a great envy, " but very soon you will go 
 back." 
 
 "It is yet many months before my lord returns," 
 sighed Mah Pan. 
 
 She thought sometimes that Thaw' thekin 
 might send a message which she would repeat to 
 the neighbours who would flock round to hear it. 
 But when she said so, her mother replied : " Why 
 shall his lordship send a message, being far away 
 in his own country, and having paid you all the 
 money before he left." And to this Mah Paji had 
 no answer ; for what message could his lordship 
 send? 
 
 By reason of the quietness of Myothit that 
 rainy season seemed a very long one ; but it 
 passed away at length, and gave place to the after 
 heat of earth-born steam. The paddy was waist- 
 high now, and the men who had done nothing
 
 since planting out time, began to speak of building 
 the bird scarers' huts against the ripening of the 
 grain. But the wet season makes people lazy, and 
 they put off cutting bamboos till the paddy began 
 to yellow, and Ko Moung Galay said suddenly one 
 day : " Go, let us work ! " Then they began, and 
 slaved daily from dawn to dark till huts, scares, 
 and even clapper-poles were finished. 
 
 The cold weather came bringing harvest time 
 when every one woke up. All were busy except 
 Mah Pan. She went out on the kwins it is true, 
 but only for company's sake. She said Turn 
 needed all her care, so she sat in the shade of a 
 cart-tail all day playing with the child and talk- 
 ing to the young men who dropped their sickles 
 to come and chew half a betel by her side. 
 Moung Maw was hard at work upon the boats as 
 usual at this season, and therefore came seldom 
 to the harvesting ; when he did he took much, 
 notice of Turn, but said few words to Turn's 
 mother ; for Mah Pan had seemed to shun him 
 when he gave her a neighbour's greeting in the 
 early days of her return : nevertheless, the gossips 
 smiled when they saw him. squat making toys of 
 straw for the fair skinned child. 
 
 Turn had grown fast : he was able to stand 
 holding his mother's tamein or by Moung Maw's 
 finger, and gurgled nosily at the crows when they 
 hopped near his mat. Like every other little boy 
 his head was shaved bare save for a tuft on top,
 
 368 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 and a bead necklace was all his clothing. Turn 
 sunned himself in the dust before his grandfather's 
 house, when the sun broke through the morning 
 mists, and sprawled away the heat in the shade of 
 the mangoes, pulling the legs of the great tawny 
 pariahs which bristled and barked if they saw a 
 white man a bow-shot off. 
 
 " A-a-h ! " Mah Pan would cry when his fat 
 yellow fist closed on her cheroot. " Thou art a 
 little English son, and my lord has said English 
 boys drink not smoke till they be grown men." 
 
 " He will be English by-and-by," said Moung 
 Byoo. "Let the good little one be happy now." 
 Then he would talk of the kyoung school, and of 
 the day when the tattooer should be called in to 
 tattoo his grandson's thighs ; but to such words 
 Mah Pan would not listen. 
 
 " See how big he grows ! " she would cry, " his 
 father will not know him when he returns." 
 
 " When does he return ? " asked Moung Byoo. 
 
 " Very soon now," said Mah Pan, hopefully. "I 
 look for his message every day. I pray always 
 for its coming." 
 
 ' ' Thus the cricket chirps to the mountain, and 
 listens for the echo," said Moung Byoo to him- 
 self; but to Mah Pan he said, " Without doubt 
 you will soon receive a message, daughter." 
 
 So the cold season faded like its own mists ; 
 the men laid aside their English blankets, and 
 those who had them, their fur-lined coats, and
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 369 
 
 looked to the great basket-work hats which pro- 
 tect the head and neck when one goes abroad at 
 mid-day. The crows were building in the man- 
 goes along the street, and the sparrows screamed 
 and quarrelled over the straws they trailed up to 
 the eaves. But no message came from Thaw' 
 thekin. 
 
 Mah Pan was patient. When there came to 
 the village a broker's runner, seeking news of the 
 crop, or a kullah trader selling prints and cottons, 
 she would bide her time, and ask the man for 
 tidings. Only once the stranger did not reply 
 " I cannot tell," and then she received for answer, 
 " Thaw' thekin is not yet come." 
 
 " I shall prepare to go," she said, when the 
 boats were in the water ready for the grain heaps 
 which grew daily by the threshing floors. " Each 
 tide now a canoe may come with a messenger. 
 My lord said, ' In eight months I shall return, 
 and send for you,' and he is now fully nine 
 months gone." 
 
 Thaw' thekin had always kept his word about 
 coming back. He would say, "I go to Rangoon, 
 and return in a week's time ; " and so surely as 
 the creek steamer arrived, it brought him. There- 
 fore Mah Pan began to feel a little uneasy ; but 
 she had packed her great teak box, and locked it, 
 ready to start. 
 
 " Do not be unhappy," said Mah Hehn. " In- 
 galan country is a great way off, they say ; upon 
 
 2 A
 
 370 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 that account there is delay." For Mah Pan was 
 beginning to spend much time sitting on the bank 
 when the tide flowed, and grew low-spirited when 
 the ebb set in and no canoe-man had come. 
 
 Mah Hehn was kind, and said ah 1 she could to 
 reassure her daughter. She reminded Mah Pan 
 that Thaw' thekin's country was many weeks' 
 journey distant by the largest fire-ship, and that 
 the date of his honour's return must of necessity 
 be uncertain, by reason of the nature of the 
 journey, if it were as Thaw' thekin had described ; 
 though for her own part she thought his honour 
 was making fun when he said you did not see 
 land for weeks together. Anyhow it was clear 
 that one could not tell exactly when so long a 
 journey would end ; it was different travelling in 
 the boat when one knew to a tide how soon one 
 should arrive, unless there was very much wind, 
 and the boat went faster ; and it was also another 
 thing going by road when you could tell to a day 
 how long a distance would take if the cart did not 
 break down or the bullocks become lame by the 
 way. 
 
 The boats were laden and ready to start as 
 soon as Oo Boo Nah should ascertain a lucky day. 
 Ten months had passed since Thaw' thekin's de- 
 parture, and Mah Pan was beginning to fear she 
 should never again dwell in the big house by the 
 mill, when Moung Let came back from Nga- 
 theing, whither he had gone to see the wizard,
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 371 
 
 bringing news that to-morrow would be a very 
 propitious day to start for market. 
 
 " I shall go with my father," she said. 
 
 But Mah Hehn gave other counsel, saying it 
 was not good to go unbidden ; so Mah Pan 
 yielded, and took Turn out to watch the boats 
 drop down the creek with all the usual shouting, 
 dancing, and noise. She had of late grown the 
 more anxious to go away from Myothit because 
 Moung Maw's sister, Mah Htone, had come often 
 to speak in praise of her brother, and the people 
 said, " That clever tongue wags between two 
 again." Mah Htone had a clever tongue : there 
 was no denying that. More than one marriage 
 had been brought about by her good offices. A 
 love-sick young man would say to his mother : 
 "Let Mah Htone go to speak in my behalf to her 
 father and mother ; " and Mah Htone would do 
 this out of sheer love for match-making. Ko 
 Moung Galay said it was a pity she did not live 
 in a great town, for there she might arrange 
 marriages every day, and so be happy, beside 
 making a good income by the business ; he was 
 sure there were many professional match-makers 
 who were not as clever as she was. All previous 
 affairs Mah Htone had conducted very well ; but 
 in dealing with Mah Pan she had been indiscreet 
 by reason of her great anxiety that her brother 
 should become the father of Turn. She saw 
 plainly, as did everybody, that it angered Mah
 
 372 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Pan to say, " I do not think Thaw' thekin will 
 come back," yet she could not help saying words 
 she wished to be true ; and as she came every 
 day to Moung Byoo's house, Mah Pan was quite 
 weary of hearing it. 
 
 "If it prove that my lord does not return any 
 more," she said, on the evening of the day that 
 saw the boats start, " I shall leave the little one 
 here, and become a nun." 
 
 "What!" cried Mah Noo. "You will shave 
 your head naked like the Lord Ruler ! Wear 
 white robes, and live apart ! Good sister, you 
 have sickness of the brain to think of such a 
 thing!" 
 
 " I shall become a nun," repeated Mah Pan, 
 feeling her hair, to make sure the flowers were 
 straight, for some young men were passing. " I 
 shall go to the pottery village near Bassein where 
 there are many rest-houses, and shall live there, 
 sweeping out the houses, and keeping the chatties 
 supplied with water for worshippers." 
 
 When Mah Helm came in Mah Noo told her 
 what surprising ideas Mah Pan had in her mind. 
 Their mother laughed a great deal. 
 
 " Our pretty flower turn nun ! Well, that is a 
 joke. Why, if she did she would flirt with the 
 supporter of the rest-houses she swept, and 
 marry him as soon as she tired of good works ; 
 and I think she would very quickly tire of sweep- 
 ing and carrying water."
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 373 
 
 " Nevertheless I hope my father will bring 
 news of Thaw' thekin," said Mali Noo. 
 
 "If his lordship returns, he does, and if he 
 does not, he does not," said Mali Hehn. " It is 
 disagreeable to be uncertain, but what is the use 
 of making oneself unhappy ? " 
 
 Mali Pan in the sleeping room heard her 
 mother's words and, being made a little ashamed, 
 said no more about forsaking the world lest the 
 neighbours should laugh. 
 
 Mah Htone however, heard what she had said, 
 for in the village nobody's speech is her own, and 
 she went to her brother urging him to go and visit 
 Mah Pan ; but Moung Maw would not listen. 
 
 " She says she looks for Thaw' thekin's order to 
 go to him again. Shall I go at bachelor's time to 
 see a woman who speaks thus ? " 
 
 " You are too proud, good brother. 1 feel sure 
 that his lordship will never come back." 
 
 " How can you tell ? Wait till there is news," 
 and saying this Moung Maw went out to join the 
 men smoking in the street that he might hear no 
 more. He w^as angry with Mah Htone, for the 
 neighbours had said, " Her tongue is on your side 
 and you will marry Moung Byoo's daughter;" and 
 it is not well that a sister should do unasked 
 what a fellow's mother does only at his express 
 desire. 
 
 Nevertheless, when a few evenings later, Tha 
 Tway paddling in the shallow, called, "Ko Moung
 
 374 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 Byoo's boat comes," the gossips remarked that 
 Moung Maw was one of the first to stroll over to 
 the creek side where Mah Pan with Turn on her 
 hip as usual was already waiting. There was 
 nothing else to do, so of course every one in the 
 village was out on the bank by the time the great 
 boat, crank in its lightness, swayed round on the 
 flood and the rowers let their oars trail to pole her 
 in shore. Moung Byoo was in his place on the 
 steering chair, but though Mah Pan called, " Is 
 there news ? " he only shook his hand without 
 speaking. 
 
 " He brings bad tidings I think," said Mah 
 Hehn with a troubled face ; and Mah Pan called 
 no more. 
 
 It took a very long time to bring the boat in so 
 that Moung Byoo could let himself over the side 
 and come ashore by the logs that formed the 
 landing stage. Then at last as he stepped up the 
 slope and the neighbours gathered round, he said 
 in answer to Mah Hehn, " There is much news, 
 which I will tell." 
 
 It was clear to all that Moung Byoo brought 
 important tidings, he took so long to begin ; the 
 sky was shutting when he sat down under the 
 bamboo clump with the neighbours pressing round 
 to listen, and the cricket struck up his song before 
 he spoke. 
 
 "I bring news," he said, and those who still 
 stood, sat down and craned forward to listen.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 375 
 
 " There is come to the mill a new gentleman who 
 sits in Thaw' thekin's office and in his chair. From 
 his mouth I have received news of Thaw' thekin." 
 He stopped for a few breaths and rolled his 
 cheroot ; Mah Pan, crouching at his side, eyed him 
 hungrily but did not speak. 
 
 " The new gentleman has received from Thaw' 
 thekin a letter in which his honour writes that he 
 is in bad health." 
 
 "His honour had fever," murmured the neigh- 
 bours as Moung Byoo paused. 
 
 " He is in bad health," repeated Moung Byoo 
 with point. "Also he has become very rich by 
 reason of the death of a relation who leaves him 
 many lakhs of rupees." 
 
 " Mother ! '' exclaimed the neighbours, for 
 Moung Byoo paused again. 
 
 "Upon this account, his honour will never come 
 any more to Bassein." 
 
 The neighbours murmured, " A-a-a-h ! " in sym- 
 pathy, looking at Mah Pan ; and there was silence 
 while the wavelets lapped sleepily and the reeds 
 across the water whispered in the rising night wind. 
 
 " This is all your tidings ? " asked Mah Hehn as 
 their daughter said no word. 
 
 " There is more. Thaw' thekin has given order 
 that the new gentleman shall pay into Mah Pan's 
 hand one thousand rupees ; also twenty rupees 
 each month for the little son till he be grown a 
 man. This is all my news."
 
 376 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " Did you bring this money ? " asked Mali 
 Hehn. 
 
 Moung Byoo did not answer ; he looked sadly 
 after Mah Pan who, when he ceased speaking, had 
 risen quickly and pressing her way through the 
 people, vanished into the dark. 
 
 "His honour has been very generous," said Mah 
 Htone. 
 
 "Very generous," chorused the neighbours, and 
 again was silence. Moung Byoo still sat there in 
 the dark shadow of the bamboo clump, so nobody 
 moved ; there might be more to hear from his 
 mouth, for the glow and wane of his cheroot 
 showed that he drank smoke hard, as one who 
 thinks deeply. 
 
 " Such things have happened before," said a 
 voice slowly, " but we are very sorry." 
 
 " I had looked for this," said Mah Hehn, " but 
 not yet." 
 
 " If you pull the tigers tail Ite bites," 
 
 " If you love the Englishman you are a fool," 
 quoted Mah Tsay. 
 
 "A true saying!" murmured the women. 
 " Yes, that is a true saying," and one added, 
 " but no girl of this village has before pulled the 
 tiger's tail." 
 
 " I think the Government order is to pay ten 
 rupees a month," said Mah Hehn. " Thaw' thekin 
 pays double, which is very good." 
 
 " The hag thinks only of rupees," said Moung
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 377 
 
 Maw in a low voice to Ko Moung Galay. " She is 
 just like a black coolie animal." 
 
 His wife's words seemed to rouse Moung Byoo, 
 for he said, " I forgot the tidings I brought for 
 Mah Tsay. Ho, mother ! " 
 
 " I am here," came Mah Tsay's cracked voice ; 
 " Pray tell the news. Is it of my son the official?" 
 
 " It is of Pho Lone, mother. Your good son 
 will come very soon to the village. This was told 
 me by Moung Let, who has seen him." 
 
 "Now that is good news," shrilled Mah Tsay. 
 " What day will he come, uncle ? " 
 
 Moung Byoo could not tell : but Moung Let 
 would be home on the next or following tide. 
 
 " The next, I hope," said Mah Tsay, and her bent 
 figure, resting on her staff, rose above the sitting- 
 throng. "This is good news indeed," and she 
 hobbled slowly away, as Moung Byoo got up to 
 go to his house. 
 
 For a few days after this the neighbours saw 
 little of Mah Pan, for she did not come out, and 
 went up to her sleeping-room when any one came 
 to the house. Mali Htone, though now more than 
 ever anxious to plead her brother's cause, refrained 
 from going to see her till her sorrow should be 
 over. She felt that there was no time to lose ; 
 Moung Let had made known that his son would 
 come in half a month, and Mah Htone feared Pho 
 Lone as Moung Maw's rival. Mah Pan had not 
 shown that young man much favour in the old
 
 378 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 days ; but between Pho Lone the cultivator, and 
 Pho Lone the official, dwelling in town, was a vast 
 difference ; and Mali Htone was afraid. 
 
 Passing Moung Byoo's house one evening before 
 sunset she saw Mali Pan with the baby sitting 
 once more in her accustomed place against the 
 wall, and turned aside to speak with her. 
 
 "This is now the richest little man in the 
 village," she said, by way of a beginning. 
 
 " Yes, and I am the richest woman, they say," 
 replied Mah Pan dully. " I think often what I shall 
 do with all the money. I do not want it." 
 
 " Buy a boat and trade in paddy." 
 
 " My mother said that, but I do not wish to buy 
 a boat : there would be much trouble. I think it 
 would be better to spend the money building a 
 very beautiful rest-house yonder by the pagoda." 
 
 Mah Htone said that such a meritorious work 
 would without doubt afford much pleasure to all 
 the village. 
 
 " It seems the best plan, I think," said Mali 
 Pan. 
 
 " I am sure my brother, Moung Maw, will be 
 glad to build it for you." 
 
 " He is certainly a clever carpenter," said Mah 
 Pan, glancing up the road at Mah Hehn's kyoung. 
 
 " Shall I tell him to come and see you ? " 
 
 "I cannot prevent any young man coming to 
 see me," said Mah Pan ; but she smiled a little 
 saying it.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 379 
 
 " I will tell him of your plan," said Mah Htone ; 
 and as the matter she had so much at heart was 
 at last in train she turned to praising Turn's white 
 skin and pink palms. 
 
 After she had eaten her own rice that evening 
 she went down to Moung Maw's house and sat in 
 the dark to wait till he came. 
 
 " You here again I" he said ; " well, what now? " 
 
 " Mah Pan speaks of building a rest-house, and 
 would speak with you, brother." 
 
 " Let her speak when we meet to-morrow." 
 
 "Go to her at bachelor's time," pleaded Mah 
 Htone. " I have been with her this evening, and 
 she will be sweet." 
 
 Moung Maw sat nursing his knees in silence for 
 a time. 
 
 " If I go at that hour," he said at last, " all men 
 will say ' The carpenter seeks a wife who can give 
 him his rice.' ' 
 
 " No ! for all the village knows you used to visit 
 her before she married Thaw' thekin. She wishes 
 to build the rest-house in order to spend money 
 she does not want." 
 
 " Then she won't do it on the cheap plan her 
 mother approved ? " said Moung Maw, chuckling. 
 
 Mah Htone laughed, for Mah Hehn's attempt 
 to save money over the building of the monastery 
 had amused the village for months. When the 
 work was nearly finished she had come to Moung 
 Maw and speaking in his ear said that the neigh-
 
 380 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 bours were much distressed because he of all the 
 village was the only person who gained no Merit 
 by that building, for the reason that he received 
 payment for the work of his hands ; and did he 
 not wish to earn Merit like others ? To which 
 Moung Maw had answered, " I wish much to earn 
 Merit but more to earn the twenty-five rupees you 
 agreed to pay me for the job." He told everybody 
 about it and though Mali Helm said the story was 
 untrue she always spoke of the carpenter as a man 
 who cared nothing for the good opinion of his 
 neighbours ; so they knew who spoke truth. 
 
 Moung Maw thought much over his sister's 
 words after she left his house. Now Thaw' thekin 
 was gone Mah Pan evidently wished to rid herself 
 of wealth which would keep self-respecting suitors 
 at a distance, and to build a large rest-house was 
 a very good plan. It was not wanted in the least, 
 but of course that was no matter. He resolved 
 that he would go and see her about it. 
 
 He let some days pass, however, not feeling very 
 anxious to go at bachelor's time and not caring to 
 visit her under the eyes of all the village. He 
 might never have gone but for Turn. Strolling 
 across the road one evening Mah Pan came along 
 carrying the child who cried to him. 
 
 "The little one wants you, neighbour/' said 
 Mah Pan. 
 
 Moung Maw turned aside to meet her and take 
 Turn on his shoulder.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 381 
 
 " And whence does the elder sister come ? " he 
 asked politely. 
 
 " I had taken the child for Mali Tsay to see." 
 
 " Yes ? And is there news when her son 
 comes ? " 
 
 " I believe he comes soon ; I forgot to ask," said 
 Mah Pan, looking away, " but neighbour, I want 
 to speak with you touching the rest-house I am 
 going to build." 
 
 She sat down on the brick pathway as she spoke. 
 Her voice was soft ; Moung Maw sat down too. 
 
 "But I will not stop now," she said, rising, "I 
 must go and put the little one on his mat." 
 
 Moung Maw got up and held Turn to her. 
 
 " He wants to stay on your shoulder. Bring 
 him if you will." 
 
 Her voice was very sweet. Moung kept Turn 
 and walked with her. 
 
 " It is long since the elder brother has been to 
 our house. When will he come to speak of this 
 matter of the building ? " 
 
 " This evening ? " suggested Moung Maw as he 
 put down Turn. 
 
 " Come this evening," smiled Mah Pan, with a 
 glance.
 
 CHAPTER XXII 
 
 "I TRUST we see you in good health," said Ko 
 Moung Galay. 
 
 " I enjoy the best health by reason of your good 
 wishes," replied Pho Lone cordially. " I hope that 
 my prayers for the welfare of your much- respected 
 person are answered." 
 
 Ko Moung Galay said his health was very good, 
 and Pho Lone, making a little obeisance to the 
 elders who sat with the head-man, passed on with 
 his father and mother. 
 
 " The young man has improved in his manners," 
 said Ko Moung Galay, " he knows now what is 
 due to his seniors." 
 
 " His manners are certainly better," said Oo 
 Ket Kay, " but will any one tell me why he should 
 come in a hired boat with three black kullahs 
 when there are at Bassein many friends who would 
 gladly bring him home for nothing ? " 
 
 " Who shall prevent the young cocks from crow- 
 ing ? " said Ko Moung Galay, good humouredly. 
 " I daresay we tried to cut a figure before the 
 girls when we were young, neighbour. Pho
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 383 
 
 Lone is young, and also he is proud, being an 
 official." 
 
 " I have no patience with these cocks whose 
 feathers are scarce grown," said Oo Ket Kay testily. 
 " In the town I have known a young fellow spend 
 all his money in hiring every evening a pony cart 
 which he drove up and down the street where his 
 girl dwelt." 
 
 " I have known a young son of the town do just 
 the same thing," said Oo Shway. " I have also 
 known a young clerk take a bundle of law papers 
 from his English master's office and walk about 
 with them under his arm that his girl might think 
 much of his importance ; they all do something of 
 the sort ; but an end of this woman's talk 1 We 
 were speaking of the matter of Moung Byoo's 
 daughter." 
 
 " Yes," said Ko Moung Galay, " but what have 
 we more to say \ Thaw' thekin is gone and there- 
 fore Mah Pan is free ; he has divorced himself, as 
 one may say, so what need of decree of divorce 
 from us ? The thing is done." 
 
 " None at all," said Oo Shway, for the sun was 
 growing hot and he wanted to go home. " Moung 
 Byoo's daughter is free to marry whom she will." 
 
 " Yes, and we think the whole affair very credit- 
 able to all concerned," said Ko Moung Galay, who 
 liked to say a kind word. He glanced up the road 
 at the monastery and then to the vacant ground 
 by the pagoda where Moung Maw in sun-hat and
 
 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 tightly girt pasoh was busy measuring with a 
 light bamboo. " Our village will gain a name for 
 the pious works of its women." 
 
 While the elders sat talking thus on the creek 
 bank Pho Lone was receiving the friends who 
 came to Moung Let's to see him. All the young 
 men and many of the girls came, and they showed 
 so much respect that Mah Tsay afterwards said 
 she was reminded of the morning when her son 
 returned home from following the Boh. 
 
 " Shall you go and visit Mah Pan ? " she asked 
 as they ate rice that evening, " she has been asking 
 when you would come." 
 
 " She was asking, was she ? " said Pho Lone 
 carelessly. 
 
 "Yes, several times she has brought the child 
 here and always asked when you were to arrive. 
 I think she wants you to go and see her." 
 
 " I daresay she does," said Pho Lone drily ; for 
 it was in his mind that Mah Pan gave herself 
 great airs when she was Thaw' thekin's wife and 
 he was only a constable. Without doubt she 
 would now be very glad to have a police nai-kah 
 come courting her. 
 
 " I daresay she saw me arrive this morning," he 
 said. 
 
 " She was watching, I saw her," said Mah Tsay ; 
 and Pho Lone straightened his back and smiled a 
 little. That eight rupees spent on boat hire had 
 not been wasted.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 385 
 
 When Moung Maw went to see Mah Pan that 
 evening he found her dressed in her best town 
 clothes and wearing more jewellery than usual ; 
 she was so sweet to him that he spent a long time 
 in the house, and good-natured Shway Toon, who 
 had come with him, quietly went away after sitting 
 outside for a couple of betel chews. 
 
 "He did not come last night," Mah Pan said 
 to her mother in the morning. 
 
 " Give him only a neighbours greeting when 
 you meet," said Mah Hehn. " And remember 
 that the carpenter wants you to go and give him 
 instructions about the new rest-house this morn- 
 ing." 
 
 Mah Pan did not remember that Moung Maw 
 had said anything about instructions, but it is 
 well to be guided by one's mother, and accordingly 
 she spent much time that morning under a shady 
 tree watching Moung Maw at work ; other men 
 and women were there, so she showed the carpenter 
 much respect and attention. 
 
 That evening Moung Let gave a feast to cele- 
 brate Pho Lone's return. The young official had 
 brought many good things to eat from the town, 
 and the fellows said that such a feast had never 
 before been seen in Myothit. The jam in tin pots 
 and preserved milk to eat with it were finished to 
 the last drop, and Moung Maw had difficulty in 
 securing two of the biscuits with pink sugar to 
 keep for Turn. The strange meats from tins were 
 
 2 B
 
 386 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 also very good ; but much of these was left over 
 because when one has eaten a great deal of jam 
 and milk one does not care about meat. There 
 was no liquor, because, as Moung Let said more 
 than once to his guests : "My son being an Official 
 it would not be proper for any one to get even a 
 little drunk in his presence." It was a very 
 delightful evening, and if Pho Lone was a little 
 proud it was no more than his friends expected ; 
 even Moung Maw said he was not such a bad 
 fellow, while Pho Lone declared that his friend 
 the carpenter was the finest chap on the creek. 
 
 " He is a fine fellow," said Shway Toon who 
 was one of the last to go, " a very fine one. I know 
 somebody who thinks much of Moung Maw." 
 
 " A girl, without doubt ! " laughed Pho Lone 
 who was in the highest spirits. 
 
 " A girl you visited once." 
 
 " Mah Pan ! She would never marry a jungle 
 carpenter ! " 
 
 " You think so ? She has eyes for no other 
 man." 
 
 When strolling down the village before sunset 
 that evening Pho Lone had met Mah Pan, and 
 she passed him by with scarcely a word ; true, his 
 own greeting had been very off-hand, because 
 after what Mah Tsay had told him he meant to 
 show her that the Wheel had turned again ; but 
 he had thought at the time, " I have only to smile 
 upon her to see all her sweetness." Shway Toon's
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 387 
 
 words gave him an unpleasant feeling, that his 
 mother might have mistaken Mah Pan's purpose 
 in asking about his return ; but he answered with 
 an air : 
 
 " My good fellow, I think you don't understand 
 women very well. I confess I did not till I lived 
 in the town ; but now I rather think I know 
 something about them. Why, I tell you, I have 
 only to " 
 
 " My son, my son ! " 
 
 "It is my old mother who calls," he said, break- 
 ing off. "I must go and hear her." 
 
 Shway Toon went away, and he turned to step 
 back into the house where Mali Tsay, now the 
 guests had gone, was hastily saving the ends of 
 the limp and guttering candles which smoked over 
 the remains of the feast. 
 
 " You called me, mother." 
 
 " You would marry the girl ? " she asked, blink- 
 ing gravely at him over a handful of candle ends. 
 " If you would, do not speak such words as you 
 were going to say to Shway Toon. He would 
 repeat your boast to her, and your chance would 
 then be small. She is proud, you know." 
 
 "Perhaps you are right, mother. But I 
 think 
 
 " Perhaps ! I am sure of it. There, go ! it is 
 time to sleep." 
 
 Shway Toon's words proved so far wrong that 
 when Pho Lone met Mah Pan next morning, and
 
 388 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 said pleasant things concerning Turn, she was 
 gracious to him. He sat down on the brick path- 
 way to talk to her, and heard all about the new 
 work of merit. The fact that the carpenter was 
 building it of course made frequent mention of his 
 name necessary, but to Pho Lone it seemed that 
 it came to her lips more often than it ought. 
 
 " See the pretty cakes Moung Maw brought 
 Turn this morning," she said holding up the little 
 fist. 
 
 " He was at our house last night. I shall take 
 him up for stealing," said Pho Lone. 
 
 Mah Pan laughed at his joke ; this was an 
 encouraging sign. 
 
 "You know I am now naikah of police?" he 
 said. 
 
 " Moung Maw told me," said Mah Pan inno- 
 cently. 
 
 " He comes often to your house ? " 
 
 " Yes, often. Turn and I like Moung Maw." 
 
 " Do you not sometimes wish to live again in 
 the town ? " asked Pho Lone presently. 
 
 Mah Pan loved the village best. She should not 
 care if she never saw the town again. 
 
 " I sometimes wish for the jungle, I must say," 
 said Pho Lone, " but having gained the favour of 
 the head of the police I must live in town, for I 
 hope some day to be promoted inspector." 
 
 " That will be a very fine position," said Mah Pan 
 really impressed.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 389 
 
 "Yes; but there is much responsibility with 
 it." 
 
 " An official's work must be very wearisome," 
 said Mah Pan as though she had never in her life 
 seen a policeman asleep under a tree ; " You are 
 glad to come away for a time ? " 
 
 " I am glad ; the more so because I see my old 
 mother." 
 
 " You have friends in the village also." 
 
 " Some have forgotten me, I think." 
 
 " Forgotten you so quickly? " 
 
 " But yesterday one passed with a bare word." 
 
 " Perhaps perhaps she thought you did not 
 wish to speak." 
 
 " The elder sister was mistaken." 
 
 " Also the sun was high." 
 
 " The sun had not risen so high as now when 
 she can sit and talk." 
 
 "Showing she has not forgotten you," retorted 
 Mah Pan smiling. 
 
 Pho Lone smiled too ; but with dignity, as 
 became an official. "Well then," he said, " I hope 
 I shall be here to throw stones on Moung Byoo's 
 roof when you are married to Moung Maw." 
 
 " To Moung Maw! What do you mean ? Why 
 to the carpenter ? " 
 
 "One hears the village talk, and you tell me 
 that he comes often to your father's house." 
 
 " I am building this new rest-house ; therefore 
 he must come."
 
 390 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 " And you say ' I like him much.' ' 
 
 " I might also say, ' I like much the police 
 nai-kah Pho Lone.' ' 
 
 " Oh ! you might say that ! Then I shall come 
 and see you at bachelor's time." 
 
 " I cannot prevent you." And saying this, 
 Mah Pan rose and fled back to the house where 
 she found her mother. Mah Hehn listened with 
 interest, nodding her head as if to say " Just what 
 I expected." 
 
 "But suppose Moung Maw comes first to-night," 
 said Mah Pan, when she had told all that had 
 passed, " I do not wish him to come any more now." 
 
 " Give the carpenter sweet words, but not too 
 sweet ; you are not sure of him yet ; " but by 
 " him," Mah Hehn did not mean Moung Maw. 
 
 Mah Pan tossed her head at this ; but her 
 mother's advice had proved so wise that she 
 resolved to follow it again. 
 
 When Moung Maw came along the street that 
 evening, he said to Shway Toon who was with 
 him as usual, that he should not go in to-night ; 
 and Shway Toon glancing into Moung Byoo's, saw 
 Pho Lone and Mah Pan sitting together in the 
 lamplight. 
 
 " Come to my house and play cards instead," 
 said Shway Toon, " we will get Moung Yeik and 
 some other fellows also." 
 
 " That will be good," said Moung Maw, " let us 
 go and play."
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 391 
 
 The young men played until far into the night ; 
 Moung Maw was the noisiest of all, and drank the 
 most ; when the party broke up he was so drunk 
 that Shway Toon and Moung Yeik had to hold his 
 arms and lead him home. From that day forward 
 he went no more to Moung Byoo's house, though 
 Mah Pan came every day to look on at the build- 
 ing he directed and gave him words sweeter than 
 she had ever spoken before. 
 
 It would have been strange if a man of spirit 
 had gone to see her again, for each night people 
 who chanced to stroll in the street at young man's 
 time to enjoy the cool air of the night, might see 
 in the lamplight Mah Pan in her best, with Pho 
 Lone at her side. 
 
 " They will marry," said the gossips ; and the 
 only question was whether they would marry 
 before Pho Lone had to return to duty. 
 
 This doubt was cleared up in a few days time, 
 when Moung Let in his silk pasoh and a clean white 
 jacket walked with Mah Tsay, also in her best 
 clothes, to Moung Byoo's house. All knew what 
 their errand was, and all who held themselves ot 
 kin near enough to be present made haste to the 
 house. Nearly every one in the village was a 
 cousin at least of a parent on one side or the other, 
 so when Moung Let came in followed by his wife, 
 the neighbours squatted four deep all round the 
 mats which had been spread for the special guests 
 in the middle of the floor ; the elders were there
 
 392 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 wearing the white muslin fillets with which old 
 men replace the bright head-kerchief worn by 
 others, and for them clean mats had also been laid. 
 Mah Pan was not present ; but the creaking of the 
 partition which shut off her sleeping-room, a 
 man's height above, told those whose ears were 
 sharp that she was listening and perhaps peeping 
 down on them. 
 
 The day was still and so hot that the crows in 
 the tree outside crouched on the boughs with 
 open beaks and drooping wings. Moung Let 
 wiped the drops from his face with his sleeve as 
 he entered, and sat down with Mah Tsay at his 
 side, but a span behind. Moung Byoo inclined 
 his head gravely as his neighbour begged leave to 
 sit, and with downcast eyes waiting for him to 
 speak. 
 
 ''You know the purpose of our coining," said 
 Moung Let cheerfully, as one who knows he is 
 welcome. 
 
 "We are pleased to see you," said Moung 
 Byoo ; and Mah Helm murmured, " Pleased to 
 see you ; " though the womaD should keep closed 
 lips on these occasions. 
 
 " Our son," said Moung Let, raising his voice a 
 little, " our son loves your daughter, and wishes 
 to make her his wife." 
 
 " We are honoured," said Moung Byoo, " much 
 honoured." Then again was a little silence for it 
 was Moung Byoo's turn to speak, and he sought
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 393 
 
 pleasant words to say what duty requires of a 
 girl's father. Overhead the partition creaked, 
 and one might hear eager whispering. " I believe, 
 good neighbour," said Moung Byoo at last, " I am 
 sure that your admirable son is of good blood ; 
 that in his family on either side has never been 
 any taint of slave blood ? That none of his fore- 
 bears have been King's slaves, nor Pagoda 
 slaves ? " 
 
 " There is no slave blood in our family," replied 
 Moung Let. 
 
 "No, no! surely not," murmured the assembled 
 friends. 
 
 " And we are also sure that he has in his veins 
 no taint of the Grave-digger class ? " continued 
 Moung Byoo. 
 
 "Neither the ancestors of myself nor of my 
 woman have had any strain of Grave-digger 
 caste," replied Moung Let. 
 
 And the neighbours again murmured, " Surely 
 not," in politeness. 
 
 Moung Byoo paused again to find words for the 
 other formal questions, and dug splinters from the 
 mat with his nail as he thought. 
 
 " He is a very fine young man. We feel sure 
 he is healthy." 
 
 " Our son does not suffer from leprosy nor 
 scrofula, nor from other evil disease that is 
 properly held disgraceful. He is clean and 
 healthy."
 
 394 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 "We were sure of it," said Moung Byoo, re- 
 lieved that his task was nearly over. "Well, 
 then, good neighbour, in the presence of our 
 friends and neighbours, we consent to your excel- 
 lent son's marriage with our daughter ; and we 
 shall pray that long life, fertility, and much 
 happiness attend their union." 
 
 " It is very good," said Moung Let gravely. 
 
 "We all wish the young people freedom from 
 the Accidents, Diseases, and Misfortunes ; and 
 veiy great happiness," said Ko Moung Galay ; 
 and the head-man having said these words, every- 
 body burst into talk. 
 
 All were agreed that the match was most suit- 
 able, and could not but be a happy one ; and all 
 of course were very much surprised, not having 
 dreamed for a moment that anything of the kind 
 was impending. Moung Byoo and Mah Hehn 
 received much sympathy for that their son-in- 
 law would dwell for so brief a space in their 
 house after the wedding ; but they were re- 
 signed. 
 
 " We are sorry," said Moung Byoo, " but an 
 Official of course," he sighed, " an Official has very 
 important duties to perform, and Pho Lone is 
 required by the Government in the town whither 
 he must take his wife." 
 
 " Yes, yes ; it is the case," said the neighbours 
 very solemnly, and by slow degrees the gathering 
 melted away, leaving Moung Byoo to take off his
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 395 
 
 jacket with the tight sleeves, and exchange his 
 silk pasoh for the old cotton one he always wore. 
 His face was grave as he sat with his back 
 against the wall, smoking ; for he was sorry that 
 his daughter should leave him again. Mali Hehn 
 upstairs was all bustle and chatter. Once Moung 
 Byoo heard her say, " A sergeant's pay is thirty 
 rupees a month," at which he shook his head 
 looking graver than before. 
 
 Moung Let and his wife were also grave as they 
 walked down the street in the heat, for a married 
 son is a lost son. 
 
 " You will marry her to-morrow, I expect ? " said 
 Mah Tsay sadly to Pho Lone, when she returned 
 to the house where the young man had been 
 waiting with a friend or two. 
 
 " Yes, to-morrow, good mother. Moung Yeik 
 has promised to bring the bullock cart to take my 
 goods to Moung Byoo's house." 
 
 Pho Lone's goods in Myothit were very few, 
 consisting of a mat and a pillow, a change of 
 clothes, and a betel box ; but he had more property 
 at the thannah, and his friends would lend him all 
 he needed to make a respectable show in the cart 
 which would follow him. 
 
 Before the sun was hot next morning, Moung 
 Yeik drove the cart before Moung Let's, and pulled 
 off the mat he had thrown over various boxes and 
 other matters of his own which he had lent for the 
 occasion. Pho Lone tossed his bundle into it, and
 
 396 WITH THE JUNGLE FOLK 
 
 settling his belt, led the way along the street, re- 
 turning with smiles the good wishes of the neigh- 
 bours who stood on their verandahs to see him 
 pass, the bullock cart squeaking and groaning 
 behind him. A few neighbours had assembled at 
 Moung By oo's, and these were admiring Mah Pan's 
 dress, for she wore her best tamein, a white silk 
 jacket, and a new pink silk kerchief about her 
 shoulders carefully arranged that it might not hide 
 her necklet. ' 
 
 " The rice is ready, my son," said Moung Byoo, 
 as Pho Lone stepped into the house ; and as he 
 spoke, Mah Hehn set on the floor a new lacquer 
 tray with a little boiled rice. 
 
 "Eat from the same dish," said Ko Moung 
 Galay, " eat from the dish, Son and Daughter." 
 
 Pho Lone sitting ate a mouthful, and Mah Pan, 
 taking her place beside him, did the same ; they 
 smiled to each other. 
 
 " It is done," said Ko Moung Galay, "they are 
 man and wife." 
 
 After the sky was shut Pho Lone and Mah Pan 
 listening, heard the dull thud and rustle of a heavy 
 stone on the roof. 
 
 " The bachelors are come," said the bride. 
 
 The stones came thick and fast upon the thatch, 
 but no word from the young fellows in the street 
 without ; for this is a ceremony performed in silence 
 to prove unmarried envy.
 
 IN A BURMESE VILLAGE 897 
 
 " And it was long ago my thought that I should 
 throw stones upon this roof for Moung Maw," said 
 Pho Lone. 
 
 And Moung Maw throwing with good will said 
 in his heart, " Other girls are left."
 
 GLOSSARY 
 
 Aing-sohn, the guardian spirit of a Burmese dwelling. 
 
 Bund, a low, flat-topped bank of earth. 
 
 Chatty, earthenware vessel used to hold water or for cooking. 
 
 Chetty, Madras money-lender. 
 
 Choung, a %vater-worn gully. 
 
 Dah, sword-knife ; shape varies according to purpose. 
 
 Goung, lit. " head" the head-man of a village. 
 
 Hpoongyee, Bhuddist priest. 
 
 Kabya, lit. " half" a Eurasian. 
 
 Kullah, " stranger from the West" commonly a native of India. 
 
 Kwin, paddy land. 
 
 Kyeezee, a small triangular gong. 
 
 Kyoung, monastery. 
 
 Loon pasoh, a silk waist-cloth of peculiar pattern. 
 
 Mamootee, a species of hoe, like a large adze. 
 
 Nadoung, ear ornament of amber, glass or ivory, in shape like 
 
 a stick ferrule, solid or hollow ; sometimes jewelled. 
 Nat, fairy, sprite, kelpie. 
 Paddy, growing rice ; also rice unhusked. 
 Pah, an oblong rushivork receptacle with a cover as deep as the 
 
 box ; used by Burmese and Europeans. 
 Pasoh, man's waist-cloth. 
 Sayah, learned man.
 
 400 GLOSSARY 
 
 Sit-boh, " war chief" officer. 
 
 Sohn, spirit. 
 
 Talouk, " stranger from the East," commo r nly a Chinaman. 
 
 Tamein, ivoman's skirt. 
 
 "A betel chew," the time required to chew a betel nut, 15 or 
 20 minutes. 
 
 " A bamboo's length," 30 or 40 yards. 
 
 " A bow shot," 60 <' 80 yards. 
 
 " Courting Time," also called " Young man's " and " Bache- 
 lor's Time ; " in the country villages from soon after dark 
 to about 9 P.M. 
 
 " Sky shuts," nightfall. 
 
 " Bed star rises," 2 or 3 A.M. 
 
 
 Printed by BALLANTYNE, HANSON & Co, 
 London and Edinburgh
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 Form L9-50wi-4,'61(B8994s4)444
 
 PR 
 1 600$ Cuming - 
 
 PR 
 60 
 C911w